IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | Welcome to Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard Beyond the Basics.
| | 00:04 | I'm your instructor, Christopher Breen from MacWorld, and
I'm happy to be here with you talking all about Leopard.
| | 00:12 | In this title, we go beyond the basics to cover
some of the most essential parts of Mac OS X.
| | 00:19 | For example, we talk about customizing the interface.
| | 00:22 | Mac OS X 10.5 is very customizable
and right after that, we get in there
| | 00:27 | and we tweak some settings to make
your Mac easier to work with.
| | 00:31 | Next up, advanced system preferences.
We have been into system preferences
| | 00:35 | on Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard Essential Training, but now we go
beyond the basics, really dig into the system preferences
| | 00:43 | and show you how to tweak the Mac within
an inch of its little digital life.
| | 00:48 | Mail, iCal and Address Book, sure,
you can use these things now,
| | 00:52 | but there are lots of ways you can customize these
things to make them more powerful and more useful to you.
| | 00:58 | Yes, we are going on Safari again.
| | 01:00 | We'll go to greater depth about bookmarks, learn how to
cover your browsing tracks and use Safari with files stored
| | 01:06 | on your Mac to enhance it in useful ways.
| | 01:11 | And we dig deep into the Utilities folder showing
off some of the powerful capabilities built
| | 01:16 | into the Mac tucked away in this powerful folder.
| | 01:20 | Within there, we take a long look at Disk Utility.
| | 01:23 | This innocent sounding utility does more stuff than you
can imagine, including repairing your Mac's hard drive,
| | 01:30 | formatting and partitioning your
hard drive, creating software RAIDs,
| | 01:34 | working with disk images and burning CDs and DVDs.
| | 01:39 | Terminal. You may have heard that UNIX lies beneath the
surface of OS X. While it may seem complicated to some,
| | 01:45 | there are some very useful things you
can do with Terminal. I give you a tour
| | 01:49 | and show you some helpful things to do with it.
| | 01:52 | And then, there is Automator.
| | 01:53 | For just about forever, it's been possible to automate
your Mac with a scripting language called AppleScript.
| | 01:58 | Problem is AppleScript is not accessible to a lot of
people, but Automator is and I show you how to use it.
| | 02:05 | In Essential Training, we skipped over a few
applications and now it's time to take a look.
| | 02:09 | We look at Calculator, Font Book and
iSync. And finally troubleshooting.
| | 02:15 | Nearly perfect though your Mac and OS X may be,
sometimes bad or at least confusing things can happen.
| | 02:20 | We will go over common problems and offer solutions.
| | 02:24 | So, settle in with your Mac and get ready to go
beyond the basics with Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Customizing the InterfaceGetting settled into the interface| 00:00 | Since we have recorded Mac OS X Essential Training,
Apple has changed Leopard's interface in welcome ways.
| | 00:07 | And in this lesson we are going to
see how the changes can benefit you.
| | 00:10 | One of the things they have changed is you can
now change the translucence of the menu bar.
| | 00:18 | You may like the way that the menu bar looks now.
| | 00:20 | As you can see here we have got a little star
shining through with this desktop pattern.
| | 00:25 | But perhaps you don't. You may find that distracting.
| | 00:28 | We will go to System Preferences, Desktop & Screen Saver.
| | 00:33 | And you see here at the bottom there is now an option
| | 00:35 | for the Translucent Menu Bar. You can turn it off, it become
solid, you can turn it on and it becomes Translucent again.
| | 00:43 | Why would you want to change this?
| | 00:45 | Well for some patterns it is perfectly okay.
| | 00:47 | This isn't so bad with the default pattern,
we have that little star shining through
| | 00:51 | but some other patterns can be a problem.
| | 00:53 | For example, I pick these rocks here.
| | 00:55 | See the rocks are really shining through up here.
| | 00:58 | In certain applications you are
going to find this distracting.
| | 01:00 | And the way to turn that off is simple enough.
| | 01:04 | Translucent Menu Bar is off and now you have this kind
of gray graduated look that you saw in previous versions
| | 01:11 | of Mac OS X. Go back to the default desktop pattern.
| | 01:16 | Now as you look in the dock, in the past you
had two views within the dock. You had a Fan View
| | 01:24 | and you had a Grid View as we refer
it to in the previous title.
| | 01:28 | You now have a new option where you can view this as a List.
| | 01:33 | And you see here you click and hold on this
and you see there is now a new List option.
| | 01:37 | There is also a new Folder option.
| | 01:39 | Now watch what happens when I choose
these. Go to List; looks the same.
| | 01:43 | But we now change Folder and now you get a nice little
Folder icon here that tells me that's Documents.
| | 01:50 | I am now going to change the Downloads
folder as well so now it's List.
| | 01:57 | Now it's Folder.
| | 01:58 | Now when I click on this you can
see the contents of that Folder.
| | 02:03 | Well that doesn't appear to be very helpful right
now because there is just a single file there.
| | 02:07 | Let's make something that's more helpful.
| | 02:09 | I will open my hard drive, I grab the Applications
folder and I drag that down into the dock.
| | 02:18 | In earlier versions of Leopard if you
were to click on this, what would happen?
| | 02:22 | You get this Fan. Well look, there
is 78 more of these things to display.
| | 02:27 | Okay another option. I could use is-
alright fine. Let me see that in a Grid.
| | 02:30 | Well that's still an awful lot
of stuff to have to pick through.
| | 02:35 | But if we use the trick I showed
you before, List. And Folder.
| | 02:42 | Now we have got this nice List and
we can dig down into these Folders
| | 02:48 | as indicated by the arrows that go off to the side.
| | 02:53 | So I can just keep going and finally
navigate to the file I want.
| | 02:58 | I find this very convenient, you may as well. However,
you may prefer the original design where you use a Fan
| | 03:04 | or a Grid and you're welcome to choose those options.
| | 03:07 | For now we are going to keep this List and
Folder View because I find that very convenient.
| | 03:12 | And the final thing we are going to do
is change the desktop pattern because I,
| | 03:17 | and maybe you, find this desktop
pattern a little bit distracting.
| | 03:21 | There is an off a lot going on
here. I like a simpler pattern.
| | 03:24 | In order to get that I right-click on
the desktop, change desktop background,
| | 03:30 | Apple Images and here is this nice Aqua Blue desktop
pattern that we will use for the rest of the lessons.
| | 03:38 | And those are some of the ways that you can
configure Mac OS X 10.5 to be easier to use.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Moving more quickly on your Mac| 00:00 | You know that you can launch applications by opening
the Applications folder and double-clicking on Programs.
| | 00:06 | But there are more expedient ways and
I will show some of them to you now.
| | 00:11 | One of the most expedient ways is just to use Spotlight.
Simply hold down Command (Cmd), hit the spacebar and then type
| | 00:18 | in the first few letters of the program that
you would like to launch for example I am going
| | 00:21 | to launch Safari now so S-A-F is enough to do it.
| | 00:25 | You know as the application is highlighted. All I have to do
to launch that application is press Return and there we are,
| | 00:32 | Safari is up and running and ready to go.
| | 00:36 | Another thing you can do is drag
an application into the dock.
| | 00:40 | You see in the dock we already have
some applications but I can add more.
| | 00:43 | Here is a little shortcut for you. I had added this
Applications Folder here. Yes, I can click on that
| | 00:49 | and I can navigate to the application I want but one
other very cool shortcut is to hold down the Cmd key
| | 00:54 | and click on the Applications folder
and it opens that window in the Finder.
| | 00:59 | I can arrow over so I have selected an application
in here, let's suppose I want to add iDVD.
| | 01:04 | Simple enough, I-D-V.
| | 01:06 | That's enough to get me the application I want.
| | 01:09 | I can then drag iDVD into the dock and add it there.
| | 01:14 | And now I can simply launch it
by clicking on it in the dock.
| | 01:19 | One of the way you can do things is you can create
aliases so let's say I want to add Firefox. I want to put
| | 01:26 | it on the desktop so I can get to it quickly.
| | 01:29 | Here is Firefox in my Applications menu. Just hold down
Cmd and Option and drag it down and you will notice
| | 01:36 | that little arrow icon there that
indicates that this is an alias.
| | 01:40 | This isn't the real program.
| | 01:42 | It is just a pointer that's the little
arrow icon that tells me that it is going
| | 01:47 | to launch the application that
is associated with that alias.
| | 01:52 | So we just created and alias we want
to, I don't care to have that right now,
| | 01:56 | drop it into the trash and I will enter the trash.
| | 02:00 | You can also configure the Sidebar.
| | 02:02 | Over here in the Sidebar, Apple gives us the
few things so we can navigate to them easily.
| | 02:07 | I can get to the desktop I can get to my User Folder,
I can get to Applications, I can get to Documents.
| | 02:12 | But there are other things that
I want to get to just as quickly.
| | 02:15 | For example, I want to get to the Utilities
Folders and we are going to be going
| | 02:18 | into Utilities a lot as we get into these lessons.
| | 02:21 | So let's take Utilities we will drag it over to
the Sidebar and you see that now we can add that.
| | 02:26 | I am going to be digging into my Users Folder every so often
so let's drag that over as well and now we have added Users,
| | 02:34 | close that up, you can also take things out of
the dock and honestly I don't want iDVD in there.
| | 02:40 | I will just grab it, pull it out and poof!
| | 02:43 | it's gone.
| | 02:43 | And speaking of poof let's add a
few things up here to the toolbar.
| | 02:48 | And we will see how that poof reference worst in a minute.
| | 02:51 | Address Book, drag it up into the toolbar and you notice
we now have a little Plus icon indicating that it's happy
| | 02:58 | to add this in here, drag it in here and now I can get
to Address Book if I want to by having it in the toolbar.
| | 03:08 | Now suppose I want to get it out of the toolbar
well you can't just click it and drag it
| | 03:13 | because it doesn't do anything, I have
to hold down the Cmd key, click, drag.
| | 03:19 | Poof! it's gone and once again
here we have our poof reference.
| | 03:22 | Close out the window, return to the desktop and
we have now modified the interface in such a way
| | 03:28 | that it's easier for us to now launch applications.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Advanced Personal System PreferencesChanging languages with the International system preference| 00:00 | In this movie, we are going to look at
the International System Preference.
| | 00:06 | As the name hints, the International System Preference is
where you tell the Mac what language you prefer to work in.
| | 00:12 | But you will find other settings as well including
Date, Time, Number and Currency settings as well
| | 00:17 | as Keyboard Layouts and Special
Character and Keyboard Palettes.
| | 00:21 | We are going to start with the Language tab.
| | 00:24 | If you've ever wanted to see how people in different
countries view the Macintosh, just click the Language tab
| | 00:29 | in the International System Preference, grab a language
from the list and propel it to the top of the list.
| | 00:35 | When you log out and back in, your Mac's interface text will
appear in that language and we are going to do just that.
| | 00:41 | So, I will pick French, grab it, drag it to the top
of the list, and now when I log out and back in again,
| | 00:49 | we will be seeing the Macintosh interface in French.
| | 00:53 | Sacre bleu! As you can see we are in French,
| | 00:56 | a language I am completely unfamiliar with.
| | 00:59 | But as you see, we touch our Show All,
which I assume that's what that means,
| | 01:04 | and you see all of the system preferences are in French.
| | 01:06 | We were to choose Menu commands, they too are in French.
| | 01:11 | Again, I don't speak French, so I am going
back to the International System Preference.
| | 01:14 | I will take English, I will propel it to the top and once
again, log out and log back in and when I do log back in,
| | 01:22 | I will come back to my native tongue,
which is of course English.
| | 01:27 | You can work with a wider variety of languages by clicking
the Edit List button and enabling language as you want
| | 01:35 | to use, note that you can even use
different variations of English.
| | 01:39 | So for example, we have got Australian English here.
| | 01:43 | Click that, I click OK, and that
goes to the top of the list.
| | 01:49 | When you promote one of these English varieties to the
top of the list, the Menu commands are the same but things
| | 01:54 | like the Spelling Dictionary will change,
flagging the word 'c-o-l-o-r' as incorrect
| | 02:00 | because the British or Australian spelling is 'c-o-l-o-u-r'.
| | 02:07 | We don't want Australian English so
we are going to put English back here.
| | 02:10 | When you log back out and in again, you will see the
interface changed to accommodate Australian English
| | 02:16 | but we are not going to do that, we are going to leave it in
good old American English and continue working from there.
| | 02:22 | You can also choose how items and windows are
sorted; by Name, Date Modified and Size for instance.
| | 02:28 | So the language you choose can affect this sort and
you do that here from the order for sorted list,
| | 02:33 | so I will choose Danish for example
and list should be sorted differently.
| | 02:38 | Now, we will move to the Formats tab.
| | 02:42 | The International System Preference includes
templates for displaying Dates, Times, Numbers,
| | 02:47 | Currency and Measurement Units and you can
quickly change the way these things are displayed
| | 02:53 | by simply choosing a different
location in the region popup menu.
| | 02:57 | So for example, we are in the United States now, we will
select United Kingdom and the date format, the time format,
| | 03:04 | numbers and the currency have changed
as well as the measurement units.
| | 03:09 | In the US, we use US measurement units.
| | 03:14 | In the UK, they do things different and they use the
metric system as does much of the rest of the world.
| | 03:20 | If you like, you can customize the date and times areas.
| | 03:24 | So you simply click Customize in the Dates area and you
see that you can choose to show Short, Medium, Long, Full,
| | 03:34 | which is about as detailed as you can get.
| | 03:37 | Within this date and time headings, you can choose from
the popup menu so you can customize them the way you want.
| | 03:43 | So for example, if you don't want the number of the month to
show, you can choose Just Show Jan for example instead of 1.
| | 03:50 | We will put it back the way that it was.
| | 03:52 | Click OK. And in time, you can have a 12-hour
clock but you can also have a 24-hour clock.
| | 04:02 | So, if you are in military time, use
01 through 24 and you are good to go.
| | 04:11 | Now, customizing the time doesn't
change the menubar clock if it's showing
| | 04:15 | because those settings are handled by
the Date and Time System Preference.
| | 04:19 | However, when you change the way the time is
displayed, say to a 24-hour clock as I mentioned,
| | 04:24 | that change does appear in applications
such as Mail and iCal.
| | 04:29 | And finally, we will move to the Input menu.
| | 04:33 | The main purpose of the Input menu is
to allow you to change Keyboard Layouts.
| | 04:36 | For example, if you are routinely typing Spanish, you
want a Keyboard Layout that makes accented characters
| | 04:42 | or those characters within EMEA easier to type.
| | 04:46 | And here is our worse.
| | 04:47 | Let's suppose we would like to enable Spanish Input
because this is a language I actually speak poorly.
| | 04:55 | Spanish, enable that now.
| | 04:57 | Note when we do that that an American flag icon
appears in the upper right corner of the menubar.
| | 05:05 | Now, all I have to do in order to type in Spanish
is to select that and select a new language.
| | 05:12 | So, here is Spanish.
| | 05:13 | And if wanted to then the proper
characters would show up when I type them.
| | 05:17 | And we can make this more obvious by turning on
the Keyboard Viewer and this is how we do that.
| | 05:23 | Scroll to the top and we enable Keyboard Viewer and
we go back to the menu and Show Keyboard Viewer.
| | 05:32 | Now, here we have kind of a small keyboard.
| | 05:34 | You can enlarge this by clicking the
Green button to enlarge and here we are.
| | 05:38 | Now, we are now in the Spanish keyboard, so
watch what happens when I push the Option key.
| | 05:45 | So we have an accent here now, go
back to the standard Keyboard Layout.
| | 05:48 | Here we have the EMEA character.
| | 05:51 | If we were to go US, the EMEA character disappears.
| | 05:56 | So you can see how this is useful.
| | 05:58 | Even if you don't switch to other languages, if you
are looking for a character that you can't find,
| | 06:02 | you want to find the copyright symbol for example.
| | 06:05 | Here we are.
| | 06:06 | You press the Option key and this is reflected
here that we are holding it down here.
| | 06:11 | You can just find out where some
of these hidden characters are.
| | 06:14 | Cmd key, Option key, Option+Shift.
| | 06:18 | Now we can find the Apple symbol if you
would like to type that into your documents.
| | 06:23 | We will close the Keyboard Viewer.
| | 06:26 | There is one other option in here that I would like
to point out and that is the Character palette.
| | 06:30 | Switch that on, choose it from the Input menu, and here you
have the opportunity to find a lot of very odd characters.
| | 06:42 | You know your Mac can produce them but you
don't know exactly how they can be input.
| | 06:47 | Suppose I want to find a Math symbol for example.
| | 06:49 | Here they are listed.
| | 06:51 | I can choose this arrow character and then
I can insert it into a document if I want.
| | 06:56 | I have the Unicode equivalent showing there if
I want to put in through Unicode in someway.
| | 07:03 | Parentheses, currency symbols, punctuation that
you can't get by other means, miscellaneous,
| | 07:09 | so if you want to put little decorations
in here, little pencil icons,
| | 07:13 | you can do all these through the Character palette.
| | 07:16 | I am going to switch this off and the Keyboard Viewer
off because we don't need to look at those right now.
| | 07:24 | And that's what you can do in the
International System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding security with the Security system preference| 00:03 | The Security System Preference exists to protect
your Mac from Intrusion and then protect the data
| | 00:08 | on your Mac should someone make their way in
either physically or via the Internet or Network.
| | 00:14 | This lesson will focus on the General and FileVault tabs.
| | 00:19 | In the General tab you will find some settings
that you may want to switch on particularly
| | 00:23 | if you are using a Mac that is shared by multiple users.
| | 00:27 | This require a password option means you can put your Mac to
sleep or switch on the screensaver and no one will be able
| | 00:33 | to pick up where you left off without having a password.
| | 00:37 | Disable Automatic Login this is
another good one for a shared computer.
| | 00:42 | If someone tries to get into the Mac by restarting it
they will still need to know a password to log into it.
| | 00:47 | With this option Off the Mac will automatically
boot into the default Admin account.
| | 00:54 | Require password to unlock each system
preference pane, this is something that's similar
| | 00:59 | to what parental controls provide but in parental
controls Apple has deemed it okay for some
| | 01:06 | of the system preferences to be open and others not.
| | 01:09 | This option locks all of them.
| | 01:12 | So that if you want to adjust any of the System Preferences
you will need to unlock them with Add Admin Password.
| | 01:19 | Logout after x minutes of activity and 60 is the one
that's recommended but you can choose anyone you like.
| | 01:26 | The idea here is that if you are the kind of person
that is working in an environment where the Mac is open
| | 01:32 | to other people, of course you don't need
to worry about your family but say you are
| | 01:35 | at work you are in a lab setting something like that.
| | 01:38 | People may wander by if you wandered of and start banging
| | 01:42 | around on your computer and maybe
you don't want that to happen.
| | 01:45 | When you enable this and set a reasonable amount
of time, let's say 15 minutes you can wander away
| | 01:52 | and 15 minutes later the Mac will automatically
logout, this makes it a little safer for you.
| | 01:57 | You don't want to set this too low, if you set it to
something like 5 minutes and you get a phone call,
| | 02:01 | you turn back to your Mac and suddenly gee! I am logged
out. OK, so I have to log back in and it's not convenient.
| | 02:09 | And finally the Use Secure Virtual Memory option when
engaged automatically erases any information stored
| | 02:15 | in the computer's virtual memory which is in the
area of the hard-drive used as if it were RAM
| | 02:20 | and RAM of course is the Mac's short-term memory.
| | 02:24 | Now if you have a Mac that can be controlled by a remote
control that would be a laptop or on iMac for example.
| | 02:31 | You will see one more option here and that option
is called Disabled Remote Control Infrared Receiver.
| | 02:37 | This tells your Mac to turn a blind eye to a
remote control that happens to be pointed at it.
| | 02:42 | Now for the FileVault tab. FileVault was created with
the idea of protecting the data in your Home folder.
| | 02:49 | The idea of being that while it maybe easy to swipe a laptop,
if the data on the computer is encrypted at least all
| | 02:56 | of the thief gets is your laptop rather than a lot of
personal information that could be use for identify theft
| | 03:01 | or running up a credit card for example.
| | 03:03 | The interface is really simple you just set a
master password by clicking Set Master Password.
| | 03:09 | You enter a master password. Let's stay we
are going to enter something like Flubber95.
| | 03:15 | You verify that password that in the next field just
as you would do as if you were creating an account.
| | 03:19 | And just like an account you can enter a hint.
| | 03:23 | So if we were using Flubber95 you would say "Greatest
Disney remakes starring Robin Williams produced sometime
| | 03:32 | in the 90s."
| | 03:33 | And then who would ever guess what that was?
| | 03:35 | Certainly not me.
| | 03:37 | Now there are few things that you
need to know about FileVault.
| | 03:40 | First is, in order to create it you just
enter that information and you click OK
| | 03:45 | and off you go. We are not going to do that right now.
| | 03:48 | Other things to know: FileVault protects
your files only when you are logged out.
| | 03:52 | So if you are logged on and someone snatches your computer
they can access your files just as if they were unprotected
| | 03:58 | because as far as the computer knows
that's you playing with the file.
| | 04:02 | So somebody else could take them.
| | 04:05 | Files can be deleted so if somebody were to
take your laptop they can see those files
| | 04:11 | but they can't use them. However, they can delete them.
| | 04:14 | So they can get rid of your data by what do you care because
you are just trying to protect the stuff in the first place.
| | 04:19 | So if it's gone, it's gone.
| | 04:20 | Your laptop is gone anyway.
| | 04:22 | Anyone with an administrator's
password can have access to your files.
| | 04:26 | So of course if they grab it and you have taped
your administrators to the bottom of your computer,
| | 04:32 | which is a really bad idea, they
will be able to get into your files.
| | 04:37 | Only your Home folder is protected.
| | 04:39 | So you need to think about where
you are going to store your files.
| | 04:41 | You do not want to store important files
at the root level of your hard-drive
| | 04:45 | because they will be unencrypted,
FileVault works only in your Home folder.
| | 04:49 | Shared files will no longer be available on your network.
| | 04:53 | The shared files that are in your Home folder are
now protected so if somebody tries to access them
| | 04:57 | across the network they won't be able to.
| | 05:00 | And finally FileVault can slow down your computer a little
bit because it takes some time once you access that area
| | 05:07 | of your computer to start using those things
because FileVault has to unencrypt them.
| | 05:12 | It doesn't slow down your computer a whole lot, but
if you care about nothing but performance and you are
| | 05:17 | in an environment where nobody is likely to get to
your computer anyway you may wish to keep FileVault off.
| | 05:24 | And in our next lesson we will look
at the next tab, which is Firewall.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring a firewall with the Security system preference| 00:00 | It's time to turn to Leopard's Firewall, which
has seen a dramatic change in this version
| | 00:04 | of OS X. The change is largely about ease of use.
| | 00:08 | See, lots of people didn't use the Firewall
or when they did they misconfigured it.
| | 00:13 | And the new version is meant to avoid that.
| | 00:16 | The new version of the Firewall includes three options.
| | 00:18 | The first is Allow All Incoming Connections, this
means All Incoming Connections are well allowed.
| | 00:25 | Basically any application or service that needs to
speak with the outside world is allowed to do so.
| | 00:31 | This isn't terribly safe though they are currently
are the exploits that are going to harm you.
| | 00:37 | The next option is Allow Only Essential Services.
| | 00:40 | This blocks all extraneous connections to your Mac,
turn this on and you will find that sharing features
| | 00:45 | like File Sharing or Screen Sharing for example don't work.
| | 00:50 | This is useful when you really want to lock
things down but not if you are on a network
| | 00:54 | and you need to communicate with the outside world.
| | 00:57 | And finally last option is Set Access
for Specific Services and Applications.
| | 01:05 | These allow sharing services to work as well as
applications that ask for permission to access the Internet.
| | 01:11 | When you grab that access by clicking Always Allow you
will see the applications listed below a grade line
| | 01:18 | in the Firewall Pane.
| | 01:19 | You can add applications by clicking the Plus Button here.
| | 01:24 | Let's say for example I want to add iTunes, simply click
Add and now I have the option to configure the Firewall
| | 01:32 | for iTunes I can allow all incoming
connections or I can block incoming connections.
| | 01:38 | And if you want to get rid of something
in here you simply click the Minus button.
| | 01:42 | And then there is the Advanced button that
becomes active when you select this last option.
| | 01:47 | This leads to two options.
| | 01:49 | The first option in the sheet Enable
Firewall Logging tells console to keep track
| | 01:54 | of what the Firewall has allowed and blocked.
| | 01:57 | Console is and application that works in the background
that keeps a record of everything that you do on your Mac
| | 02:02 | and we will be looking at Console later in the series.
| | 02:06 | This is one way to see if evil outside sources are
trying to get in or which applications are attempting
| | 02:13 | to phone home meaning some applications you installed
will send a little message back to their home server.
| | 02:19 | And most of the time this is for something completely benign
or beneficial, for example an application wants to find
| | 02:25 | out if there is a new version of itself
that it will then prompt you to download.
| | 02:29 | Also you can see if your kid is
using a File Sharing Application.
| | 02:34 | Within that Firewall log, look in the console
and you will see if somebody is trying
| | 02:38 | to use a Peer-to-Peer Sharing Application.
| | 02:41 | And then there is Enable Stealth Mode.
| | 02:45 | Switching this on helps hide your Mac from
those looking for open ports on the Internet.
| | 02:49 | Should someone send a query to your
Mac, which is also called Pinging,
| | 02:53 | it won't respond. Instead it will just
pretends as if it's not there at all.
| | 02:58 | But what if you need to open or close specific ports?
| | 03:01 | Every so often you will come across an application
that requires that a particular port be open or closed.
| | 03:06 | In Tiger and earlier versions of Mac OS X, its
Firewall could do that. With Leopard you can't.
| | 03:13 | So in this case I suggest you use another program and
throughout this title we are going to be referring you
| | 03:18 | to free little programs or inexpensive little programs
that you can use to enhance Mac OS X. So I will fire
| | 03:24 | up Safari and we are going to handynet.com.
| | 03:34 | The lovely people here make a program called NoobProof.
| | 03:38 | And as it says it's a basic Firewall application
and its one that allows you to configure Firewalls.
| | 03:50 | You can fire it up, open it please it will prompt
me for a password and it will do this every time.
| | 04:02 | And here you see NoobProof.
| | 04:05 | As you can see there are common ports here
and services and you can change their state.
| | 04:11 | So Apple File Sharing. I would like
to allow that please, so all I have
| | 04:14 | to do is select Allow All Access
and now I have access to that.
| | 04:20 | Suppose I want to add another port. An application says
"I really-really-really need port 5500." OK, no problem,
| | 04:27 | click the Plus button.
| | 04:29 | I need a service. I will call this My App.
| | 04:34 | I could choose a common service if I like. DHCP, camera
sharing, Bonjour, whatever I like. I don't happen to have one
| | 04:42 | of those that I need right now, I want a specific port.
| | 04:45 | I would like 5500.
| | 04:47 | I click Add New Service and there it is, My App.
Now port 5500 is there. Currently it's set to Deny.
| | 04:55 | All I have to do to allow it is click Allow
All Access and now I have access on port 55
| | 05:02 | and of course before you could actually use NoobProof you
have to activate it and so you click Activate NoobProof
| | 05:08 | and now Mac OS X Leopard's Firewall
will pay attention to NoobProof
| | 05:13 | and it will filter the ports as you have configured them.
| | 05:16 | And we will quit NoobProof so even though I have
quit NoobProof it's still working in conjunction
| | 05:22 | with Leopard's Firewall to protect my Mac because I need
access to a bunch of connections throughout the rest
| | 05:28 | of this title I am going to undo everything the NoobProof
is done simply by selecting Allow All Incoming Connections.
| | 05:34 | The Firewall is no longer doing anything,
NoobProof is no longer doing anything.
| | 05:38 | And my Mac is now open to access on all its
ports. And that covers security under Leopard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Advanced Hardware System PreferencesAdding a Bluetooth device with the Bluetooth system preference| 00:00 | The Bluetooth System Preference is
where you configure Bluetooth devices.
| | 00:05 | If no Bluetooth devices appear in the System Preference
when you launch it, you will see a Setup New Device button.
| | 00:11 | Click this and the Bluetooth Setup Assistant launches.
| | 00:16 | This is an application that lives in the core
services folder inside the System folder.
| | 00:21 | Bluetooth Setup Assistant does exactly what it says.
| | 00:24 | It walks you through the process of setting up a Bluetooth
device such as a phone, mouse, printer or keyboard.
| | 00:30 | So we click Continue.
| | 00:31 | You also have the option to pair
a headset or any Bluetooth device.
| | 00:34 | So, if your Bluetooth device doesn't fall into one of these
categories, choose Any Device and Continue from there.
| | 00:40 | We are going to set up a mobile phone.
| | 00:41 | We select that option and click Continue.
| | 00:43 | At this point, my Mac is going to go out and look
for a mobile phone, and look, it just found one,
| | 00:49 | it found my old Sony Ericsson T616 phone
and we are going to pair with it now.
| | 00:56 | So I simply select it and click Continue.
| | 01:00 | Now, let's gather some information.
| | 01:01 | I click Continue again and it's sending a
passcode to the phone so that I can pair with it.
| | 01:08 | So I have the phone in my hand.
| | 01:09 | I enter that passcode and once again Bluetooth
Setup Assistant will do a little more configuration
| | 01:15 | and then I will be good to go.
| | 01:18 | Now, once you have entered that pairing code and it's
been accepted, other options appear including the option
| | 01:24 | to set up iSync to transfer context and events.
| | 01:27 | Of course, this happens only with phones and
personal information devices such as a Palm.
| | 01:33 | The other option is to access the
Internet with your phone's data connection.
| | 01:37 | If you have this kind of plan, you can certainly leave this
enabled and click Continue and then a Window will pop up
| | 01:43 | and offer you settings for configuring those things.
| | 01:45 | I am not going to do that on this go-around.
| | 01:47 | Instead, I am going to leave the iSync option checked
so you can see what it looks like when iSync pops up.
| | 01:53 | I click Continue and iSync launches and it shows my phone.
| | 02:00 | I can click on that phone and then
my synching options appear below.
| | 02:04 | We are going to discuss iSync in more detail
elsewhere in the title, so I will close this for now.
| | 02:11 | And congratulations, I am ready to go.
| | 02:13 | All I have to do at this point is choose
Quit, and here is my Bluetooth device.
| | 02:20 | At this point, I can click Advanced to have other options.
| | 02:25 | So for example, if I paired a Bluetooth keyboard or mouse
and it doesn't show up and my Mac expects it to be there,
| | 02:31 | what will happen is the Bluetooth Setup
Assistant will appear when it doesn't see it.
| | 02:36 | At that point, I can find out why my device is
not working for example maybe the battery ran out.
| | 02:42 | I can put new batteries in it.
| | 02:43 | I can set it up again.
| | 02:44 | It will be ready to go.
| | 02:46 | If I am using a Bluetooth keyboard or mouse that
is paired, this option will become available to me
| | 02:51 | and that option is Allow Bluetooth
Devices to Wake This Computer.
| | 02:55 | So, if my keyboard or mouse is paired with
my computer and the computers goes to sleep,
| | 02:59 | all I have to do is press the key on the keyboard or
click a button on the mouse and the computer will wake up.
| | 03:06 | You also have the option to prompt
for all incoming audio requests.
| | 03:10 | So if you have an audio device that's Bluetooth
compatible and it wants to communicate with your Mac,
| | 03:15 | it will send a little request saying "please, let me
use you," and you say "okay, that's fine, go ahead."
| | 03:20 | And the last one is Share My Internet
Connections with Other Bluetooth Devices.
| | 03:24 | So, if you have Bluetooth Sharing
Setup in Sharing System Preferences,
| | 03:29 | other Bluetooth devices can't share your Mac's Internet
connection and connect to the Internet that way.
| | 03:35 | At the very end, you will see these serial ports
that devices use to connect to this computer.
| | 03:40 | Mostly, you are going to use this option
if you are setting up a Palm device.
| | 03:44 | When you set up that Palm device and go through the
configuration, it will ask you what serial port it's using
| | 03:50 | and this is the information you
want to look for when you find
| | 03:52 | that you select that and you are going to be good to go.
| | 03:55 | And we click OK to get out of there, and that is how we set
up a Bluetooth device using the Bluetooth System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring your display with the Displays system preference| 00:00 | The Display System Preference is where you go to change how
your monitor looks as well as configure multiple monitors.
| | 00:07 | First thing you will see is the Display tab.
| | 00:10 | Along the left is Resolutions.
| | 00:13 | By default, your Mac's monitor
will show its highest resolution.
| | 00:17 | On this monitor, we have 1280x1024.
| | 00:20 | However, because of the way we film these
things, we have a monitor resolution of 1024x768.
| | 00:28 | When you change to a lower resolution, things on
the screen get bigger because you have fewer pixels
| | 00:34 | and the pixels are made up larger to fill the screen.
| | 00:37 | And then, there is the Color popup menu.
| | 00:39 | Most Macs are capable of displaying 16777216
colors which is also known as 24-bit color.
| | 00:50 | You can also choose thousands of colors on this particular
Mac and on some Macs, you can also choose 256 colors.
| | 00:58 | The more colors the monitor displays,
the more realistic the image.
| | 01:02 | And then there is Refresh Rate.
| | 01:05 | Some monitors allow you to change the Refresh Rate.
| | 01:08 | For example, on this one, we could choose 70, 75,
85 but we will stick with the 60 hertz as it is now.
| | 01:15 | The Refresh Rate is the number of times per second the lines
drawn on the monitor to create its pictures are refreshed.
| | 01:22 | So, Refresh Rate is 60 hertz means the
screens are drawn 60 times in a second.
| | 01:27 | The lower the Refresh Rate, the more flicker you may detect.
| | 01:30 | You can't change a Refresh Rate on all monitors.
| | 01:33 | And then, there is other stuff.
| | 01:37 | Depending on the capabilities of your monitor
and whether you have more then one connected,
| | 01:41 | you may see other options including
Detect Displays as we have here.
| | 01:46 | This helps tell another monitor that
it's now also connected to your Mac
| | 01:50 | because we have two monitors connected to this one.
| | 01:53 | Gather windows and this button will appear
when you have more than one monitor connected.
| | 01:57 | It pulls both monitor windows on to the
display where the window currently appears.
| | 02:03 | There is the Rotate option.
| | 02:05 | Some graphics cards and monitors allow you to
rotate the image, so I could rotate this 90 degrees
| | 02:10 | and then I would have to turn my head all the way to
the right in order to clearly make out the display.
| | 02:15 | And then, there is the option to show displays in menubar.
| | 02:19 | Do that and you can change a lot of the settings that
you can also change within the system preference.
| | 02:26 | Next, the Arrangement tab.
| | 02:28 | If you have more than one display plugged into
your Mac and this can also be a projector,
| | 02:35 | you have an Arrangement tab in
the Display System Preference.
| | 02:38 | Here you can turn mirroring on and
off and I will do that right now.
| | 02:42 | Currently, we are mirroring displays but
I switch this off and watch what happens.
| | 02:47 | Now that we have turned mirroring off,
there are couple of things we can do.
| | 02:50 | One, we can identify our monitor
so here is our monitor on the left.
| | 02:55 | Here is the monitor on the right.
| | 02:56 | And you can tell it is because a red outline
surrounds the outer edge of each monitor.
| | 03:02 | You can also move the monitor's position.
| | 03:06 | Right now, we have this left monitor.
| | 03:10 | The other monitor is to its right.
| | 03:12 | So I drag my mouse across and it goes across to the right.
| | 03:16 | I could also put it on top.
| | 03:19 | On the other side, I can put it below or
of course I can return to where it was.
| | 03:23 | I can also change where the menubar is.
| | 03:25 | So, if I wanted to move the menubar to
the other monitor, click it, drag it over,
| | 03:31 | and now the other monitor has the menubar.
| | 03:34 | And that pretty well sums up the Arrangement tab.
| | 03:38 | So now, return and mirror displays.
| | 03:42 | And we are back in the land of mirror display.
| | 03:45 | So let's look at the Color tab.
| | 03:48 | Within the Color tab, you will see a few items.
| | 03:50 | So first is your display profile.
| | 03:52 | When you first plug a display into a
Mac, it will create a profile for you.
| | 03:56 | These are installed by the Mac automatically.
| | 03:59 | You can open that profile if you like and
watch what happens, ColorSync Utility launches.
| | 04:05 | ColorSync Utility is a very powerful application
and one that we are not going to touch
| | 04:10 | because it's nicely covered in
Color Management Essential Training.
| | 04:15 | You can do some powerful things with it
but this is beyond the scope of this title.
| | 04:21 | Also, you can calibrate your monitor.
| | 04:23 | Yes, you can display profile by default
but you could also tweak your monitor
| | 04:27 | if you are not happy with the way it looks.
| | 04:29 | Click Calibrate and up comes the
Display Calibrator Assistant.
| | 04:34 | A couple of ways you can go here.
| | 04:36 | You can go into Expert Mode and when you do,
just as it says, this turns on extra options.
| | 04:41 | This is a way to really fine-tune your
adjustments but we will walk through the basics.
| | 04:45 | Click Continue.
| | 04:47 | At this point, you can adjust brightness up and down on
your monitor, too dark is if you see nothing in the middle,
| | 04:53 | too bright is this very bright oval here.
| | 04:56 | It's about right where we see it now, little
black, little gray, you can still see it.
| | 05:00 | Click Continue.
| | 05:01 | You can then adjust Gamma with a slider back and forth.
| | 05:04 | The idea here is that you want to make
this Apple blend in as much as possible.
| | 05:08 | It's actually set pretty well though.
| | 05:10 | Continue again.
| | 05:11 | You can choose a couple of different kinds of Gamma.
| | 05:14 | There is standard Gamma and then there is television Gamma.
| | 05:17 | And depending on how your monitor is set up, you may
see a radical difference between these two Gammas.
| | 05:21 | The 1.8 standard Gamma is standard for the Macintosh.
| | 05:25 | Click Continue again.
| | 05:26 | You can change where the white point is.
| | 05:28 | You can click one of these settings.
| | 05:30 | So for example, D50, you get it more
yellowish white hue, D65 natural white.
| | 05:36 | You can get more blues from 9300.
| | 05:38 | Also, you can click the white point and drag it around
and find the setting that you like and leave it there.
| | 05:44 | Continue again, and then you have got a new calibrated
monitor profile that you can use whenever you choose to.
| | 05:51 | Click Continue and Done, and you see now you have a
calibrated setting here that you can choose from as well.
| | 05:57 | You can also go back to the default that was installed
first or you can go with your calibration if you like.
| | 06:02 | If you don't like what you wound up with
or you just created too many of the things,
| | 06:06 | just click Delete Profile and that profile is gone.
| | 06:12 | Now, there is one other tab that may appear on your Mac.
| | 06:15 | It deals with things like Power and Brightness button
settings if you have an Apple monitor plugged in.
| | 06:20 | For example, when you press the monitor's Power button,
the display turns on or off or puts the Mac to sleep
| | 06:26 | or maybe it does nothing at all when you press that.
| | 06:28 | You can also disable or enable
the monitor's Brightness button.
| | 06:34 | So, before we leave monitors, I am going to
turn Display menu off, so it doesn't distract us
| | 06:40 | and those are the essentials of
the Displays System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring your input devices with the Keyboard & Mouse system preference| 00:01 | You know that you use the Keyboard and Mouse System
Preference to adjust things like key repeat rate
| | 00:06 | and the speed of your mouse but there
are some other powerful features in here.
| | 00:09 | In the Keyboard tab for example,
click the Modifier Keys button.
| | 00:14 | In the resulting sheet, you will see
that you can adjust what the Caps Lock,
| | 00:19 | Control, Option and Command (Cmd) keys do.
| | 00:22 | I think this is really helpful for me in
particular because I am kind of a sloppy typist.
| | 00:27 | So, one of the first things I do when I set up my
Mac is I go here. I click this Caps Lock option
| | 00:33 | and I choose No Action and the reason I do is
because when I type, invariably I make a mistake.
| | 00:39 | I slop over and I hit Caps Lock and then
suddenly, I am typing in all caps and I find
| | 00:44 | that really annoying and then I have to turn Caps Lock off.
| | 00:47 | And honestly, in my day-to-day work, I
never ever, ever use Caps Lock legitimately.
| | 00:52 | So now I can just turn the thing
off and I am perfectly okay.
| | 00:55 | For now, I don't want to fool the next person sitting
on this computer so I will leave Caps Lock on.
| | 01:00 | Also, if you require something alike a Windows
Keyboard that has keys that are reverse.
| | 01:06 | For example, the Option key is the Command
key and the Command key is the Option key.
| | 01:10 | You can swap them so I can make the Option
key the Command key here if I want to
| | 01:14 | and then the Command key the Option key,
so you can swap things around if you like.
| | 01:19 | And we will cancel out of that.
| | 01:21 | Now, in Mouse, you can adjust tracks
speed, double-click speed, scrolling speed.
| | 01:27 | One thing that I find interesting
here is this primary mouse button.
| | 01:31 | If you are a left-handed person, you know that
generally people think about only right-handed people.
| | 01:37 | You've have got a mouse, you would much prefer
to have the primary mouse button be on the right.
| | 01:42 | You can do that here, just click right and it's done.
| | 01:46 | Now, if you are at home or if you are
at the office or somewhere watching this
| | 01:50 | and you are thinking "Hey, that looks clever.
| | 01:52 | You know I don't think I like that after
all, I would like to switch it back."
| | 01:56 | And now you're vainly clicking on
left with the left mouse button.
| | 02:02 | The reason is because now your
primary mouse button is on the right.
| | 02:05 | So to put this back the way you want it,
you have to click the right mouse button.
| | 02:09 | And now you have the option to use your left
mouse button as the primary mouse button.
| | 02:15 | Also, in this window, one thing that people tend to
overlook is this option within here that you can hold
| | 02:20 | down the Control key and then move your scroll wheel
back and forth to enlarge or, once the thing is enlarged,
| | 02:27 | to shrink the size of the display,
and I will show you how that works.
| | 02:31 | Note, before I do, you will see double
arrows because of the way we film this.
| | 02:35 | When you do this on your Mac, you
are only going to see a single arrow.
| | 02:39 | So here is Control key down, zoom in and out.
| | 02:46 | This is really helpful if you are on a website for example
that has really tiny type and you can't see what it says,
| | 02:54 | hold down Control, scroll up, ah I see
what this is, okay and back you go.
| | 02:59 | And finally, we get to a really interesting
tab, which is keyboard shortcuts.
| | 03:04 | With this, you can add keyboard commands or change keyboard
commands and we will do that with the Finders New Folder
| | 03:10 | and New Finder Window commands, and why,
well, I am kind of an old school Mac user.
| | 03:15 | Under OS 9, Cmd+N meant New Folder.
| | 03:19 | Now, under Mac OS X, if you want a
new folder, you hold down Shift+Cmd+N.
| | 03:24 | If you want to play it old school and go back
to the way it was, this is how you do it.
| | 03:28 | So we go to the bottom here and
we see all applications entering,
| | 03:34 | there is nothing here right now
but we are going to add something.
| | 03:36 | So I click the + button.
| | 03:39 | In the sheet that appears under applications, I want
this to work just in the Finder, so I choose Finder.
| | 03:45 | And the menu title is going to be the title
of the command I want to affect, New Folder.
| | 03:55 | Keyboard shortcut for that now is going to be Cmd+N, add.
| | 04:00 | And as you can see, that's been added.
| | 04:03 | We have only fought half the battle because now
we have Cmd+N assigned to two different things.
| | 04:08 | It's assigned to New Folder, but it's still also
assigned to New Finder Window and we want to undo that.
| | 04:15 | So we click + again.
| | 04:17 | We've got the Finder.
| | 04:20 | Now, the menu title for this is New Finder Window.
| | 04:30 | And for the keyboard shortcut, we need to
change it so let's change it to Shift+Cmd+N,
| | 04:36 | which we were using previously to create a new folder.
| | 04:41 | We click Add.
| | 04:44 | In order to make this work, we have to log out and log
back in which is something we are going to do right now.
| | 04:51 | And now that we have logged out and logged back in,
we will check the File, Menu to see how it worked out.
| | 04:55 | New Folder is now Cmd+N.
| | 04:57 | New Finder Window is Shift+Cmd+N, and let's see
if it actually works by pressing those keys.
| | 05:04 | Cmd+N, it's a new folder and Shift+Cmd+N
is New Finder Window, just as we ask.
| | 05:11 | And let's put things back the way they were.
| | 05:14 | Go to System Preferences, Keyboard/Mouse and you can
easily do this simply by choosing Restore Defaults.
| | 05:22 | And when you do, notice that under
all applications, that is now gone.
| | 05:28 | I quit System Preferences.
| | 05:33 | These are still here because I
have to log out and log back in.
| | 05:37 | I will do that but that concludes
our look at keyboard and mouse.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing and faxing with the Print & Fax system preference| 00:00 | The Print and Fax System Preference is all about
adding and configuring printers and fax modems.
| | 00:10 | In the Leopard Essential Trainings
title, I showed you how to add a printer.
| | 00:13 | So let's go one step further.
| | 00:15 | When you connect a printer to your Mac,
the Mac is usually smart enough to add it.
| | 00:21 | Particularly if you plug-in a USB
printer, but sometimes it won't.
| | 00:25 | And in this case, you need to add it manually.
| | 00:28 | In order to do so, you click the + button at the bottom of
the Printers pane and you will see lots of printer options.
| | 00:35 | And if Default is selected, you will see a list of printers
that may be available to you on a network for example.
| | 00:43 | If a printer does show up automatically, you can simply
select it and you'll find its name appears in the name field
| | 00:50 | and it will select the default printer driver.
| | 00:52 | If you would like to use a different printer driver,
| | 00:54 | you simply click on this menu and
you can choose a driver to use.
| | 01:01 | When you do this, a long list of drivers appears below.
| | 01:05 | Now, rather than having to go through this
huge list, you can simply use the search field.
| | 01:09 | So we are looking for a LaserJet 5550 and
there are a couple of options we can use
| | 01:18 | and here is an older printer driver
that we might want to use.
| | 01:22 | In this case, we actually don't want to.
| | 01:24 | Click back here and we will go to Auto Select.
| | 01:27 | One other option is you can also choose Other.
| | 01:30 | If you have downloaded a printer driver from
in this case HP for example, click Other.
| | 01:36 | You will now have a navigation dialog
box so you can navigate to the driver
| | 01:40 | that you've downloaded and installed if you care to.
| | 01:43 | In this case, we are going to go back to the driver
they have given us and we are going to add this printer.
| | 01:50 | All we have to do is click Add.
| | 01:54 | Now, we have two printers in our
Print and Fax System Preference.
| | 02:00 | Before leaving the Print and Fax System Preference,
there are a couple of useful things we can do.
| | 02:05 | One of them is we can create something called a
desktop printer and what this does is it adds an alias
| | 02:11 | of the printer, puts it on the desktop and
then you can drag documents directly to it.
| | 02:16 | When you do this, the host application
for that document will launch
| | 02:21 | and the document will automatically print
without showing you a print dialog box.
| | 02:26 | Then, the host application quits and you
are done and your document is printed.
| | 02:31 | And to create it, all you have to do is
select the printer and drag it to the desktop,
| | 02:36 | which is why it's called a desktop printer.
| | 02:38 | And it will identify itself by the icon have the
little arrow here indicating that it's an alias.
| | 02:44 | Now, if I wanted to print something,
I simply drag it on top of this icon
| | 02:48 | and we go through the process that I explained earlier.
| | 02:51 | I get rid of this for now.
| | 02:54 | Also, if you have more than one printer,
you can set the default in a couple of ways.
| | 02:59 | So you can choose a printer here from the default printer
popup menu which is here, so I can say okay, fine,
| | 03:07 | this HP printer is now going to be my default and that means
that when you open an application and you print something,
| | 03:14 | when you are in the print dialog box, that
printer will automatically be selected.
| | 03:18 | There is another way to do this.
| | 03:20 | Here I have selected this other Inkjet printer.
| | 03:24 | I can Control-click on it or right-click on it and
I can set default printer using the contextual menu.
| | 03:30 | And as you see it says default, it
tells you which one is the default.
| | 03:34 | You can also choose to share a printer.
| | 03:36 | So, if this printer were connected directly to my Mac, I
choose Share This Printer and then any other Macs that are
| | 03:42 | on my network will be able to print from this printer.
| | 03:45 | Now, the Option and Supplies button is sometimes useful.
| | 03:50 | Some printers will talk to your Mac and tell it
about the state of its ink supplies and in this case,
| | 03:55 | we've got one that does but not all of them do.
| | 03:58 | And also, within the Print and Fax System
Preference, you can click the Open Print Q button.
| | 04:03 | What this does then is opens the printing
applications for the specific printer.
| | 04:08 | In this list, you will see the name of
your document, which is very helpful.
| | 04:11 | If you need to, you can pause the printer simply
by clicking Pause Print or you can resume.
| | 04:16 | Or if you have a really long print job that
you would like to stop, you can press Hold
| | 04:20 | and that will hold the selected job and then you can
move another print job up the Q and start printing again.
| | 04:27 | That way, you have a shorter document print first
and then you can resume that longer print job later.
| | 04:33 | This one, very useful option here, you go into
the Printer menu and select Network Diagnostics.
| | 04:40 | When you do this, the network diagnostic
application opens and it allows you to walk
| | 04:44 | through to see how things are working on your network.
| | 04:47 | This is really useful if for example, you're
trying to print something it doesn't seem to print,
| | 04:53 | your Mac is not talking your printer across
the network and you are not sure why.
| | 04:56 | If you just walk through Network Diagnostics,
it will try to pinpoint what's happening.
| | 05:01 | In this case, it gives you the status.
| | 05:02 | So over here, Ethernet is working well, network
settings are fine, ISP is good, internet,
| | 05:07 | but there seems to be some problem on the server.
| | 05:10 | This is connecting later on.
| | 05:11 | As far as you are concerned and printing, all you care about
is yes, my Ethernet is working, network is working, good,
| | 05:17 | that's as far as you need to go
because this is all local stuff here.
| | 05:20 | Once you get to your ISP, you don't care what's happening
there because that's not connected to what's going
| | 05:25 | on with your printer and we can quit that.
| | 05:29 | Now, sending up a fax is very similar.
| | 05:31 | Click the + button.
| | 05:33 | In this case, we select Fax and we look for
any fax that happens to be attached to our Mac.
| | 05:42 | One thing to note here is that modern Macs do not have
modems built in, that's something you found on older Macs
| | 05:48 | or you can add a modem with Apple's $50 USB modem kit.
| | 05:54 | In this case, we will add an extra modem
because we have one attached to this.
| | 05:59 | Simply click Add and there it is,
there is our external modem.
| | 06:04 | When you choose the fax hardware in the Print and Fax
dialog box, you will find controls for sending a fax.
| | 06:09 | The fax number field is where you enter the
number of the fax machine you want to call.
| | 06:15 | But you want to do this work from
the application you're faxing from.
| | 06:19 | So let's open a text edit document,
I'll show you how this works.
| | 06:27 | So I choose Print and from the printer popup menu,
| | 06:36 | I am going to choose External Modem
because I want to fax this thing.
| | 06:40 | In here, you see fax information.
| | 06:43 | I can send it to a particular contact.
| | 06:46 | If I click the head icon here, this opens up my
Address Book so that I can choose a number here.
| | 06:52 | I don't have a phone number connected with my
contact, but let's say I want to send a fax to Apple.
| | 06:56 | I choose that and I click the 2 button.
| | 07:01 | And now, I am ready to send a fax to Apple.
| | 07:04 | If I need to enter a prefix or if I have to
dial 9 to get out for example, I can do that.
| | 07:09 | If you select Use Cover Page, this is how
you are going to generate your cover page.
| | 07:13 | So, here, you type a subject like.
| | 07:27 | And then, all we have to do is
choose Fax and your fax is sent.
| | 07:33 | We will cancel out of that.
| | 07:35 | We'll leave tax edit.
| | 07:37 | Here, in receive options, you can
instruct your Mac to receive faxes.
| | 07:42 | Here you determine how many rings to answer
after and where you are going to save them to.
| | 07:46 | By default, it goes to Shared Faxes, but you
can have it go to other places if you like.
| | 07:51 | You can also have it automatically
print to the printer you like.
| | 07:54 | So Print To, we'll have it go to the, color LaserJet,
| | 07:58 | or you can also have your fax emailed
to you, so easily done, e-mail.
| | 08:02 | You click this to get your Address Book
or you can answer an e-mail address here.
| | 08:08 | And that's a look at the essential features
of the Print and Fax System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting the Sound system preference| 00:00 | The Sound System Preference is pretty straightforward and
I am going to show you a straightforward way to get to it.
| | 00:05 | Simply hold down the Option key on your Mac's
keyboard and then, tap one of the volume keys
| | 00:10 | on that same keyboard and watch what happens.
| | 00:13 | The Sound System Preference launches,
so you don't have to go into the Menu
| | 00:17 | or click the System Preference icon in the dock.
| | 00:20 | Under Sound Effects, you'll see all the Mac's alert sounds.
| | 00:23 | I am sure you have heard some of these
before. (Computer beeps.) Basso, blow, bottle,
| | 00:26 | funk- which may be the least funky sound
I have ever heard in my entire life.
| | 00:30 | I don't know why they call it that, but they did.
| | 00:32 | (Computer beeps.) We're going to continue to use basso.
| | 00:35 | Within here, you can change the alert volume if you'd like.
| | 00:38 | If your alerts are too loud, you can adjust the slider up -
(Computer beeps) really loud to make sure it'll alert me.
| | 00:44 | You can also change the output volume of the overall
sound coming out of your Mac with this slider here.
| | 00:50 | We are not going to do it but it's
something that you can do.
| | 00:54 | Now, it's possible that you are going to get
a little tired of Apple selection of sounds.
| | 00:59 | They have some nice sounds in there
but I would like to add some of my own.
| | 01:02 | In order to do so, I am going to look for a special sound
that I created and it is this, this chicken sound.
| | 01:11 | When you take the chicken, we are going to move
the chicken over to the desktop just for now.
| | 01:17 | At this point, I need to go to a specific folder and
we will do that with the Go menu. Choose Go to Folder.
| | 01:23 | Here we see a tilde.
| | 01:24 | That tilde indicates that we are
talking about my user folder.
| | 01:28 | Then, we are going to go into the Library folder
within that folder and then the Sound folders.
| | 01:33 | Click Go and here we are.
| | 01:35 | There is the Sounds folder.
| | 01:36 | We are going to move the chicken
sound into that folder. Done.
| | 01:41 | Now, in order for that to appear, we have to
quit System Preferences, which we will do now.
| | 01:46 | Use our shortcut trick to get back
into Sound and here is the chicken.
| | 01:51 | (Sound of chicken squawking.)
| | 01:54 | That's going to be annoying after a
while so I am going to go back to basso.
| | 01:58 | But just so you know, this is something that you can do.
| | 02:00 | Other tabs, Output tab, you have a couple of options here.
| | 02:05 | Line out, that's the analog logout that goes out to back of
your Mac or if you plug headphones in, that will say headphones
| | 02:11 | and that's on the front of a lot of
Macs, if you are using a power Mac.
| | 02:14 | Digital out is another option, it's not on all Macs.
| | 02:17 | Also, if you have another kind of audio
interface built in, you have a USB audio interface
| | 02:23 | or a FireWire audio interface for
example, that will show up here too.
| | 02:27 | You can change the balance on your output,
so if you pane all the way to the right,
| | 02:32 | you will have all your sound coming out of your right
speaker or if you have headphones on the right ear phone
| | 02:37 | or you can pane it over to the left and it will
come on the left or you can put something in between
| | 02:41 | or a little bit to the right at this point.
| | 02:43 | And finally, in the Input tab, here you see
the options and there is the input level.
| | 02:48 | That shows you how loudly I am speaking.
| | 02:50 | We currently have it set up so
it's using the audio line input.
| | 02:54 | Another option on this power Mac is to use digital in.
| | 02:58 | Again, if you have some kind of USB interface plugged
in or USB microphone, that will appear here as one
| | 03:05 | of your sound options and to select
it, you simply click on it.
| | 03:08 | Some audio interfaces and microphones
will allow you to adjust the input volume.
| | 03:12 | This is not always acted.
| | 03:14 | In some cases, it is; and in other cases, it's not.
| | 03:17 | And finally, you have the option
to show the volume in the menu bar.
| | 03:20 | I am not going to do that because I
don't want to clutter up the menu bar.
| | 03:23 | But if you care to, you can invoke
that, it will show up in the menu bar
| | 03:27 | and then with the slider, you can adjust volume up and down.
| | 03:31 | And that concludes our tour of the Sound System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Advanced Internet & Network System PreferencesSetting up your MobileMe account with the system preference pane| 00:01 | And now, let's take a look at the MobileMe System
Preference, which you will find under Internet and Network.
| | 00:06 | MobileMe is useful to you only if you have MobileMe
account and this was previously called .Mac.
| | 00:12 | MobileMe account costs $100 per year just as .Mac did.
| | 00:16 | MobileMe lets to do a lot of things like create web
galleries or sharing photos on MobileMe e-mail address
| | 00:22 | and it provides 20 gigabytes of online storage.
| | 00:25 | Let's look at what else you can
do from the System Preference.
| | 00:28 | We click on MobileMe.
| | 00:29 | The first thing we need to do is sign on.
| | 00:31 | Our member name is already filled in, so we
enter a password for that and click Sign In.
| | 00:39 | When we do this, the first thing we see is the Account tab
and within this tab you see various bits of information.
| | 00:45 | For example, our member name is right here at the top.
| | 00:48 | We can also sign in and sign out.
| | 00:50 | So, if somebody else is using my computer and they need
to get to their MobileMe account within my account,
| | 00:55 | I can sign out of mine and they can sign
into theirs and then they can do some kinds
| | 00:59 | of management from within the System Preference.
| | 01:02 | Below here, we see account status so
that tells us that's our account type.
| | 01:05 | If you so sign up for a regular account and paid your
$100, it will tell you that you have a full account.
| | 01:10 | It will tell you when it expires and as we
have here, it also tells you when you joined.
| | 01:15 | Below that, you see that you have two kinds of storage.
| | 01:18 | In total, you have 20 gigabytes of storage that's
divided into mail storage and iDisk storage.
| | 01:25 | Mail storage as you can imagine are your e-mail messages
and any attachments that happen to come along with them
| | 01:31 | and then your iDisk storage are any files
that you have uploaded to your iDisk account.
| | 01:36 | Now, normally, when you first start this, you
will see 10 gigabytes assigned to each account.
| | 01:41 | It happens that I have configured these things a little bit
differently so you see slight differences in the storage.
| | 01:46 | I'd still like to change those more and
I will show you how to do that right now.
| | 01:50 | In order to do so, you just click Account
Details and that will launch Safari.
| | 01:55 | You take into the MobileMe page where
you are asked for your member name
| | 01:58 | and your password and I'll enter that now and click Login.
| | 02:06 | That takes us to the Account Information area.
| | 02:09 | At this point, if I want to change my storage settings,
I could click Storage Settings and that would do it
| | 02:14 | or because I click that button within the System Preference,
| | 02:18 | I see this very convenient settings
button here, I will click that now.
| | 02:21 | Now, you see that personal storage has
been allocated to iDisk and to mail.
| | 02:26 | Currently, it's split about evenly.
| | 02:28 | I would like to change that because I really don't
need 10 gigabytes of storage for mail, so instead,
| | 02:33 | I am going to change that to about 2 gigabytes.
| | 02:36 | And when I do that, notice that the
allocation for my iDisk goes up.
| | 02:40 | So now, it's about 18 gigabytes for iDisk, which is great
because I want to store things like photos and movies
| | 02:46 | and large files there, and Mail has about 2 gigabytes
of storage, which is plenty for my mail needs.
| | 02:52 | To make that stick, I just quit Save.
| | 02:54 | I am taking back to my Accounts pane and I am good to go, so
I will quit Safari and we return to the System Preference.
| | 03:02 | You notice that the numbers have not shifted here.
| | 03:05 | When you come back to the MobileMe System Preference
later, you will notice that the numbers have changed.
| | 03:10 | Next tab is called Sync and this is really important.
| | 03:14 | This allows you to take information that's currently on your
Mac and sync it with Apple servers out there on the Internet
| | 03:20 | or as Apple is now calling it the Online Cloud,
yes, these are servers way out there and never,
| | 03:27 | never land that allow you to store
information from your computer elsewhere.
| | 03:32 | Now, why would you want to do this?
| | 03:34 | Well, you can see that you can synchronize things
like your bookmarks, calendars contacts, widgets,
| | 03:39 | dock items, keychains, mail accounts and on and on.
| | 03:42 | Let's suppose that I am on the road with my Mac laptop.
| | 03:45 | I have gone to a business meeting and I need
to enter six events and say 12 contacts.
| | 03:49 | I do that on my Mac and I take my laptop home.
| | 03:53 | Well, my desktop Mac doesn't have that information on it.
| | 03:56 | Yes, I could manually move it over but it's much easier
if I can enable the Synchronize with MobileMe option,
| | 04:04 | that information is then set up into the cloud and
then when I return home to my desktop computer,
| | 04:09 | I would synchronize again and that
information then is brought down from the cloud
| | 04:13 | or those servers and synchronized with my desktop Mac.
| | 04:17 | So I have the same data on each computer.
| | 04:20 | Now, there is one thing to be careful
about when synchronizing.
| | 04:23 | When you do this, you will be offered a couple of options.
| | 04:26 | One of them may be would you like to
replace all the information on this computer
| | 04:31 | with the stuff that I have up in the cloud.
| | 04:34 | That may not be such a good idea because maybe have
information that is different that you don't want changed.
| | 04:40 | Don't choose that option.
| | 04:41 | The other option is to merge.
| | 04:43 | You have some information up here in the cloud.
| | 04:46 | You have different information on your computer.
| | 04:48 | You'd like all that information to be glommed
together so that you have it in total.
| | 04:53 | So the merge option is the safer way to go unless
you are absolutely sure that you don't have anything
| | 04:59 | on your computer that you don't mind
having replaced with what's in the cloud.
| | 05:03 | Next step is iDisk and this tells you about
your iDisk allocation and how things are done.
| | 05:10 | You notice that our allocation has been updated here.
| | 05:13 | We have 18 gigabytes of storage on our iDisk
and we've got nothing in the iDisk so far
| | 05:18 | which shows you why I have zero information on my iDisk.
| | 05:22 | So I have plenty of storage so I can change that and once I
have start dropping things on iDisk, I can come back later
| | 05:28 | and say oh, looks like I need to upgrade my storage
because I've just about used up my allocation.
| | 05:34 | And one way to do that is to click
the Upgrade Storage button.
| | 05:38 | When you do, you're taken to Apple's website
and they offer to sell you more storage.
| | 05:42 | The next option is your iDisk Public folder.
| | 05:45 | People can get to your iDisk folder so that
they can download stuff that you have put in it.
| | 05:49 | You have a couple of options here.
| | 05:51 | One is, you can allow others to read only.
| | 05:54 | This means you put something in your iDisk Public
folder, say okay, world, come and get it, and they can,
| | 05:59 | they can get in there, they can grab it
and they can download it to their computer.
| | 06:03 | You also have the option to read and write.
| | 06:05 | This allows people not only to download stuff from your
iDisk but they can also put things into your Public folder.
| | 06:13 | This is a nice way if somebody has to send you a
really, really large file and it's not going to go
| | 06:18 | through an e-mail gateway, you can say okay, look
send that 1 gigabyte file to my Public folder,
| | 06:23 | I am going to allow Read and Write
access so you can put something in it.
| | 06:26 | If you are concerned about people dropping
stuff in there and you don't know who they are,
| | 06:30 | you can password protect your Public folder.
| | 06:33 | I can allow just those people in who have
a password and then they can write to it
| | 06:38 | or they can access it just for reading documents.
| | 06:41 | Put this back to the default.
| | 06:42 | And the final option here is iDisk Syncing
and what this means is that I explain
| | 06:48 | that you can store stuff out there
in the cloud on Apple servers.
| | 06:51 | If you turn on iDisk Syncing, it will create a copy of
all the stuff that's on that server and it will put it
| | 06:58 | on your desktop so that you have a local
copy of absolutely everything on your iDisk.
| | 07:04 | This is helpful when you don't have
Internet access but you still want to work
| | 07:07 | with the documents that you have up there in the cloud.
| | 07:09 | Now, they are not only in the cloud
but they are on your computer as well.
| | 07:13 | Finally, the last option is Back to My Mac.
| | 07:16 | In the Mac OS X Leopard Essentials Training title, we
talked about screen sharing and this is the ability
| | 07:21 | on your local network to see what else is happening on other
Macs and be able to see the screens on your local network.
| | 07:27 | This extends that capability out over the Internet so that
I can go from my Mac in Chicago when I happen to be there
| | 07:34 | on a business trip, I can then contact way back
here in California my Mac and see what it's doing.
| | 07:41 | I can then manipulate files on that
Mac and then move things around.
| | 07:45 | So for example, I can take a file that's on my desktop and
I can move it to some place that's more publicly accessible
| | 07:51 | like my boss needs to be able to access my Mac's Public
folder and get something, I have a file that isn't there,
| | 07:57 | easy enough, I use Back to My Mac and I put it in
that Public folder and then the boss can get it.
| | 08:02 | One caveat about Back to My Mac is
it doesn't work as well as it might.
| | 08:07 | It works best when you have some kind of AirPort-based
station on either end, some routers can block the Back
| | 08:13 | to My Mac servers so that it doesn't
work properly and you notice down here
| | 08:17 | that you have the option to open sharing preferences.
| | 08:20 | With Back to My Mac, you can tell it what
you do want to allow and what you don't.
| | 08:23 | So for example, yes, I am going
to allow you to view my desktop
| | 08:27 | but I am not going to allow you to share files for example.
| | 08:31 | And that sums up the MobileMe System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring your network connection with the Network system preference| 00:01 | The Mac is capable of making connections to other
Macs and to the Internet in a variety of ways
| | 00:06 | and this is handled by the Network System Preference.
| | 00:10 | We will run through the various ways to do
this and look at your configuration options.
| | 00:15 | Here, we have the network window, you see
all the connections schemes to the left,
| | 00:19 | this include any ports in your Mac
and they generally include Ethernet,
| | 00:24 | AirPort if you have an older Mac
you might have an internal modem,
| | 00:27 | if you have the modem dongle that Apple sells
for $50 that will show up here as well.
| | 00:33 | Bluetooth, if you have Bluetooth on your Mac and also
FireWire is another possible networking protocol.
| | 00:39 | At the bottom of the window you can add or delete
services, simply by clicking the Plus button.
| | 00:46 | Here we have the sheet that appears.
| | 00:47 | I can add duplicate interfaces,
I can add Ethernet for example.
| | 00:51 | I already have Ethernet on here,
so why would I want to add another?
| | 00:56 | Well, you may want to create two Ethernet connections on
your laptop one for home and one for work and a simple way
| | 01:02 | to do that is to use the Tools popup menu
and choose one of the configurations there,
| | 01:06 | so that you are duplicating the service you already
have making it easier then to create another one,
| | 01:12 | so I have duplicated, we are going to call
this Ethernet 3 duplicate later if I want to,
| | 01:17 | I can then go from the settings I have
now and set up a new Ethernet connection.
| | 01:24 | When you select the networking service, you see the
basic configuration options to the right of the window
| | 01:30 | and you can configure much of your
network settings right here.
| | 01:33 | So, using the Configure popup menu, you
have a couple of options, one using DHCP,
| | 01:38 | which is currently how we are configured.
| | 01:40 | And again, this is where network addresses are being
distributed and your Mac is just picking it up this way.
| | 01:46 | Another option you have here that you
want to pay attention to is manually,
| | 01:50 | so if you have been assigned a manual IP address this is
| | 01:53 | where you enter your IP address Subnet
Mask Router DNS Server and Search Domains.
| | 01:58 | I have a little tip for you here.
| | 02:00 | Suppose that you are using DHCP and DHCP seems
to be very confused about what's going on.
| | 02:08 | One way to clear that confusion
is to go manually click Apply,
| | 02:15 | it will tell you have an invalid IP address you
don't care because you are not going to stick there.
| | 02:20 | Instead, you want to go back to using DHCP, click
Apply again and your DHCP lease will be renewed meaning
| | 02:29 | that it's going to grab onto occurred active
robust, DHCP address and bring it in and hopefully
| | 02:36 | that brings your network back up to speed.
| | 02:39 | And when you select AirPort, you
will see under network name,
| | 02:44 | the AirPort network that you are currently connected to.
| | 02:47 | If you click and hold on that Network Name popup menu,
you will see any other available networks to you.
| | 02:53 | You can also join other networks
you would do that for example,
| | 02:57 | if an AirPort network is not made publicly available,
but you know the name of the network and its passwords,
| | 03:02 | so those are for hidden wireless networks.
| | 03:05 | Another way to do this, is to enable the show AirPort
status in Menu Bar option, when you click that option,
| | 03:13 | the AirPort menu appears in the Menu Bar and then you
can choose the network you would like to connect to,
| | 03:18 | also you see that you have the other Join Other
Network option there, when you disable that for now.
| | 03:24 | If you have a modem attached to your Mac or you have
an internal modem, this is where you configure that.
| | 03:30 | So, you would enter the telephone number that your ISP
has provided to you, your account name and your password.
| | 03:36 | Once that's configured you click Connect to make connection.
| | 03:40 | The easier way to do it though is to enable
to show modem status in Menu Bar option,
| | 03:47 | when you do that what you will see if you
actually configured this properly is a connect
| | 03:51 | and a disconnect option, so you can
choose those from that menu item.
| | 04:00 | Some Bluetooth devices allow you to use them as
a modem, but not currently iPhones unfortunately.
| | 04:06 | If you have such a device, you add its information here,
so again this is provided by your ISP, telephone number,
| | 04:12 | account name, password connect, you can also have
the modem status up here in the Menu Bar here
| | 04:19 | and make your connections and disconnections that way.
| | 04:22 | FireWire is an interesting option.
| | 04:25 | You can also create a network over a FireWire connection.
| | 04:28 | This doesn't allow you to connect to the
Internet but rather set up a quick network
| | 04:32 | between two Macs and this is the way you set it up.
| | 04:35 | You string a FireWire cable between the two Macs,
check the Network System Preference of each.
| | 04:40 | If a FireWire entry isn't there,
you simply click the Plus button
| | 04:44 | from the Interface you select FireWire
and then you will add it.
| | 04:50 | The Mac will then work things out and assign
themselves in internal address, once this is done
| | 04:55 | and sharing services are on, you should see the other
Mac in the shared area of a Finder Windows sidebar.
| | 05:04 | Now, let's talk about VPN.
| | 05:06 | Companies often use Virtual Private Networks
| | 05:08 | or VPNs to allow computers outside their
immediate network secure access to the network
| | 05:14 | and your Mac lets you easily create a VPN.
| | 05:17 | Just click the Plus button and from
the Interface popup menu choose VPN.
| | 05:23 | You can choose the VPN type and your network administrator
will tell you which to use either PBTP or L2TP over IPSec.
| | 05:33 | You can name it, so the name is something like the company
click Create, and now you can configure your VPN settings,
| | 05:44 | so you could enter the server address
here, account and this is helpful.
| | 05:49 | Authentication setting is a useful thing to use if you have
a computer that isn't being used by a bunch of other people.
| | 05:56 | So, if you are in a secure location, you can enter
your password here and save it by clicking OK.
| | 06:03 | This will then allow you to get onto the
VPN without having to enter a password.
| | 06:07 | Again, another easy way to get in here is to show VPN
status in Menu Bar, do that and you can connect to your VPN
| | 06:15 | if it's properly configured and you can also get out
of your VPN by choosing that option there as well.
| | 06:23 | If you use PPPoE- and PPPoE stands for Point-to-Point
Protocol over Ethernet- you can use that on your Mac too.
| | 06:31 | So we will click the Plus button under interface
PPPoE, we will just leave it PPPoE for now.
| | 06:39 | Click Create.
| | 06:41 | Now, you will enter your PPPoE service name.
| | 06:44 | This is a name that you can enter just for your ISP's
name, so you know what it is, you will be given Fire ISP
| | 06:50 | and account name and a password, you
can remember that password and connect.
| | 06:55 | If you have PPPoE you kind of understand what
this is about, if you don't it works this way.
| | 07:00 | PPPoE is kind of a cross between a
modem and a broadband connection,
| | 07:06 | the difference is that unlike a standard DSL connection or
a cable modem connection, what you end up with this hybrid,
| | 07:13 | where you have broadband but only when you connect to it
by clicking Connect here again that's not the easy way,
| | 07:19 | instead show PPPoE status in Menu
Bar from there you can Check,
| | 07:24 | Connect or Disconnect when you
need to get on and off the network.
| | 07:29 | We are going to get rid of that and I can
show you now how to get rid of a service,
| | 07:33 | simply click Minus and the service is gone.
| | 07:38 | I will get rid of the company as well
because we don't have a VPN set up there.
| | 07:42 | Here's another tip, you can prioritize
your services, I will show you how to do it
| | 07:47 | and then I will explain to you what that means.
| | 07:49 | So, we come down here to set service
order from the Tools popup menu
| | 07:54 | and this lists all the network services that you have.
| | 07:59 | What you can do is prioritize,
which the Mac will connect over,
| | 08:03 | so for example if I have both Ethernet
and AirPort, I will move modem down.
| | 08:13 | When the Mac attempts to make a connection to
the network it's going to do it in this order.
| | 08:18 | It will first look on Ethernet, if it can't find that,
it will then go to AirPort, if it can't find that,
| | 08:24 | alright fine, maybe it will offer you the option to use my
internal modem, if it's configured and if it's plugged in.
| | 08:30 | Another helpful option in this Tools popup menu is
the ability to export certain kinds of configurations,
| | 08:36 | so for example I choose Internal Modem, I click the
Tools popup menu and I can export the configuration
| | 08:44 | for my modem and I can save it as I like.
| | 08:48 | Once I do this then, I can send it to another one
of my Max, if I want to configure it for a modem
| | 08:54 | or if somebody else needs that kind of configuration,
for example I want to share my Dial-up account
| | 08:59 | with somebody, why I would want to do that?
| | 09:01 | I don't know but maybe you do.
| | 09:03 | You can then send the configuration.
| | 09:05 | This also works for VPN and honestly I think that's a really
great feature, because VPN settings can be a little complex.
| | 09:12 | It's nice to be able to export that configuration
from one Mac send it over to your other Mac
| | 09:17 | and then use this Tools popup menu to
import configuration and then it's done
| | 09:23 | for so you don't have to do this
kind of repeat configuration.
| | 09:27 | Also, you can create multiple locations with different
networks settings one for the office and one for home
| | 09:33 | for example and the way to do that is you simply choose Edit
locations from the Locations popup menu, add a new one,
| | 09:42 | name it as you like and then you
have got a new location here.
| | 09:46 | So, I am at home I have set up my network perfectly
for that, so that I am using my office VPN for example.
| | 09:53 | My other configuration I want to use the ISP that I pay for
normally for my home service, so I can flip back-and-forth
| | 09:59 | between these configurations, so that I don't have
to go in and change my IP settings for example.
| | 10:04 | This is a much easier way to do it.
| | 10:07 | Okay, you have been dying to click this
Advance button and now it's time to do it.
| | 10:15 | And here we have the advance settings, you
are going to see a number of tabs here,
| | 10:19 | we are going to explore a couple
of them but not all of them.
| | 10:23 | In TCP/IP you notice that we could configure
our TCP/IP settings in the main window.
| | 10:29 | However there are a couple of new
things that you can do here.
| | 10:31 | One of them is renew DHCP Lease and what this will
do is if your DHCP settings don't seem to be working,
| | 10:39 | you can't seem to connect to the Internet, you click this it
will kind of rescramble itself and say okay, let me go out
| | 10:45 | and find and make sure that DHCP is working as it should.
| | 10:50 | Previously, I showed you a trick for moving to manual setup
and then moving back to DHCP to do the same kind of thing.
| | 10:57 | This is the easier way to do it.
| | 10:59 | The reason you would use that previous to this is that
sometimes, clicking Renew DHCP Lease doesn't work,
| | 11:07 | you have to get really tough for these things and say okay,
look this button is not going to work but I know if I flip
| | 11:12 | in the manual, apply and then flip back to DHCP
and apply, it's going to do the right thing for me,
| | 11:19 | another tab to look at is DNS, you may need to add a DNS
server, which is supplied by your ISP or your IT person
| | 11:26 | to easily do that just click the Plus button,
fill in the field and you are good to go.
| | 11:31 | If you are doing some kind of Windows Networking
in a corporate environment or you need to connect
| | 11:36 | to a workgroup server of some kind, your IT
person is likely going to configure this for you,
| | 11:41 | but if they give you the settings,
this is where you enter them.
| | 11:45 | The next tab AppleTalk. AppleTalk is kind of an old
fashion Apple technology for networking devices,
| | 11:53 | it still works however, for example at home
I have a printer that works over AppleTalk.
| | 11:58 | I can connect this and it works perfectly well.
| | 12:01 | One thing to note about AppleTalk however is you can
only have it turned on for one network service at a time,
| | 12:07 | so if I turn it on in Ethernet it won't work in AirPort,
I turn it on an AirPort it won't work in Ethernet.
| | 12:13 | So, when I switch, if I go into the Advanced areas,
I have here now and try to turn it on elsewhere,
| | 12:20 | a little warning dialog box will appear and it
says, you have got this turned on somewhere else,
| | 12:24 | do you want to turn it on here, because if you
do, I am going to turn it off on the other place
| | 12:28 | and then at that point, you make your decision.
| | 12:30 | 802.1x is another kind of thing that
an IT person or your ISP is going
| | 12:37 | to tell you how to configure if you need to do that.
| | 12:40 | We are not going to go into that because the settings
can be a little complex and they vary depending
| | 12:44 | on which computer you use, so wouldn't be much
help for me to show you how to configure this here,
| | 12:48 | because you might configure it differently where you are.
| | 12:52 | Proxies are the same kind of idea, this is very much for
a corporate environment, these are the kind of settings
| | 12:58 | that you are going to get for an IT person or an ISP
if you need to configure proxies you know if you do.
| | 13:04 | Most people working at home are never
going to have to touch this tab.
| | 13:07 | Same idea with Ethernet, this is the kind of thing
IT, ISP is going to give you the settings for,
| | 13:13 | you welcome to set them up but most home
users are never going to have to see this.
| | 13:19 | Before we leave let's click AirPort
and look at its Advance button.
| | 13:24 | In AirPort, we have the option to see the AirPort
networks that are available to us, the one reason you want
| | 13:30 | to visit here is that you can prioritize which
AirPort network your Mac is going to attach itself to
| | 13:35 | and all you have to do to do that is select the AirPort
network you want and drag it up or drag it down.
| | 13:42 | That way when you connect to AirPort, it's going
to look for whatever is the top most choice here
| | 13:47 | and it will automatically grab onto that AirPort network.
| | 13:50 | If that doesn't seem to be working and you moved to another
location and your house for example and you have a couple
| | 13:55 | of different networks set up, you can change
this so that you choose the other one by default
| | 13:59 | if that computer is going to be
in that place for a long time.
| | 14:04 | Finally, at the very bottom is a very helpful
button, dialed like a lot it's called "Assist Me".
| | 14:11 | Click it and you will find you have three options.
| | 14:13 | If you click the Diagnostics button, what happens
is the Network Diagnostics application opens.
| | 14:19 | This looks at the network and it sees how things are going.
| | 14:22 | If you are having a problem, you see green light, green
light, green light everything is working great here.
| | 14:27 | If it weren't working great, you would see yellow
| | 14:30 | or red lights indicating there is a problem
here somewhere and it will tell you where it is.
| | 14:34 | Ethernet is good, Network Settings are good, ISP is good
but it doesn't seem to be connecting to the Internet,
| | 14:39 | that indicates that the ISP is having a problem getting
to the Internet and there is some kind of block there
| | 14:44 | at which point you can call your
ISP and say gee what's going on?
| | 14:48 | Network Diagnostics tells me there is a problem on your
end and they will say, we are so sorry that's happening,
| | 14:53 | we are going to fix it in one minute,
because that's the way ISPs always respond.
| | 14:58 | You can also click Continue and this will walk you
through a series of steps to see if you can diagnose it
| | 15:04 | and it will check various network settings try to reset them
| | 15:07 | and see if you can make things work
again, the other option is Assistant.
| | 15:14 | If you have a network that you want to
set up, this is where you want to go.
| | 15:18 | You may recall that when you first installed
OS X, the Setup Assistant appeared part
| | 15:22 | of that is Network Setup Assistant, it did that same thing.
| | 15:26 | It asked you what kind of connection you have, it asked
for IP addresses if you have them, you do all that,
| | 15:31 | you can also do it here, very easy way to get to it
and a very helpful assistant it is and that wraps
| | 15:41 | up the essentials of the Network System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing your computer with the Sharing system preference| 00:00 | The Sharing System Preference is the gateway to opening your
Mac to access from other computers both on local networks
| | 00:07 | as well as across the Internet and it breaks out this way.
| | 00:10 | At the very top of the window, you
are going to see computer name.
| | 00:14 | You can change your computer name and this is a good idea
because people often leave the default name something
| | 00:20 | like Joe Blow's computer and this name appears in
such seemingly innocent sharing setups as iTunes
| | 00:27 | and iPhoto sharing. And these are situations where you
want to be a little bit anonymous so people aren't aware
| | 00:33 | of the fact that you listen to a lot of Barry
Manilow for example when you are in a coffee shop
| | 00:37 | and you are trying to talk to other people.
| | 00:39 | If you press the Edit button, you have the
opportunity to change your Mac's local name.
| | 00:45 | This is a name that shows up when you're using Bonjour
| | 00:47 | which is the 0 configuration networking
protocol that Apple supports.
| | 00:53 | So, if people want an easy way to get into your
computer, you can add a very simple name something
| | 00:58 | like the Kitchen Mac or Downstairs Mac for example.
| | 01:03 | Now, let's look at the various services that are offered.
| | 01:07 | DVD or CD Sharing, this is a feature
introduced with OS X 10.5.2.
| | 01:13 | It lets you share the media drive in
your computer with another computer,
| | 01:17 | say a Macbook Air that doesn't have
a media drive built in for example.
| | 01:22 | Then, there is Screen Sharing.
| | 01:24 | This is a new feature in Leopard.
| | 01:26 | In the past looking at another Mac screen and
controlling that Mac required special software.
| | 01:31 | It's now built into OS X. This is really helpful feature.
| | 01:35 | For example, let's say I am downstairs, my daughter is
upstairs and she is having a problem with her computer.
| | 01:42 | In the past, I would have to go upstairs,
I go into her room and I try to fiddle
| | 01:45 | with her computer to figure out what's wrong.
| | 01:47 | Now, all I have to do is she can call me on the
phone or she can IM me or something like that
| | 01:52 | and say "Dad, my computer is not working.
| | 01:54 | Could you check it out?"
| | 01:55 | If she has Screen Sharing set up on her computer and
I have as well, I can look directly in her screen,
| | 02:01 | I can do things with her computer and control it for her.
| | 02:05 | Very easy way to troubleshoot things locally as well
as across the Internet, if we use something like iChat,
| | 02:12 | which also has Screen Sharing built into it.
| | 02:15 | This is a very convenient feature.
| | 02:17 | It's something that you can do locally or
you can do in iChat and this is something
| | 02:21 | that I covered in the Leopard Essential Training title.
| | 02:27 | With File Sharing on, others can move files
over the network to and from your Mac.
| | 02:32 | You can set up Shared Folders and grant access
to other users across the network or web.
| | 02:37 | To add a Shared Folder, all you have to
do is click the + button below that pane
| | 02:43 | and decide where you want that Shared Folder to be.
| | 02:47 | Also, you can add users.
| | 02:49 | I click the + button and then I can grab access either
to people in my Address Book or within users in group.
| | 02:56 | So for example, let's say I want to grant access to
all administrators who have access to my computer.
| | 03:01 | They happen to have my login name
and administrator's password,
| | 03:05 | then they can get in and they can share files with me.
| | 03:09 | Now, let's click the Options button.
| | 03:12 | You have three sharing protocols.
| | 03:15 | The first is AFP, which stands for Apple Filing Protocol.
| | 03:20 | If you have Apple Filing Protocol switched on
for both computers and this option enabled,
| | 03:25 | your shared files will be seen by
people using Apple Filing Protocol.
| | 03:30 | This is good for Mac but it's not good for PCs
because they don't support Apple Filing Protocol.
| | 03:38 | The FTP option allows others to gain access
to your files via the File Transfer Protocol.
| | 03:44 | This is unsecured but does allow
people in who aren't using a Mac.
| | 03:49 | So for example, somebody has a PC.
| | 03:51 | They have an FTP client.
| | 03:53 | They want to be able to get to your Mac, they
can do so by entering the FTP address here
| | 04:00 | under the Shared Files and Folders using FTP option.
| | 04:03 | You just give them that address, they can then get into your
Mac if you have their protocol and File Sharing enabled.
| | 04:10 | And finally, there is shared files and folders using SMB.
| | 04:14 | SMB stands for Server Message Block
and that's a protocol used by Windows.
| | 04:19 | If you want to share files with Windows
users and have those files easily found
| | 04:23 | by Windows PCs, this is the protocol you want to use.
| | 04:27 | And below, you can decide who can log on
and use file sharing with these protocols.
| | 04:32 | And now to Printer Sharing.
| | 04:40 | As the name suggests, this lets you share
printers that are connected to your Mac.
| | 04:45 | We have covered a little bit of this
in the Print and Fax System Preference.
| | 04:48 | You can turn it on here as well in order to
share printers that are connected to your Mac.
| | 04:54 | Web Sharing up next, you can easily host
a website on your Mac using Web Sharing.
| | 05:01 | Just use an HTML Editor to create your site and put the
site's files in the Sites folder within your User folder.
| | 05:07 | Enable this option and people can view your
site using the addresses provided in this area
| | 05:14 | of the window here in the main area of the window.
| | 05:19 | Remote login, as I said, FTP is not secure.
| | 05:24 | Nefarious folks can see the information in
unencrypted form as it passes across the network.
| | 05:29 | A more secure connection is SSH
which stands for Secure Shell.
| | 05:35 | The Sharing System Preference hides
the confusing gobbledygook that is part
| | 05:39 | of SSH and simply calls this Remote Login.
| | 05:43 | With this on, someone with an SSH client or an FTP client
that supports SFTP for instance can log into your computer
| | 05:51 | and access its files if they have its address and again
that address appears below the Remote Login On option.
| | 06:03 | And here is the Remote Management Service.
| | 06:06 | Besides Screen Sharing, someone using Apple Remote
Desktop can see your computer screen and control it.
| | 06:11 | Turning on Remote Management lets this happen.
| | 06:14 | Again having your IP address is key.
| | 06:17 | Once you enable this, you can decide what
people are going to be allowed to do.
| | 06:21 | For example, they can observe, they can also control, which
means not only can they see what is going on on your screen
| | 06:28 | but they can control what's happening on the screen.
| | 06:31 | They can generate ports, open or quit applications,
change settings, do all kinds of wonderful things remotely
| | 06:37 | that we can now do with Screen Sharing but perhaps someone
has an older Mac and so they'd have to use that instead.
| | 06:45 | Remote Apple Events.
| | 06:48 | This is something that lets Apple events, things
like AppleScripts running on another computer,
| | 06:53 | gain access to your computer and do things.
| | 06:55 | This is great for people who need to configure
a Mac from a far and do it via AppleScript.
| | 07:01 | Most normal users are not going to have to touch
this but if somebody is configuring your computer
| | 07:06 | from a distant location or on a local
network, they may want to use Apple events
| | 07:09 | to do that and so this option needs to be on.
| | 07:12 | And then, there is Xgrid Sharing.
| | 07:14 | The idea here is you can take a group of Macintoshes and you
can devote them all to a singular task so that they behave
| | 07:20 | like a single computer, and how is this useful?
| | 07:23 | Well, suppose you have to render a bunch of
video files, you have to apply effects to things,
| | 07:27 | if you have lots of computers or even just a
couple of computers, you can devote all that energy
| | 07:32 | to these very complex tasks and
then achieve them more quickly.
| | 07:36 | And now to one of my favorite sharing
services, which is Internet Sharing.
| | 07:43 | This is a great one when you are staying
in a hotel and your buddy is next door.
| | 07:48 | When you turn this on, your Mac
becomes a router distributing broadband
| | 07:51 | to anything that's connected to
it, so we will figure it out.
| | 07:54 | We are going to share our Ethernet connection and
we are going to share to people using AirPort.
| | 08:00 | I am going to click the AirPort
options to show you what's there.
| | 08:03 | First thing you can do is change the network name.
| | 08:05 | You may want to do this rather than saying Chris Breen's
Computer for example to just anonymous 7th floor Computer.
| | 08:12 | That way, when the hotel detector comes by with his
laptop says ah, Chris computer, he is staying in 707.
| | 08:18 | I am going to get him for sharing our
network and boot him out of here on his ear.
| | 08:24 | So, change the name and then enable encryption because
you don't really want everybody in the entire hotel
| | 08:30 | or at least within range sharing your broadband.
| | 08:32 | This is just for the guy next door, the gal next
door who works for you and you want to be generous
| | 08:37 | and not pay those exorbitant fees for both of you.
| | 08:40 | And once you do that, you can click OK to get out of there.
| | 08:44 | You switch it on and yes, indeed, you want to do this.
| | 08:49 | And what happens at this point is now your
Mac becomes essentially a wireless router.
| | 08:54 | Your buddy next door can see it, enter a password and
then they have access to that broadband connection.
| | 09:00 | So you are sharing just as if you would set up an
AirPort Base Station in your room, wonderful option.
| | 09:09 | Turn that off and the last option is Bluetooth Sharing.
| | 09:14 | As it hints, this is an option for sharing files across
a Bluetooth connection from Mac to Mac for example,
| | 09:22 | and all you have to do to make this work
is you turn it on and you have another Mac.
| | 09:28 | Let's say it's that buddy next door again.
| | 09:29 | He wants to send a file to you.
| | 09:31 | Instead of doing it over an AirPort connection,
we are going to do it over Bluetooth.
| | 09:35 | When you have this on, you have a
few options that you can configure.
| | 09:38 | For example, when receiving items, ask what to do.
| | 09:41 | This is not a bad idea because
Bluetooth is a very slow protocol.
| | 09:46 | So let's suppose for example the guy next door, your
buddy next door, he has broken into the mini bar,
| | 09:50 | he has had a vodka or two and he is "Ah, I am
going to send Chris that great photo I took today."
| | 09:55 | It just happens to be it's a RAW
image, it's about jillion megabytes big
| | 09:59 | and he decides he is going to send it you over Bluetooth.
| | 10:01 | A little dialog box will show up and say "hey, so
and so would like to send you this file, it's 240 MB.
| | 10:08 | Do you really want to accept this?"
| | 10:11 | And you say "No, I don't want to tie my Mac
for that long," so you can decline that.
| | 10:15 | Or if it's a smaller file or actually whatever
size it is, you can accept it as you like.
| | 10:20 | You can decide where it's going to go, so it's going
go in downloads where you can choose another folder
| | 10:25 | and when other device is browsed, again, you can allow them
if you want always allow or you can have them ask you "so
| | 10:32 | and so is going to browse your Mac, is that okay with you?"
| | 10:35 | Yes, it's fine, I can accept that or honestly,
it's not okay so you can decline that as well.
| | 10:41 | And then you can grant access to what they
can browse, can they browse your Public folder
| | 10:45 | or you can grant them access to other kinds of folders.
| | 10:49 | And there you have it, this is the
essentials of sharing under Leopard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Advanced System PreferencesUnderstanding the Accounts system preference| 00:00 | In OS X Leopard Essential Training, I
showed you how to create a new account,
| | 00:05 | but not much else in the Account System Preference.
| | 00:08 | Within the System Preference, you can create new
accounts with the variety of different powers,
| | 00:12 | change the settings for existing
accounts and change how accounts log in.
| | 00:16 | Let's take a look at the settings
for your Administrator account first.
| | 00:20 | You have to be an administrator to
muck with this stuff and you are.
| | 00:23 | So click the Lock icon and enter your password,
so that you can make changes to the account.
| | 00:30 | Now my account tells me that I am an
admin, meaning I am an administrative user.
| | 00:35 | Within here, I can change things like my picture,
for example, I could be an eightball if I like.
| | 00:41 | I can also change the password for my account.
| | 00:44 | I can change my username.
| | 00:48 | And I can change my .Mac address.
| | 00:51 | I can also open my Address Book Card,
just click Open, Address Book opens
| | 00:56 | and it shows me the My Card, which is my personal card.
| | 00:59 | I can allow the user to administer this computer.
| | 01:02 | Well of course I want to do that,
I want to stay an administrator,
| | 01:05 | but I can turn that off, I don't
know why I would, but I could.
| | 01:07 | And finally I can impose parental controls
on myself if I care to and I don't.
| | 01:13 | The next tab I have over is Login items and
this is a very cool thing to be able to do.
| | 01:18 | The idea here is that when your Mac starts up,
| | 01:20 | if you add items to this Day 2 will
automatically launch when the Mac starts.
| | 01:26 | If I want to add an application, all I have to
do is press the plus (+) button and I can go
| | 01:30 | to my applications folder and choose something.
| | 01:32 | So let's say I would like chest open automatically when my
Mac first start up, so my Mac is ready to play chess with me
| | 01:41 | when I come in first thing in the morning.
| | 01:43 | If I decide later that the chess is just too smart for me
and I am just getting frustrating, losing all the time,
| | 01:48 | I selected and I can click minus (-) and make that go away.
| | 01:51 | Now there are some things in here that I have not installed.
| | 01:54 | Sometimes when you install an application, it will
install a login item for you, because it needs some kind
| | 02:00 | of helper application for example iTunesHelper.
| | 02:03 | It needs that in order for that application to do its
job and it will show up here and we return to password.
| | 02:10 | At the bottom, you see login options,
so let's see what you can do here.
| | 02:15 | The first option here is Automatic Login.
| | 02:18 | You can choose an account for example I could choose my
account, enter my password and I could go ahead with that.
| | 02:24 | this is not a good idea if your Mac is in a place
where it can be used by people you don't trust,
| | 02:29 | you don't want people working within
your account for example.
| | 02:32 | It's fine if you are on a solo Mac but if I were to set
this to my name for example and somebody else stepped
| | 02:36 | in restarted my Mac my Mac would boot directly into my
account without being asked for a username and password.
| | 02:43 | With that disabled, you now have Display Login window as
| | 02:47 | and so you have two different views
that you will see when you first log in.
| | 02:51 | You either see a list of users, which is helpful
if you have a child using the Mac for example.
| | 02:56 | It can be a little daunting to use the
other option which is Name and Password,
| | 03:00 | all that will show up are a blank name field and
a blank password field and then you have to enter
| | 03:05 | that information into each one of those fields.
| | 03:08 | And then there is the Show Restart,
Sleep and Shut Down buttons.
| | 03:11 | This is an okay option for the administrator but
you don't want to grant just anybody the ability
| | 03:15 | to perform these kinds of actions, for example a
kid, if a kid is going to be using your computer,
| | 03:20 | you don't want to let them arrive at the login
screen and say I think I am just going to shut down,
| | 03:23 | so I don't have to do my homework and then run
to dad and say oh Mac is broken, I can't do that
| | 03:28 | and of course the father would say
Mac never breaks, so you are wrong.
| | 03:32 | The next option is Show Input menu in login window.
| | 03:36 | This let's users change the language that the
keyboard uses from within the login screen.
| | 03:40 | When this is enabled the login screen contains a flag,
so in my case it would be a US Flag, I can click on that
| | 03:47 | and change input to a different country,
so this is helpful if you have people
| | 03:51 | who speak different languages for using the same Mac.
| | 03:54 | Show Password Hints is another option, let's say when you
create an account you fill in the field for showing hints,
| | 04:00 | for example my dog's last name might be a
hint and then that would be your password.
| | 04:05 | So somebody logs in, they try to get
in, they have entered the wrong password
| | 04:10 | because oh gosh, I can't see and remember what that was.
| | 04:12 | If you enter wrong a couple of times, up pops a
little field and says okay here is your password hint
| | 04:18 | at which point you go, oh yeah my dog's last name.
| | 04:20 | It's sniff, and that's your password and then
there is the use VoiceOver at login window.
| | 04:27 | VoiceOver is the Mac screen reader.
| | 04:29 | It's largely used by people with visual impairments.
| | 04:32 | If such a person who will be using the Mac, you want
VoiceOver to be on from the get-go so they can use the Mac.
| | 04:38 | And the last option is enable Fast User switching,
put this on and you will be told and warned me
| | 04:45 | and say that this feature will allow other users
to stay logged in and continue running software
| | 04:50 | in the background while you are using this computer.
| | 04:53 | Okay well what does that mean exactly?
| | 04:55 | What it means is that you can have multiple accounts
running concurrently and switch back and forth between them
| | 05:01 | and the way you do that is through fast user switching.
| | 05:04 | So instead of having the log out of one and
then log into another you can keep one going.
| | 05:09 | You choose Fast User Switching by
choosing a different user from here.
| | 05:15 | And what will happen at that point is you get this really
cool visual effect where the screen turns like a cube,
| | 05:20 | you get a login screen for that other user.
| | 05:22 | They login they use the Mac as they
like and then you can switch back again,
| | 05:26 | choose another user from the Fast User Switching menu.
| | 05:30 | Now you can view that as name, short
name, or also as icon if you like.
| | 05:36 | We are going to switch that off, because we
don't need it on right now and that's done.
| | 05:40 | And next we are going to look at the
essentials of creating new accounts on your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a new account with the Accounts system preference| 00:00 | You can create a variety of accounts
for your Mac and this is how that works.
| | 00:04 | To do so, just click the plus button and a sheet appears.
| | 00:10 | Under the new account pop-up menu, you see a variety
of options and we will start with Administrator.
| | 00:15 | The Administrator account has the power to
install software, create and delete accounts,
| | 00:20 | change system settings and change
the settings of other users.
| | 00:24 | He or she can also change permissions, allowing them to
see the contents of another user's Home folder for example.
| | 00:30 | And to create one of these accounts, you simply enter name
Christopher Breen, short name maybe Chris, password verify
| | 00:37 | and if you choose to, you can add a password hint.
| | 00:40 | Like that we discussed something
about my dog's last name, for example.
| | 00:44 | You can also turn on FileVault protection for that
user and we discussed FileVault elsewhere in the title.
| | 00:50 | Next option up is Standard Account, the standard account
user can install software only into their user account.
| | 00:56 | They can't change locked system preferences nor can they
create accounts, same idea here name, short name,
| | 01:03 | password verify and password, FileVault protection.
| | 01:07 | Managed with parental controls this account can be
severely limited by the administrator to the point
| | 01:13 | where the person sees a very simple version of the Finder.
| | 01:15 | They can't install anything and they
are forbidden from using applications
| | 01:19 | that the administrator has determined
that they are not to touch.
| | 01:22 | This is a good choice for a child or someone
who is just learning how to use their Mac.
| | 01:27 | And in another lesson, we look
directly at parental controls.
| | 01:32 | Sharing only, this account is accessible
only over a network.
| | 01:36 | A person sitting at your Mac can use it.
| | 01:38 | This user can access files only
in a specific sharing location.
| | 01:43 | You can give access to this account to people in your office
who want to work on special files or projects for example.
| | 01:49 | And then there is Group. The Group account
is designed mainly to grant a bunch of users
| | 01:57 | on the computer, certain privileges in one fell swoop.
| | 02:00 | In the old days, you had to change
privileges on an account-by-account basis.
| | 02:04 | Now you can just grant members
of the group these privileges.
| | 02:07 | Anyone within that group then has that privilege.
| | 02:10 | When you create a group, any account setup on your Mac
appears to the right, just tick the box next to the account
| | 02:16 | to make them part of the group, so let's see how that works.
| | 02:18 | We will call this My Group and click Create Group.
| | 02:25 | Now here all the people on this Mac that have an
account and I can make them members of the group.
| | 02:30 | I certainly want to be part of it.
| | 02:31 | We will make Lynda part of it and
we will also make Joe a part of it.
| | 02:36 | Now let's see what this does for privileges.
| | 02:37 | I will open the Macintosh hard drive,
we will look at something in My Folder.
| | 02:45 | Let's say we look in the Documents folder
and then the About Downloads file Cmd+I.
| | 02:53 | I will unlock this Change Privileges,
enter my password and click plus.
| | 03:03 | We now see that My Group, the group
that I created is offered as an option.
| | 03:08 | Once I do that and choose Select, now everybody
within that group has the same privileges,
| | 03:14 | so for example I could give them all
read and write privileges if I choose to.
| | 03:19 | Right now, I don't care to do any of that, so I am just
going to revert changes and we are back to the way we were.
| | 03:23 | But it shows you, it's a very powerful
feature for granting the same privilege
| | 03:27 | to a whole bunch of people at the same time.
| | 03:30 | And then there is one other kind of account that
we need to look at and that is the Guest account.
| | 03:35 | This is a very special account
that you can enable by selecting it
| | 03:38 | and then enabling the Allow Guest
to log into this computer option.
| | 03:42 | This allows anyone sitting at your computer to
login without a password and use this account.
| | 03:47 | When they log out again everything in the account is
wiped out, so okay what good is this well imagine a Mac
| | 03:53 | in a hotel lobby, you want to create a text file, use
Safari to get to Web mail for example and then log
| | 04:00 | out without any traces left behind
and this is exactly what that will do.
| | 04:04 | Now one more thing, in case you skip past my little talk
about accounts in Mac OS X Leopard Essential Training,
| | 04:11 | let me say it again here, it's a good idea to create a
trouble shooting account with administrator privileges.
| | 04:17 | Once you create it, just leave it alone.
| | 04:19 | The point of having this account is that
should your Mac start misbehaving badly,
| | 04:24 | you can switch to the troubleshooting
account and see how the Mac performs.
| | 04:27 | If it's okay then you know that something
is mucked up in your original user account
| | 04:32 | and we are going to talk about troubleshooting later.
| | 04:34 | In the meantime, let's actually create that
troubleshooting accounts, so you can see how this goes.
| | 04:38 | If I click plus, I am going to choose an Administrator
account, because I want my troubleshooting account have
| | 04:43 | that kind of privilege, I will call it troubleshooting.
| | 04:50 | Its short name will be Trouble.
| | 04:52 | We can put the password, verify the password and I know
what that password is so I am not going to enter a hint.
| | 05:05 | I click Create Account and now here is my troubleshooting
account and I am going to change the picture just
| | 05:14 | because I like the bird, and there we are.
| | 05:18 | And again, this account is allowed to administer this
computer and there we have these other different kinds
| | 05:23 | of accounts you can create and we have now created an admin
account for troubleshooting, later on should we need it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Limiting access with the Parental Controls system preference| 00:00 | In Leopard Essential Training we
looked briefly at parental controls.
| | 00:04 | As it's one of Leopard's marquee features I would like
to revisit the subject and look at parental controls
| | 00:08 | in a little more depth and we do
that by going into system preferences
| | 00:13 | and we are going to start this by creating an account.
| | 00:17 | When we last looked at accounts we had just a couple
of accounts I have created a few more for members
| | 00:22 | of my family and friends who will be using this Mac.
| | 00:24 | I want to create one more now with parental controls.
| | 00:27 | In order to do so we first unlock this so that
we can create accounts, administrator's password
| | 00:34 | and click the plus button to create a new account.
| | 00:38 | Under the New Account pop-up menu I will choose Managed
with Parental Controls. This will be for my child
| | 00:44 | so I will call it Kid- I kid you not.
And a password. And create account.
| | 00:57 | You will notice that Allow user to
administer this computer is turned off
| | 01:00 | because when you have parental controls you really
don't want that person able to install software
| | 01:06 | and do things with it that end administrator can do.
| | 01:08 | However if you want to you can
turn this on again makes no sense
| | 01:11 | to me why you would but you certainly have that option.
| | 01:14 | Next thing to do is to click the Open
Parental Controls button and bring this up.
| | 01:20 | Now that we have done that we simply select
the account, we would like to configure.
| | 01:24 | Now you will see 5 separate tabs.
| | 01:27 | The first is System.
| | 01:28 | This provides a number of options.
| | 01:30 | The first is Use Simple Finder.
| | 01:33 | When you enable this and switch over to an account
| | 01:36 | that has parental controls imposed upon
it this is what it's going to look like.
| | 01:40 | It will have 4 Finder menus, you will have
the Apple menu, Finder, File and Help.
| | 01:45 | The dock will contain only icons
of the running applications.
| | 01:48 | It will have the My Applications folder
a Documents folder and Shared folders
| | 01:53 | and of course it will have the trash as well.
| | 01:55 | There is no hard drive icon on the desktop
there is no side bar in Open Finder windows
| | 02:00 | and you will see no contextual menus
when you control click on the desktop.
| | 02:04 | Inside the applications, documents and shared folders items
are displayed in icon view only and they can't be moved.
| | 02:12 | To make things easier kids can launch
items to these folders with a single click.
| | 02:16 | The Apple menu offers sleep and logout commands but there
is no option for restarting or shutting down the Mac.
| | 02:22 | The next option is to only allow selected applications.
| | 02:26 | This way you can control what this user is going to do.
| | 02:29 | So for example perhaps I would like to allow my
child to use iMovie, but not iDVD or GarageBand.
| | 02:38 | iPhoto yes iWeb perhaps not and maybe I want
to limit all access to the Internet simply
| | 02:44 | by switching off all Internet applications
by unchecking that box.
| | 02:49 | Also at the bottom of this window you are going to see
some other kinds of modifications that you can perform.
| | 02:53 | For example, can this administrator deal with printers?
| | 02:56 | In this case no I don't want my child to touching printers.
| | 02:59 | How about burning CDs and DVDs?
| | 03:00 | Nope, I am going to turn that off too.
| | 03:02 | Can change password?
| | 03:03 | Absolutely not, I want total control of this Mac.
| | 03:06 | I will turn that off too, put these options back on.
| | 03:10 | Next we go to the Content tab.
| | 03:14 | In the Content tab you can do a couple of things
with the content that this user will be able to view.
| | 03:19 | The first is Hide profanity in Dictionary.
| | 03:22 | What this does is hides any sort of raw language.
| | 03:25 | Now somebody can go into the dictionary and they can enter
the clinical terms for body parts and sexual congress
| | 03:31 | but they may not use their four letter
word equivalants. If they try to search
| | 03:35 | for this stuff they won't find
it, it will not appear in there.
| | 03:38 | Then you have website restrictions. You have 3
options here. One is to allow unrestricted access
| | 03:43 | to websites this is something you do
not want to allow for your young child.
| | 03:48 | The next one imposes a little more security and that's
try to limit access to adult websites automatically.
| | 03:54 | By clicking Customize you can determine
how this is really going to work.
| | 03:58 | For example if your child is doing homework and the
subject of breast cancer comes up for example some
| | 04:03 | of these filters may filter out important medical sites.
| | 04:06 | What you can do is allow certain
sites by clicking the Plus button
| | 04:10 | and then you can enter the URL for
that site and you are set to go.
| | 04:15 | You can also never allow certain sites.
| | 04:18 | There are certain unseemly sites
that use very innocent sounding names.
| | 04:22 | If you learn what those are and realize that your child is
trying to get to these sites you can click the Plus button
| | 04:28 | and then you can add the URLs for those sites
so now these sites are off limits as well.
| | 04:35 | Finally the most secure option particularly for a young
child is to choose allow access to only these websites.
| | 04:42 | This produces a series of bookmarks that Apple creates.
| | 04:45 | These are all kid friendly bookmarks that are
perfectly fine for a child to go to, Disney,
| | 04:50 | Yahoo, Kids National Geographic, it's all fine.
| | 04:53 | At this point you can create a white list of bookmarks.
Just click the plus button and you can add a bookmark
| | 04:59 | or you can add a folder and then in the
resulting window you add the URL for the site
| | 05:04 | that you want to allow your child to go to.
| | 05:06 | Now suppose the kid is on the computer goes to
somewhere like PBS Kids or National Geographic Kids
| | 05:12 | and tries to go somewhere else. They
enter something in Safari's address field
| | 05:17 | or they click a link that goes outside that domain.
| | 05:20 | Should they attempt to do this
| | 05:21 | up pops a little warning that says "I am sorry, you
are not allowed to go here," so it keeps them caged
| | 05:26 | in to just the sites that you have allowed.
| | 05:29 | Well turn on unrestricted for now.
| | 05:31 | We will go to Mail and iChat.
| | 05:34 | Mail and iChat filtering is very much like the
white list that we talked about under Safari.
| | 05:39 | You have two options you can limit
Mail or you can limit iChat.
| | 05:42 | When you limit Mail once again you see our friend the plus
button you can click the plus button and you can choose
| | 05:49 | who this person is allowed to communicate with.
| | 05:52 | So this child can then sent me an email, her grandmother an
email, uncle, friends, that sort of thing but not strangers.
| | 06:00 | Not people that you haven't approved.
| | 06:01 | And you are going to accomplish this a couple of ways.
| | 06:03 | One is you can type an email address in the Allow
Contacts area or you can enter that iChat handle we choose
| | 06:11 | or you can click the downward pointing triangle.
| | 06:13 | This expands to show you the contents of your Address
Book you can then choose contacts and click Add
| | 06:21 | and that will add the names to the Allowed List.
| | 06:24 | Same thing works with iChat, same idea
plus add identities and you are good to go.
| | 06:30 | Time Limits is next.
| | 06:32 | You know sometimes kids sit too long at the
computer as wonderful as the Mac is it's nice
| | 06:37 | to have a balance it's good for kids
to get outside run around, read books,
| | 06:42 | talk to people do other things not
just sit at the computer all day.
| | 06:45 | This is how you can limit the time they spend doing that.
| | 06:48 | The first option, Weekday time limits.
| | 06:51 | You can limit computer use to anywhere
from half an hour a day to 8 hours a day.
| | 06:57 | You choose what you believe is healthy and necessary
for your child to do. So if we set it at 3 hours a day
| | 07:04 | for example this gives that child over a 24-hour
period 3 hours that they can use the computer.
| | 07:10 | They can be logged in for 3 hours. It doesn't have to
be continuous, it can be in little chunks over the day
| | 07:15 | so it can be an hour in the morning, half an
hour later as long as it adds up to the total.
| | 07:19 | When you get to about 15 minutes of the limit
| | 07:22 | up pops a little warning dialog box saying,
"You have 15 minutes left. Please wrap
| | 07:26 | up what you need to do because your time is almost up."
| | 07:29 | Once the time is up the child will be
logged out and they will not be allowed back
| | 07:34 | in until that 24-hour period has expired.
| | 07:39 | You also have the option to set weekend time limits.
Same idea here. How many hours over the course
| | 07:44 | of 2 days are you going to allow your child to use the Mac.
| | 07:48 | Again up to 8 hours, down to half an hour.
And then there is the Bedtime option.
| | 07:55 | Kids need to get their rest and you don't want them up
after a certain period of time banging on the computer.
| | 07:59 | And it would be great if they didn't get up at 4 in the
morning so that they can spend time with the computer
| | 08:04 | as well. So on school nights you can set a limit. Say, you
know after 8 o'clock you are done, this is going to turn off
| | 08:10 | and you can't use the computer again until 6 am. And
on weekends what the heck, we are going to make it 5
| | 08:17 | in the morning. That will keep you out of
my room and let me sleep late. That's fine.
| | 08:22 | You can have the computer after that but I am certainly
going to set a weekend time limit so use your time wisely.
| | 08:28 | And finally there is the Logs tab and
the log is really what it sounds like.
| | 08:33 | It's a way for you to keep tabs on
what your child has done on the Mac.
| | 08:38 | And so we see websites visited.
| | 08:40 | Any websites your child visits under
account will appear in the log.
| | 08:44 | Also websites that are blocked.
This will give you an idea
| | 08:48 | of what your child has been doing
and has been forbidden from doing.
| | 08:52 | It's quite likely that a lot of this stuff is going
to be very innocent. They have tried to click out
| | 08:56 | of an allowed website and they have
been told they can't do it.
| | 08:59 | Applications it will tell you which applications the child
has watched, how long they were up and when they were quit
| | 09:04 | and finally iChat is really useful. There can be some
untoward things that happened in instant messaging.
| | 09:10 | What the iChat option will do is it will keep a complete
list of all the iChats that your child has engaged
| | 09:17 | in as well as complete transcript
of what happened in that chat.
| | 09:21 | So not only can you see that little Suzy iChat with her
little friend George but if you wish to you can go in
| | 09:27 | and see exactly what was typed between each one of them.
| | 09:31 | I know it feels a little like you are spying on your child
and it's quite possible that you don't feel that you need
| | 09:35 | to do this but some people feel that they do have to do
this, they need to keep track of what their kids are doing.
| | 09:41 | And honestly although this is not technology related, it's
really important that you talk to your children about this.
| | 09:46 | They need to know 1) about some of the dangers, without
scaring them. I mean you don't want to talk to a 7 year old
| | 09:51 | and talk to them about some of the
evil things going on in the Internet.
| | 09:54 | As they grow older you can give them
a better idea of what's happening.
| | 09:58 | Try to make it clear that this is your
computer, it's a privilege to use the Internet,
| | 10:02 | and that you are keeping track of what they are doing.
| | 10:05 | If they know that you are watching it's less likely
that they are going to try to break the rules
| | 10:09 | and do something that they are not allowed to do.
| | 10:11 | In the meantime you have Parental Controls, which will help
you manage your child's Internet and computer experience.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Updating your Mac with the Software Update system preference| 00:00 | You know that OS X has the ability to update itself
through Software Update and we will take a look at it now.
| | 00:08 | When you pull up Software Update from within
System Preferences, you see a few options.
| | 00:13 | One is Check Now, go and get it, let's give it a look,
you may have heard that there is a new update out,
| | 00:18 | this is the first thing you are
going to do is click Check Now.
| | 00:21 | You are going to also decide now often it's
automatically going to look for updates.
| | 00:25 | You have the option to look Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.
| | 00:29 | There is also the option to download important updates
automatically you know honestly I am a little wary
| | 00:34 | of this option.
| | 00:35 | I like to know that a piece of software
is solid before I install it on my Mac.
| | 00:39 | For example, if a big OS X update comes out, 10.5.14
whatever, I want to have other people live with it
| | 00:46 | for about a week or so before I install it myself.
| | 00:49 | So I don't want Software Update doing it for me.
| | 00:51 | I can also check installed updates to
see what's been installed on my Mac,
| | 00:56 | that way I know oh gee there is
a new version or something out.
| | 00:59 | I can check to see what version I already have,
oh gee I have that already I don't need to worry
| | 01:03 | that Software Update doesn't seem to
be able to find it, because I have it.
| | 01:07 | So you will go back to Schedule Check, and let's actually
check and see if there is anything out there new for us.
| | 01:12 | Check now.
| | 01:13 | And what this does is it launches the Software
Update application and this isn't actually part
| | 01:21 | of System Preferences, but rather
it's an application that's tucked away
| | 01:24 | in the Core Services folder, which
is deep within the System folder.
| | 01:28 | We have a couple of updates here
that we can install, if we choose to.
| | 01:32 | While we are in this view, it's
worth looking at a couple of things.
| | 01:35 | Go to the Update menu and the first option is Ignore Update,
so you can select an update that appears in this list,
| | 01:43 | it's something you are never going to want, you
can say, "No I don't want it, please go away.
| | 01:48 | I don't want to see you ever again."
| | 01:49 | You select that and then that update
will go away and off it goes.
| | 01:56 | If later I want something back, I am sorry I ignore
that, you can always get that back again by going
| | 02:00 | to Software Update and choosing Reset Ignored Updates.
| | 02:04 | It will check for new software and it will
bring back whatever it was that you ignored.
| | 02:11 | Other options here are Download Only, so you can
select something or select everything that's in there,
| | 02:17 | you can download it, it doesn't install, it only downloads.
| | 02:20 | And so the advantage of this is,
let's say you have gone to the office,
| | 02:23 | you have got a wicked fast internet connection there and you
have got a Mac at home and you are using a dialup connection
| | 02:29 | at home, so you have got a wicked slow connection there.
| | 02:31 | So what you do is you Download Only bring it into
the Mac at the office then you put it on to a disk
| | 02:36 | or put it on a key drive or something like that.
| | 02:38 | Then you can take that home and install it from there.
| | 02:40 | So this is a nice way just to download the software.
| | 02:43 | The default is installed and that's what happens
when you run this normally, you select it this way,
| | 02:47 | when you click that Install Two
Items that's exactly what happens.
| | 02:51 | It will install the application and then it will leave a
receipt in a Receipts folder that within the Library folder
| | 02:57 | at the root level of your hard drive and
here is a hint about a Receipts folder.
| | 03:01 | You may go in there and say what is all
this stuff and here they are like dozens
| | 03:04 | and hundreds of files, don't throw them out.
| | 03:07 | And the reason you don't, is because this is Software
Update record of what you have got on your machine.
| | 03:11 | If you throw that out, it's going to confuse Software
Update and it may offer an update to you that is older
| | 03:17 | than the software you are currently using.
| | 03:19 | You may end up installing something that's too older
then you are going to have a conflict on your Mac
| | 03:23 | and you definitely don't want that to happen.
| | 03:25 | So again these things don't take up a lot of room,
just leave them where they are and you will be fine.
| | 03:29 | And then there is the Install and Keep Package option and
that's the very last one, it will install the software
| | 03:35 | but it will also keep a copy of the
installer, so later if you need to reinstall,
| | 03:40 | you don't have to go through Software
Update or go to Apple's website
| | 03:42 | and download something instead you can just use the
package that you have and then you can install from there.
| | 03:48 | And that is the nuts and bolts of
installing software with Software Update.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Speech| 00:00 | The Mac has the ability to obey some spoken
commands as well as speak text on the screen.
| | 00:05 | These capabilities are controlled
within the Speech System Preference.
| | 00:09 | Now before we get started, understand that speech
recognition is not the same thing as dictation.
| | 00:14 | Speech recognition will try to issue commands based
on what you say, but it won't transcribe what you say.
| | 00:20 | For that you need a program like Mac's Speeches Dictate.
| | 00:24 | With a microphone attached to your Mac and it configured
as the input, enable the Speakable Items option.
| | 00:30 | This little lozenge here with Escape in it appears.
| | 00:35 | When you want to tell your Mac to do something, hold
down the Esc key and tell the Mac what you want.
| | 00:39 | For example, "open iTunes" and there it is, there is iTunes.
| | 00:45 | We will quit that.
| | 00:47 | To see what your Mac will respond to, click on the bottom
of the lozenge and choose Open Speech Commands Window.
| | 00:55 | You can go through this list of speakable
items to see what the Mac will respond to.
| | 01:00 | And here is one, Tell me a joke, let's see if
that works. "Tell me a joke."
| | 01:05 | (Computer: "Knock, knock".)
| | 01:06 | Who's there?
| | 01:07 | (Computer: "Thelma.")
| | 01:09 | Thelma who?
| | 01:10 | (Computer: "Thelma your soul").
| | 01:12 | Ha, Ha, Ha.
| | 01:15 | If speech recognition doesn't seem to be working very
well- and I kind of test it sometimes, it doesn't-
| | 01:20 | press the Calibrate button.
| | 01:22 | At this point speak able items will try to calibrate
the mike, so there it works with Speech Recognition.
| | 01:27 | For example, I would say, "What time is it?"
| | 01:31 | When it is successful, it blinks to let
me know that it understood what I said
| | 01:35 | or I could try "Quit this Application",
and once again I get the blink
| | 01:41 | and that shows that I am reasonably well calibrated.
| | 01:44 | If these things are not being set off,
you can adjust the slider to low-to-high.
| | 01:48 | If you see things way up in the red that
means you are probably hitting it too hard
| | 01:52 | and Speech Recognition could have a hard
time understanding what you are saying.
| | 01:56 | We cancel out of that.
| | 01:58 | If you would like to pretend that you are
on the bridge of the Starship Enterprise,
| | 02:01 | you can select Listen continuously with keyword.
| | 02:05 | What this means is that you speak a special keyword before
you say your command and then the computer will listen.
| | 02:11 | So for example I say "Computer, open
iTunes" and sure enough it works.
| | 02:18 | We will go back to the Esc key, because that's
the one I prefer and we will turn it off,
| | 02:23 | so it doesn't respond when I don't care for it to.
| | 02:25 | We now look at Text to Speech. Honestly Text to Speech
is more useful than Speech Recognition particularly
| | 02:31 | since Leopard now includes a computer voice that
doesn't sound like it came from a bad Sci-fi movie.
| | 02:36 | When you click Text to Speech, the
system voice should be set to Alex.
| | 02:40 | This is a new voice and one that sounds
far more natural than previous voices.
| | 02:44 | Press Play to audition it.
| | 02:45 | (Computer: "Hi! I am a new voice for Leopard.")
| | 02:48 | Now, for fun you can see what it sounded like
in the old days by choosing Bruce. Play.
| | 02:54 | (Computer: "I sure like being inside this fancy computer")
As much as Bruce may like that, we don't care
| | 03:00 | to listen to him, we would prefer Alex instead.
| | 03:03 | The options below are mostly self-explanatory;
| | 03:06 | one thing that's worth while checking though
is Speak selected text when the key is pressed.
| | 03:12 | I am going to choose Control+F9.
| | 03:16 | Now when I press this key combination, the Mac
should read my text and let's find out if it does.
| | 03:21 | I am going to open up a text file and there it is.
| | 03:25 | I will select that text and I press Control+F9.
| | 03:31 | (Computer: "Speak the speech I pray you, but before you do,
don't forget to pick up a gallon of milk at the store.")
| | 03:39 | Thank you very much, Alex, I will get that
milk, and that text had to be selected.
| | 03:43 | However, within TextEdit, you find that it has its own
speech option and I don't have to select text for that.
| | 03:49 | I deselect it, I go to Edit, Speech, Start Speaking.
| | 03:55 | (Computer: "Speak the speech I pray you, but before you do,
don't forget to pick up a gallon of milk at the store.")
| | 04:03 | And not all applications support speech, but some do, so
it's worth looking around if you like to have speech read
| | 04:08 | to you to see if your application has that option.
| | 04:11 | We will close TextEdit, and we finished
with speech and we'll close it as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing your startup disk with the Startup Disk system preference| 00:00 | As its name suggests, the Startup Disk System Preference
is where you tell your Mac which disk to boot from.
| | 00:07 | Many of you will just have the one
disk, for example, our disk right here
| | 00:11 | and this is a Startup Disk that we currently use.
| | 00:13 | And if that's the case that's fine but others may have
other options, for example a bootable DVD as we have here,
| | 00:19 | this is our Leopard install disk and you can't boot from it
| | 00:22 | and that's why it appears in the
Startup Disk System Preference.
| | 00:25 | You might also find one from utility such as Alsoft
DiskWarrior that is capable of booting your Mac.
| | 00:31 | You might see a bootable partition on your
startup drive or an additional hard drive
| | 00:35 | that has a bootable version of OS X on it.
| | 00:37 | For example if we have installed OS X on our Macintosh HD2,
it too would appear among the selection of startup drives.
| | 00:46 | You could see a Windows volume if you have installed
boot camp and you might also see a net boot volume
| | 00:52 | if you have a OS server running on your network.
| | 00:54 | In such cases, the details that we will leave
to the OS X server title published by Lynda.com,
| | 01:00 | you would select a network system item and click Restart.
| | 01:03 | To change to a different bootable volume, you
just select that volume and you press Restart,
| | 01:07 | so if I want to start from the DVD, I select it, I click
Restart and that is the volume that the Mac will boot from.
| | 01:14 | I don't care to do that right now, however.
| | 01:16 | Optionally, you can boot from any volume and
when the Mac starts up, hold down the Option key,
| | 01:21 | in the resulting window choose the volume you want to start
from and then click the right-arrow to proceed with booting.
| | 01:27 | When you start up this way, note that the next time
you start up, the Mac will use the setting you choose
| | 01:32 | in the Startup Disk System Preference rather than the
volume you chose when you held down the Option key.
| | 01:38 | Now when you see Windows on X,
where X is the name of a volume,
| | 01:41 | it means you have installed Boot Camp. This is Apple's
technology for running windows natively on an Intel Mac.
| | 01:47 | When you select this and click Restart, you will be running
Windows exactly like you are running it on a Windows PC.
| | 01:53 | It's running natively.
| | 01:54 | And I will talk about Boot Camp in a separate lesson,
finally there is Target Disk Mode, click that button
| | 02:01 | and you will be asked if you would like to restart
your computer in Target Disk Mode, we don't want to,
| | 02:06 | I will cancel that, but I will explain what this is for.
| | 02:08 | Each Mac has the ability to act like an external hard
drive to another Mac connected to it by a FireWire cable.
| | 02:15 | This is called FireWire Target Disk Mode.
| | 02:17 | It works this way: you string a FireWire
cable between one Mac and the other.
| | 02:21 | On the Mac that you would like to appear is a hard
drive, go to the Startup Disk System Preference
| | 02:26 | and click that Target Disk Mode
button that I just showed you.
| | 02:29 | When the Mac restarts, it will display a FireWire symbol
that bounces around on a dark background on your Mac screen.
| | 02:36 | That Mac Startup Volume will look here as an
external hard drive on the other Mac's desktop.
| | 02:41 | When the Mac is not at that way, the Mac connected
to it has full access to the contents of that drive.
| | 02:46 | Any other partitions on that drive or drives attached
to that Mac will not appear just the startup volume.
| | 02:53 | You can also do this the old fashioned
way and that old fashioned way is
| | 02:56 | to connect the two computers via a FireWire cable
and restart the one that you would like to appear
| | 03:01 | as an external drive by holding down the T key on that Mac.
| | 03:05 | This throws that Mac into FireWire Target Disk Mode.
| | 03:08 | So FireWire Target Disk Mode, selecting
other volumes, click Restart
| | 03:12 | and there you have the Startup Disk System Preference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Universal Access system preference: The basics| 00:00 | The Mac has a bunch of features built
in for people with physical limitations,
| | 00:04 | those people who have a hard time seeing, hearing
or manipulating the mouse and keyboard for example.
| | 00:09 | The controls for these features are gathered
together in the Universal Access System Preference
| | 00:14 | and we will start with an overview of these features.
| | 00:16 | Seeing is the first tab.
| | 00:18 | The first option is to turn on VoiceOver.
| | 00:20 | Now VoiceOver is a complicated enough feature
that I devote a separate lesson to it.
| | 00:25 | All you need to know at this point is
that it's a screen reader for the Mac.
| | 00:28 | Next is Zoom.
| | 00:30 | If you have a hard time seeing the Mac screen, zooming the
screen may help and that's what the Zoom feature is for.
| | 00:36 | You switch on the feature by pressing Cmd+Option+8 and
to zoom the screen, you press Cmd+Option+Equals (=)
| | 00:46 | and back out again using Cmd+Option+Hyphen (-).
| | 00:50 | Note that these hyphen and equals signs are found at
the top of the keyboard, not on the Mac's number pad.
| | 00:58 | When you click the Options button, you can decide
maximum zoom settings and minimum zoom settings.
| | 01:04 | At the very bottom, you will see a
feature that may look familiar to you.
| | 01:07 | This is use scroll wheel with modifier key to zoom.
| | 01:10 | We have already set that up in keyboard and mouse
system preference so we know what that's for.
| | 01:15 | Click Done and we are out of there.
| | 01:17 | And then, there is Display.
| | 01:19 | If you're kind of kid who routinely jumps on your Mac's
keyboard, you are eventually going to see an X-ray image
| | 01:24 | of the screen's content and it looks like this.
| | 01:27 | And the reason why is because during that jump,
| | 01:30 | someone pressed Cmd+Control+Option+8
and flipped on the white on black view.
| | 01:37 | This key combination inverts the
screen making it easier for some people
| | 01:41 | with visual impairments to see the screen's content.
| | 01:43 | In this area, you also have the option to flip your display
into grayscale as well as enhance contrast as I am doing now
| | 01:57 | and also there are keyboard shortcuts for that too.
| | 02:00 | There are a couple of options on the bottom.
| | 02:02 | The first is enable access for your system devices.
| | 02:05 | Every so often, an application will ask that
you switch on this option because it needs
| | 02:09 | to use universal access to perform some magic.
| | 02:12 | Unless you are asked to switch this on, just leave it off.
| | 02:15 | You will be told when it needs to be turned on.
| | 02:17 | For example, Automator's Watch Me recording feature
requires this and it will tell you when you try to turn it
| | 02:23 | on that you need to go in here and switch this on.
| | 02:26 | The other option is show Universal
Access status in the menu bar.
| | 02:30 | Switch this on and our Universal
Access icon appears in the menu bar.
| | 02:35 | As it says, it only shows you the status of these
Universal Access features whether they are on or off.
| | 02:41 | You can't use the menu to do anything.
| | 02:43 | It's just there to help explain
why your monitor has suddenly gone
| | 02:46 | from black on white to white on black for example.
| | 02:49 | And we'll turn that off.
| | 02:51 | Then, there is the Hearing tab.
| | 02:54 | The only option here is to flash the screen when an alert
sound occurs and you can test it by clicking Flash Screen.
| | 03:06 | This is useful not only if you are hard of hearing but
if you have had to turn off the Mac sound for some reason
| | 03:11 | but still want to be alerted when
something important happens.
| | 03:14 | We will move on to the Keyboard tab.
| | 03:16 | This tab provides a number of options
and we will start with Sticky Keys.
| | 03:19 | If you find it impossible to press
multiple keys at the same time,
| | 03:23 | you use Sticky Keys, the first option in the Keyboard tab.
| | 03:26 | For example, to invert your display, you don't have to
simultaneously press Cmd+Control+Option+8, but rather,
| | 03:32 | press the Modifier keys one at a time and then press 8.
| | 03:36 | So I will do it now.
| | 03:37 | Cmd+Control+Option+8 and that's inverted it.
| | 03:42 | Let's undo it, Cmd+Control+Option+8, turn that off.
| | 03:48 | And then there is Slow Keys.
| | 03:51 | If you are sitting at your Mac, do me a favor and find
a text field somewhere and then press and hold the key.
| | 03:56 | You see after just about half a
second, the key starts to repeat.
| | 04:01 | This is a problem for people who
can't move their fingers quickly.
| | 04:04 | Slow Keys tells the Mac to wait much
longer before repeating a pressed key.
| | 04:09 | And then there is the Mouse tab and if you have a
laptop, this will be called Mouse and Track Pad.
| | 04:14 | This tab allows you to move the
Mac's pointer with the keyboard.
| | 04:17 | So you turn it on and I will use the number
pad on my Mac keyboard and watch what happens.
| | 04:23 | I am pressing the 4 key now, and there goes the pointer.
| | 04:28 | I will press the 1 key and it goes southwest.
| | 04:32 | Press 6, it goes right or east.
| | 04:36 | 9 will go northeast and 4 will go left again.
| | 04:41 | With these sliders, you can adjust the delay.
| | 04:45 | It took a little while for this to kick in so if I want
to change that, I can move it down and then I will press
| | 04:53 | and I didn't have to wait quite so long, and turn it off.
| | 04:59 | And finally, at the bottom, you
have a Cursor Size Controller.
| | 05:02 | This is helpful for just about anybody
particularly if you have a huge monitor.
| | 05:06 | Let's say you have got a 30" Apple Cinema
Display, you have tons of real estate here
| | 05:11 | and your cursor may be really tiny and you can't see it.
| | 05:15 | Easy enough, just click and hold on the slider and the
cursor gets bigger and bigger and bigger until it gets
| | 05:23 | to be huge, and we will move it
back down again to its normal size.
| | 05:32 | Apple has done a nice job of making the Mac more
accessible to people with physical limitations
| | 05:37 | and all that is handled within Universal Access.
| | 05:40 | Up next, we will take a look at VoiceOver utility.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Universal Access system preference: VoiceOver| 00:00 | As promised, we are back to VoiceOver,
which is Apple's screen reader.
| | 00:06 | While most Mac users with normal
sight, they never touch VoiceOver,
| | 00:09 | it's an important piece of technology for the
blind and for those with visual impairments.
| | 00:14 | Windows users pay thousands of dollars for screen readers
this capable, yet Apple provides VoiceOver for free.
| | 00:21 | To witness VoiceOver's wonders, press Cmd+F5.
| | 00:26 | (Computer: The VoiceOver on. System
Preferences window. Universal Access toolbar.)
| | 00:31 | The speech voice chosen in the speech
system preference, and that's the Alex voice
| | 00:35 | by default, will begin narrating elements on the screen.
| | 00:38 | This is to give you a tour of what's
displaying to give you a sense of where you are.
| | 00:42 | The idea is that through key commands and yes, there are a
lot of them, you can control every element on the screen,
| | 00:49 | all the while the Mac telling you what's going on.
| | 00:51 | For those with normal sight, this may sound like an
insurmountable task, both listening to Alex jabber on forever
| | 00:58 | and memorizing seemingly countless commands.
| | 01:00 | But for those without sight, it's a Godsend.
| | 01:03 | Here are a couple of things that you
can try to get a taste of VoiceOver.
| | 01:06 | With VoiceOver on, press Control+Option+F1.
| | 01:10 | (Computer: Application Chooser menu. Three items.)
| | 01:12 | This produces the Application Chooser.
| | 01:15 | Using the up and down arrow keys, you can
move through the applications in the list.
| | 01:20 | To view a submenu for a particular
application, use the right arrow key.
| | 01:24 | Left arrow takes you back up through the hierarchy.
| | 01:27 | So it works like this.
| | 01:28 | (Computer: Finder menu. Finder menu, two items.)
| | 01:32 | So left arrow key, (Computer: Application Chooser menu on Finder menu)
| | 01:37 | down arrow key, (Computer: System Preferences menu)
| | 01:40 | right arrow key. (Computer: System Preferences menu, two
items. Application Chooser menu on System Preferences menu.)
| | 01:47 | And then to turn this off, you simply press Control+Option+F1 again.
| | 01:51 | (Computer: System Preferences to running applications.)
| | 01:53 | Here's another thing that you can try.
| | 01:55 | With VoiceOver on, press Control+Option+F7.
| | 02:00 | (Computer: VoiceOver menu, 8 items.)
| | 02:01 | You will see the VoiceOver menu which you
can navigate using those same arrow keys
| | 02:05 | in the same way you navigated the Application Chooser.
| | 02:08 | (Computer: Help menu. Help menu, 4 items.
VoiceOver menu on. Help menu.)
| | 02:15 | (Computer: VoiceOver utility F8. Orientation menu.)
| | 02:18 | Press Cmd+F5 to turn VoiceOver off.
| | 02:21 | (Computer: VoiceOver off.)
| | 02:24 | There is so much more that VoiceOver can do.
| | 02:26 | To learn more, view VoiceOver Help, which you can access by
launching the VoiceOver Utility and choosing VoiceOver Help
| | 02:32 | from the Help menu or if VoiceOver
is on, pressing Shift+Crtl+Option+?
| | 02:39 | And that's a very brief look at a very
powerful feature called VoiceOver.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. MailTweaking your account settings| 00:00 | If you have looked at my Leopard Essential Training
title, you know how to create an email account.
| | 00:04 | We will now look at ways to tweak your account,
so that they will be more useful to you.
| | 00:09 | First thing we will do is we will launch mail.
| | 00:13 | Choose preferences and click the Accounts option.
| | 00:17 | The account information tab allows us to spend a little
time with the outgoing mail server, which is the SMTP area.
| | 00:25 | Why bother?
| | 00:26 | Well suppose you have more than one
email account, say a POP account at home,
| | 00:30 | a work account and then perhaps a free Gmail account?
| | 00:32 | You may notice that when you take your laptop on
the road, you can't send from your home pop account,
| | 00:38 | this is because the location you are attempting
to send from a hotel or a coffee shop,
| | 00:42 | for example doesn't allow mail relaying through it's ISP,
meaning you are trying to send from one ISP's SMTP server
| | 00:50 | through another ISP's SMTP server a
technique that spammers often use.
| | 00:55 | Within the outgoing mail server area,
there is couple of things that you can try.
| | 00:59 | From the Pop-Up menu choose, Edit Server List.
| | 01:04 | In the sheet that appears, select your regular
SMTP server and then click the Advanced tab.
| | 01:11 | In the Server Port field, enter 587,
you can leave your other settings alone.
| | 01:17 | You use Port 587 because many ISPs
use it as an alternate SMTP port
| | 01:23 | and unlike the default SMTP port
25 they don't restrict Port 587.
| | 01:29 | It doesn't work, no problem.
| | 01:31 | If you don't have a Gmail account,
signup for one for free from Gmail.com.
| | 01:41 | Here you see the option to signup for Gmail,
this will walk you right through the process.
| | 01:45 | We don't need to do that, just
follow along and you will be fine.
| | 01:50 | Gmail lets you acquire POP as well as IMAP accounts.
| | 01:53 | You may recall the POP accounts are those that
store your mail locally meaning on your Mac
| | 01:57 | and IMAP accounts store mail on the central server and you
access your mail through a live connection to the internet.
| | 02:03 | Now that you have a Gmail account, choose your regular
account and return to the outgoing mail server pop-up menu.
| | 02:10 | From that menu, select SMTP Gmail
and then the name of your account.
| | 02:16 | This tells mail to send email from this account from
Gmail rather than the receiving accounts, SMTP server.
| | 02:22 | You do this because Gmail is rarely
blocked in public places.
| | 02:26 | And don't worry when people receive
your email, the return address will be
| | 02:30 | from your regular account rather
than from your Gmail account.
| | 02:33 | When they reply, you will receive their
message on your regular account not on Gmail.
| | 02:38 | One thing to note, if you don't want to go through
all this bother, you can simply create a message.
| | 02:52 | And we will send from this account, that won't really send.
| | 02:56 | You try to send it and up comes a sheet that tells
you, I am sorry I can't send from this SMTP server,
| | 03:02 | let's use something else instead and then you
choose which one you want to try to send from.
| | 03:07 | The tip, I offered previously was a much more permanent
solution, it's always going to send from Gmail.
| | 03:14 | This is a temporary solution where if a
particular account won't send at that moment,
| | 03:18 | you can try a different SMTP server and you are on your way.
| | 03:21 | We will return to Mail Preferences
and look at the Mailbox Behaviors tab.
| | 03:28 | There is not a lot to say here other than that
this is where you determine how notes are stored,
| | 03:33 | how often sent messages are erased, if they
ever are, when junk mail is erased again,
| | 03:38 | if you choose to have it done automatically
and how trashed messages are dealt with.
| | 03:43 | How you configure these settings is largely up to you.
| | 03:45 | I feel better knowing that I always have a copy
of my sent messages, should I need to go back
| | 03:50 | and check on something that I allegedly promised.
| | 03:53 | Now look at the Advanced tab, which is more interesting.
| | 03:55 | The first option is Enable This Account, with this on
mail will show the account under the inbox setting.
| | 04:02 | Also when you click the Get Mail button, which is
here in the upper left, mail will check this account.
| | 04:08 | Next option is include when automatically checking for mail.
| | 04:12 | This is a little different.
| | 04:13 | If you don't want Mail to automatically check
this account for mail, disable this option.
| | 04:18 | Note that the account will be check when you use the Get
Mail button unless you switch off Enable This Account.
| | 04:24 | Now the options below that change
depending on what kind of account you have.
| | 04:28 | In a POP account, you will see Remove Copy
from Server after receiving a message.
| | 04:34 | If you have just have one Mac and you are good at
backing up your data, it's fine to switch this option on,
| | 04:39 | particularly if you have an email account
that doesn't have a lot of storage.
| | 04:42 | With just 10 or 20 megabytes of email storage,
the high resolution images Aunt Noma sends you
| | 04:47 | from her last trip abroad would make
subsequent messages from your boss bounce,
| | 04:52 | if you don't remove those huge messages from the server.
| | 04:55 | This will do that automatically.
| | 04:57 | If like me, you have a lot of Macs and an iPod Touch and
an iPhone and you retrieve your mail from all these things,
| | 05:03 | leaving messages on the server helps ensure
that you can get all your mail at anytime.
| | 05:08 | Of course having an IMAP account
where all your mail is stored
| | 05:11 | on a server is a better solution for this kind of thing.
| | 05:14 | Go back to the IMAP account and you will see
the Keep copies of messages for offline viewing.
| | 05:21 | Here again, you can decide how you want to manage your mail.
| | 05:24 | You can keep all your messages and their attachments, all
messages, but omit attachments, so you want to see what's
| | 05:29 | in the text, but you don't need the huge
attachments to be stored on your Mac.
| | 05:32 | Only messages that you have read and
don't keep copies of any of my messages,
| | 05:37 | you decide how you are going to configure this.
| | 05:40 | Back to POP, Prompt me to skip
messages over x number of kilobytes.
| | 05:46 | This option is less necessary now that broadband is so
common, but in the modem days, it was really helpful.
| | 05:52 | If you have a very slow connection to the internet, you
don't want to have to download a 3 megabyte attachment
| | 05:57 | that includes the picture of some one's cat.
| | 06:00 | With this option on mail will ask you if you
want to download pictures over a certain size.
| | 06:05 | Now be careful, you don't set this number
too low, like at around 20 kilobytes.
| | 06:08 | If you do, you will see endless warnings
make it something like 200 kilobytes
| | 06:13 | and only the largest messages will trigger a warning.
| | 06:16 | And then below here, we see the Gray Line options.
| | 06:19 | Both IMAP and POP accounts have a
gray separator after these options,
| | 06:23 | it indicates that the area below is for more advanced use.
| | 06:26 | Once you have initially set up your email account,
you shouldn't have to change these settings.
| | 06:30 | For example, we see IMAP Path Prefix and the port
there for IMAP account and then the port for SSL
| | 06:37 | or secured connections and the kind
of authentication that you might use.
| | 06:42 | Your ISP or IT person will tell you
if these settings need to be changed.
| | 06:46 | We will close accounts and in our next lesson, we
will look at organizing and viewing new messages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing and viewing messages| 00:00 | You can use mail as it is, dump everything
into a single inbox and read through it,
| | 00:05 | as you see this gets to be kind of a mess.
| | 00:09 | But mail provides you several ways to organize your
messages, so you can easily find what you are looking for
| | 00:14 | and that's what we are going to focus on in this lesson.
| | 00:16 | Let's start simple, mail displays unread messages
with a blue dot next to them as you can see here.
| | 00:23 | If that dot isn't obvious enough, open
mails Preferences, click the Viewing tab
| | 00:29 | and enable "display unread messages with both bold font."
| | 00:35 | Click this on and off couple times, so you can see the
affect, so unread messages become very, very obvious.
| | 00:43 | Mail supports threading meaning that
related messages are ganged together.
| | 00:47 | You can turn threading on and off in mails View menu.
| | 00:53 | We have it off and we will turn it on.
| | 00:56 | And you can see that threaded messages are ganged
together and are displayed in this light blue field here
| | 01:02 | and then you can select that triangle, click it and
you see all the messages that are threaded together.
| | 01:13 | Another way to organize your mail is through Smart
Mailboxes, you can quickly group messages together
| | 01:18 | in these mailboxes and these like other Mac
OS X smart items are collections of data
| | 01:24 | that are gathered together based on
a set of criteria that you determine.
| | 01:27 | For example, all messages received during a
particular week or from such and such person
| | 01:32 | or that include the word lawsuit in the subject heading.
| | 01:35 | So let's makes one that gathers together all the
messages, I flagged and to make that little bit easier,
| | 01:41 | I am going to choose View Customize Toolbar,
I will grab the flag icon and drag it
| | 01:48 | up into the toolbar and will we click Done.
| | 01:53 | Now go through my mail and I will flag a few messages.
| | 01:59 | It's important for Macs, gee somebody wants to talk about
the blue font of knowledge, that's very, very important.
| | 02:07 | And Eddie, let's look at Eddie's
message as well, so that is now flagged.
| | 02:13 | Now we choose mailbox new Smart Mailbox, we call it Flagged.
| | 02:21 | And the condition will be Messages Flagged,
click OK and now we have a new Smart Mailbox
| | 02:30 | that contains only those messages
in my inbox that are flagged.
| | 02:35 | Now note that the messages aren't moved from the inbox,
| | 02:37 | they remain there Smart Mailboxes are
really just collections of message aliases.
| | 02:42 | They point to the original messages in the inbox.
| | 02:45 | So now we can select messages in the
flag Smart Mailbox and deal with them.
| | 02:49 | For example, take this one say you know I have already
dealt with it, I am going to mark this now as unflagged.
| | 02:55 | I could also do that with the icon that I added here.
| | 02:58 | Unflag that, it's gone.
| | 03:00 | So I go back up here to the inbox, get out of that mailbox
and then I come back to Flagged again and you will see
| | 03:06 | that those messages are no longer in the Flagged
Smart Mailbox, because they are no longer flagged
| | 03:11 | and therefore the condition no longer applies.
| | 03:15 | Now Smart Mailboxes are a great way to deal
with messages, that you have already received,
| | 03:19 | but how about messages that you would like
to automatically filter as they come in.
| | 03:23 | A Smart Mailbox can help with that too, but better still is
a rule and we are going to look at rules in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Filtering mail with Rules| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to look at one of the mail's
most powerful organizational tools and that's Rules.
| | 00:05 | You have already got the basics of how a rule
works, thanks to creating a smart mailbox.
| | 00:10 | You set up a few conditions that filter mail based on
factors such as who it came from, the subject heading
| | 00:16 | or what the body contains and then you tell mail what you
want to do with the messages that meet these conditions.
| | 00:22 | In this lesson, we will do this kind
of thing automatically with a rule.
| | 00:25 | First thing I am going to do is I am going to create a
new mailbox somewhere for my mail to go and we are going
| | 00:31 | to call this one System9 and you
will see why in just a minute.
| | 00:40 | Now we go to Mail Preferences and click on Rules.
| | 00:46 | Let's create a rule, you simply click Add Rule and then
the Condition Sheet appears, we call this rule System9.
| | 00:56 | Now what I want to do is create a mailbox for any messages
that come from a group called System9 which happens
| | 01:02 | to be the name of my band and I want
those to be filtered into it's own folder.
| | 01:08 | So from the first condition, I choose Sender is Member
of Group, these are my Address Book groups in this pop-up
| | 01:16 | and here I have two currently, one is
Business Contacts and the other is System9.
| | 01:20 | The condition is if sender is in the group
System9, we are going to do something with that.
| | 01:25 | What we are going to do, is we are going
to move the message and we are going
| | 01:28 | to put it into the mailbox System9, I click OK.
| | 01:36 | At this point, mail will prompt me and say would
you like me to apply this rule to the messages
| | 01:41 | that are in your inbox, click Apply and close.
| | 01:46 | Now don't be disappointed if the messages don't appear,
sometimes it doesn't work, if it doesn't work all you have
| | 01:53 | to do is select all your messages,
right click and select Apply Rules.
| | 01:59 | In this case, it actually did take, because
we can tell here's our System9 folder
| | 02:03 | that was empty before, now it has a 149 messages in it.
| | 02:07 | So it's done the right thing, it
found the members of that group
| | 02:10 | and it filtered it into the System9 group automatically.
| | 02:14 | When messages come in from anybody in the band,
they will automatically be placed in this folder.
| | 02:20 | Unlike a smart mailbox, these are the real messages.
| | 02:23 | These are not aliases; this is the real deal.
| | 02:25 | So if you delete these things, they are gone.
| | 02:28 | Rules can have multiple conditions, if you choose for a
rule to follow all of the conditions you have laid down,
| | 02:33 | you can really zero in on particular types of messages.
| | 02:36 | But you also have the option to choose ANY as
an option, which let's you create a broad rule
| | 02:41 | and we are going to create one of those right now.
| | 02:44 | Let's suppose that you receive mail only
from the US, you have a lot of the spam
| | 02:48 | that sneaks past your spam filter
comes from other countries.
| | 02:51 | You can create any sort of rule that
will help filter this stuff out.
| | 02:55 | So the first thing we will do is create
a new mailbox, we will call it Overseas,
| | 03:02 | we will make sure it goes on my Mac and click OK.
| | 03:09 | Preferences, we will now add rule, we will give this an
appropriate name and we are going to make this an ANY rule.
| | 03:23 | We will use the From condition contains.ru, add another
.cn, add one more .kr and we will add one more which is .ro.
| | 03:41 | These are the domain names for
Russia, China, Korea and Romania.
| | 03:48 | In the action area, we are going to choose
Move Messages to Overseas and click OK.
| | 03:55 | Again would you like to apply the rules, sure
let's give it a shot and see what happens.
| | 04:03 | We got nothing, but watch Select All, apply rules and
we zeroed in on one message that came from Russia.
| | 04:14 | And again this is an ANY rule, if we had
messages in there for Romania or China, or Korea,
| | 04:20 | these two would be automatically filtered into this folder.
| | 04:24 | Now note there some perfectly innocent
messages could come from overseas,
| | 04:27 | so it's a good idea to check these folders
before you just automatically toss things out.
| | 04:32 | Let's create a very specific All Rule so
I can immediately see important messages
| | 04:37 | that come from my producer here at lynda.com Mac.
| | 04:42 | Preferences, Add Rule, we will call this Max.
| | 04:49 | Say if all the following conditions are met, From
Contains Mac, the message priority is high and that means
| | 05:02 | that the Mac really, really wants to talk to me.
| | 05:05 | In the result we will choose, set color of
message, not the background but rather the text,
| | 05:11 | we will make it red, so it really stands out.
| | 05:15 | We will have it play a sound.
| | 05:18 | We will play the submarine sound and just to be
sure that it really, really catches my attention,
| | 05:25 | we will have the icon bounce in the dock and we click OK.
| | 05:30 | Notice the Mac rule isn't red because
we have told it to turn the text red.
| | 05:36 | Now we are looking in the inbox and
we will see if Mac sends me anything
| | 05:40 | and what happens when he does with a high priority.
| | 05:44 | Let's get mail and there it is
-- and Mac is not happy about it.
| | 05:53 | So he met the conditions, he sent me a
message, it is from Mac, it's high priority
| | 05:58 | and what happened well I heard the submarine sound
and there is that thing bouncing in the dock,
| | 06:03 | the mail icon is letting me know something really
important is going on and I need to pay attention.
| | 06:08 | So this is a really helpful kind of rule because
if you want to know if the boss is contacting you
| | 06:12 | about a very important work project or some similar dire
circumstance, this is a nice way to let yourself know
| | 06:18 | that I really need to deal with this right away and
all you have do is create a rule to do that for you.
| | 06:23 | Another useful mail rule is for creating a white list,
and a white list is a list of accepted addresses.
| | 06:29 | So anyone not on the list is treated
differently from those who are on the list.
| | 06:33 | Mails rules in lead with Address Book can do
some powerful things based on white list rules.
| | 06:38 | So here's an example, let's say you
are setting up your mother's Mac
| | 06:42 | and you don't want her to be bothered
with a lot of junk mail.
| | 06:45 | So first load her Address Book with all the people she wants
to correspond with and in mail create a folder called Who.
| | 06:52 | We create a new rule and it's a very simple one.
| | 07:07 | Sender is not in my Address Book,
we will move messages to Who.
| | 07:13 | And click OK.
| | 07:15 | Yes we would like you to apply and see what you do.
| | 07:18 | Wow, we will call the people that are not
in my Address Book suddenly all this stuff
| | 07:24 | that is not from a contact shows up in the Who?
| | 07:28 | Mailbox and again maybe mom's going to want to look at
the stuff maybe not, but at least this stuff is sorted out
| | 07:34 | and she knows that her inbox is only going to
have that stuff in it that she really cares about.
| | 07:38 | And we will take everything in the Who?
| | 07:43 | Box and we are going to move it back up.
| | 07:44 | Now one thing to note before I do that is if
mom wants to add someone who appears in the Who?
| | 07:50 | Inbox, she just selects the message, opens it and then she
clicks and holds on the sender's address and chooses Add
| | 07:57 | to Address Book that means this address
will no longer be filtered to the Who?
| | 08:00 | Folder. And we will add this back in.
| | 08:05 | Now you may find that there are times when you want
to do something that rules don't seem to allow.
| | 08:10 | For example, you keep getting a particular kind of spam and
because the From Subject Heading and Message Contents change
| | 08:16 | because spammers are both evil and tricky, you
can't see to find the one thing that the spam has
| | 08:21 | in common in order to create a workable rule.
| | 08:24 | For such situations, you want to dig into message headers
and use information contained within those headers
| | 08:30 | to filter your mail and it works this way.
| | 08:33 | Start by finding an example the kind
of message that you want to filter.
| | 08:37 | Let's say, for now we will Orders Reward and I am not
saying this is spam I am just saying this is a kind
| | 08:43 | of message that you can filter.
| | 08:44 | We will choose View, Message, Long
Headers and we are going to look
| | 08:52 | for a specific entry and that specific
entry is content type.
| | 08:56 | I am going to select that and copy it.
| | 09:00 | So this is something that's buried within the headers
that we are going to try to use to identify messages.
| | 09:06 | I will now create a new mailbox and will call
that mailbox Content Type and I click OK.
| | 09:16 | Preferences, Add Rule now before we
add this rule, let's disable the rule.
| | 09:22 | For example this Who rule.
| | 09:23 | I don't want to filter this stuff out anymore, disable
System9 and we will disable from Russia With Hate
| | 09:29 | and I will leave Mac there in case he emails well I am doing
this, Add Rule and we are going to call that content type.
| | 09:41 | Now what I need to do is go to the bottom of the
From Pop-Up menu and choose Edit Header list.
| | 09:49 | I click plus to add a header type
that my mail will now look for
| | 09:54 | and we must do this exactly, so it
will be Content-Type and click OK.
| | 10:02 | Now from the From menu again we can choose
content type because we just added it.
| | 10:07 | It will automatically take it from the selected message,
| | 10:09 | but we don't want all this nonsense
at the end, so I will paste that in.
| | 10:14 | We are going to move these messages to the content-type
mailbox that we just created and I will click OK.
| | 10:20 | You want to do that, you bet.
| | 10:24 | Close that and let's see what we got.
| | 10:26 | Now we have a bunch of stuff in the content-type and look
it's all that stuff that has that particular content-type
| | 10:32 | and as it turns out a lot of the stuff is advertising.
| | 10:35 | I may want this advertising, maybe I don't and what I have
done is with a simple rule I have filtered it all out,
| | 10:41 | so I have all these messages that now appear
in my content-type, thanks to that rule.
| | 10:46 | And one last thing before we leave rules, you may find a
rule that should work perfectly is doing nothing at all
| | 10:52 | and this is likely because a rule above it in mails
list of rules is acting on your messages in some way
| | 10:58 | so that the rule below it doesn't have a chance to
fire, this is how you deal with that preferences, rules.
| | 11:06 | Let's suppose for example that my content-type rule is
doing something that I would like this Who rule to do,
| | 11:11 | all I have to do is grab this rule and
I just elevate it so that now the Who?
| | 11:14 | Rule is above content type and that one gets priority so
that acts first and then content-type kicks in after that,
| | 11:25 | disable our rules and if you want
this is how you get rid of a rule.
| | 11:29 | Select it, click Remove, Confirm and it's gone.
| | 11:34 | And these are the essential things you
need to know about rules and Apple's Mail.
| | 11:39 | Next step we will look at importing and exporting mail.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing and exporting mail| 00:00 | It's likely that a lot of you have used computers
before and you have accumulated a fair amount of email.
| | 00:05 | It's just as likely that you haven't always used
Apple's Mail application and when you switch
| | 00:10 | to Mail would like to bring your old email with you.
| | 00:13 | In the first part of this lesson
we will look at doing exactly that.
| | 00:16 | Mail makes it pretty easy to get most email,
to do so just choose File, Import Mailboxes.
| | 00:24 | In the Import window that appears choose
the format your mail is currently in.
| | 00:28 | If you have been using something like Entourage, Mozilla
Thunderbird, Eudora or Mail for Mac OS X this is a cinch.
| | 00:36 | Just choose the option you use, click Continue and
Mail will do it's best to find your mail and import it.
| | 00:42 | If you aren't using one of the
applications listed you're not out of luck.
| | 00:46 | That last entry, pronounced "em-box",
is the key to getting your mail.
| | 00:51 | The mbox format is an almost universal
format for archiving email.
| | 00:55 | Just about every email client on earth allows
you to export email as an mbox archive.
| | 01:00 | And what insignificant email client would
dare not to support the mbox format?
| | 01:05 | Why none other than the world's most
popular email client Microsoft's Outlook.
| | 01:10 | Now I am not about to tell you how to run Windows
but if you are coming from a Windows machine
| | 01:14 | and using Outlook you will need to get
your messages from Outlook to Mail.
| | 01:18 | I can't show you how exactly because I am on a Mac.
| | 01:22 | But I can tell you this much and I am going to tell you this
much by going to Safari and entering these words in Google.
| | 01:32 | Mozilla Thunderbird, the free Windows version
of Mozilla Thunderbird which is available
| | 01:39 | from www.mozilla.com/thunderbird, can
directly import messages from Outlook.
| | 01:45 | Once you import those messages you can then
extract these messages into an mbox format.
| | 01:50 | This process is more complicated than I can explain here
plus I am not on the Widows machine so let me just recommend
| | 01:56 | that once you have imported your mail into
Thunderbird you then use Thunderbird's online help
| | 02:01 | and enter the term Export.
| | 02:03 | You will find the instructions in the Thunderbird FAQ.
| | 02:06 | Quit Safari and return to mail.
| | 02:11 | Once you have got an mbox file, just select
that as an option and click Continue.
| | 02:17 | You then navigate to the mbox file you had and I believe
I have one here yes I have archived my tidbits newsletters
| | 02:24 | into an mbox and I did this from Entourage.
| | 02:27 | I click choose and mail imports my mbox file.
| | 02:33 | I click Done and now there is a
new import folder with in mail.
| | 02:38 | Click that select tidbits and sure enough here
are all my tidbits newsletters that I have saved
| | 02:44 | and archived from Entourage and they are now in Mail.
| | 02:49 | Mail can also export mail in mbox
archives and it's really easily done.
| | 02:53 | Let's archive our system9 mailbox.
| | 02:56 | Just select the mailbox you would like to export and choose
archive mailbox from a contextual menu that you arrive
| | 03:03 | at by right-clicking or control-clicking.
| | 03:05 | You will be asked where you would like to save it, we will
put on the desktop so you can see it and click Choose.
| | 03:12 | And there it is here is our mbox file.
| | 03:15 | If later on we choose to we can import that back in so
for example, if you have had mail sitting around older
| | 03:21 | than a year you may want to archive it so that one you don't
have a long, long, long, list of messages that you have
| | 03:27 | to read through and it may speed
up mail somewhat if you do that.
| | 03:31 | Later on if you choose to import it, you know how to
import mail you just go to File Import? you choose mbox
| | 03:37 | and then you will be able to import that stuff it will
appear in an import mailbox and you are good to go.
| | 03:42 | And that sums up importing and exporting messages in Mail.
| | 03:47 | In our final Mail lesson we will look at
tips and tricks you can perform with Mail.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Mail tips| 00:00 | One of the things that Leopard brings to the world
of Mac computing is tighter integration between Mail,
| | 00:05 | Address Book and iCal, and one way it does
that is with something called Data Detectors.
| | 00:11 | Data Detectors are common bits of
date, contact or location information.
| | 00:16 | For example, let me find a message that
has some of this information in it.
| | 00:19 | I know that Max sent me something and he is in content-type.
| | 00:23 | I will search for Max and there he is.
| | 00:27 | Let's look at the date and times message.
| | 00:30 | When a usable bit of data appears in one of these
messages, all you have to do is mouse over it.
| | 00:35 | For example, here is an address.
| | 00:38 | I can click on the downward pointing
arrow and this gives me some options.
| | 00:42 | For example, I could look at the map for this location.
| | 00:45 | So I choose Show Map.
| | 00:48 | My default browser launches and I am taking to
Google Maps and that shows me where that address is.
| | 00:54 | Let's see what other kinds of data are in here.
| | 00:57 | Here's a date.
| | 00:58 | I can now create an iCal event, and all
I have to do is do it right within mail.
| | 01:06 | I don't have to switch right to iCal.
| | 01:07 | I can enter the information here and then when I
click Add to iCal, that information will be added
| | 01:12 | to my iCal calendar and the one that I have chosen here.
| | 01:16 | How about a phone number?
| | 01:19 | I can create a new contact based on this phone number
and that contact will be the sender of this message.
| | 01:25 | I can add it to an existing contact or, and
this is really helpful, I can choose large type.
| | 01:30 | So for example, I have chosen a phone number.
| | 01:31 | My phone is across the room for my
Mac and I need to see this number.
| | 01:35 | This is great.
| | 01:36 | I can just bring this up big on the screen and
then from across the room, I can see the number.
| | 01:41 | And also Live Links, I can click on
them as well and I can open the link.
| | 01:46 | This doesn't appear as a Data Detector kind of item but
it does show you that it can produce a contextual menu
| | 01:51 | from a live link and then be able to do something with it.
| | 01:55 | Here is something else you can do with mail.
| | 01:58 | We are human and we make mistakes, and one of these
mistakes is that we sometimes mistype an address.
| | 02:05 | Compounding this problem is that in the future when
we attempt to send another message to this person,
| | 02:10 | the mistyped address appears in the list of suggestions.
| | 02:14 | And to weed these things out, choose
Window previous recipients.
| | 02:19 | Find the mistyped contact and simply click Remove From List.
| | 02:24 | Also, you can add somebody.
| | 02:25 | So, if you have typed in an address and you don't have
that person in your Address Book, you can use this
| | 02:30 | and then click Add to Address Book
and a contact will be created.
| | 02:34 | People often ask me how to set up an auto reply system
for mail so that when they are away from the office
| | 02:40 | and someone emails them, mail automatically
generates response and replies with it.
| | 02:45 | My usual answer is don't, because it can be
fraught with danger if you don't do it right.
| | 02:50 | You can enrage people who host
mailing list with these auto replies
| | 02:53 | and you can inadvertently alert spammers to your address.
| | 02:57 | With these dangers in mind, here's how to do it safely.
| | 02:59 | Create a rule, go to Preferences, add
rule and we will call that Auto reply.
| | 03:08 | And from the front field, it will be account and
then choose the account you want it to come from.
| | 03:15 | Add another rule that will help sort incoming messages,
for example, plus, sender is in my Address Book.
| | 03:23 | This will help prevent mailing list
from getting these kind of auto replies.
| | 03:26 | But check your Address Book, if a mailing list is in your
Address Book, get it out of there or find some other way
| | 03:31 | to filter it so that you are not
sending back to a mailing list.
| | 03:33 | Now, from the Action part, choose Reply to Message.
| | 03:38 | Click the reply message text button and enter
the text that you would like to have returned
| | 03:42 | when somebody sends you an email, and click OK.
| | 03:55 | Now, when somebody whose message matches
this condition sends you an e-mail message,
| | 03:59 | they will automatically receive this reply, but
that requires that your Mac must be on and connected
| | 04:04 | to the Internet and mail must be up and running.
| | 04:07 | We are not going to send a message like this to anyone, so
I am going to cancel out of this rule and close this window.
| | 04:13 | Now, let's talk about BCC which
stands for Blind Carbon Copy.
| | 04:18 | As you probably know, adding a BCC field
sends a copy of the message to those BCCed
| | 04:23 | without alerting the regular visible
recipients that you have done so.
| | 04:27 | If you are concerned that your mail isn't getting
through, you can automatically BCC yourself.
| | 04:32 | To do so, just open Mail Preferences, click the composing
tab and enable the automatically and by default,
| | 04:39 | it says CC but you can also BCC so others
don't know that you are sending yourself a copy
| | 04:44 | of the message and close that and you are good to go.
| | 04:47 | Whenever you send a message, you will get a copy of it back.
| | 04:50 | This doesn't mean that the person who you
have sent it to has necessarily read it,
| | 04:54 | it just means that you know it's gone through
and it's come back through the system.
| | 04:57 | And we will turn that off because I don't
want to BCC myself and close the window.
| | 05:02 | Do you ever get a message that includes
dozens or even hundreds of recipients?
| | 05:07 | That's an Internet no-no because it's not cool to
reveal the e-mail addresses of all the people you know.
| | 05:12 | What you should do instead is dump all
those addresses into a message as BCC field
| | 05:17 | so that people receiving the message
don't see the names of everyone else.
| | 05:21 | The easiest way to do that is to create
a new message, click the Address button,
| | 05:25 | select the addresses that you want and then click BCC.
| | 05:31 | A BCC field is automatically added to the message.
| | 05:34 | And when someone receives this
message, they won't see these names.
| | 05:37 | Rather they will see what's ever in the To field.
| | 05:39 | If you don't have anything in the To field, it will
say something like message recipient suppressed.
| | 05:45 | The polite thing to do is actually put your own name up
here into the To field and all people will see then is
| | 05:50 | that oh yes, this is something from Chris.
| | 05:52 | While we are on the subject to fields,
the reply to field is also useful.
| | 05:57 | You use this thing when you want to
designate the e-mail address a reply goes to.
| | 06:01 | So for example, you send a message from your home e-mail
account but want the reply to go to your work e-mail.
| | 06:07 | All you have to do is choose View Reply to
Message Field and that's automatically added
| | 06:13 | and will show up in every single message.
| | 06:16 | If you don't want that to show up in every message, you can
choose it from the Popup menu just next to your from name,
| | 06:21 | reply to address field and just temporarily
it will add it to this one message.
| | 06:26 | Then you can type in this other e-mail address
where you would like the reply to go to.
| | 06:31 | And when somebody receives this message, the
recipient's e-mail client will automatically choose
| | 06:35 | that account to send the reply to.
| | 06:38 | Finally, if e-mail just doesn't seem to be working,
| | 06:41 | you are not sure why you can easily check your
e-mail connections with mail's Connection Doctor.
| | 06:45 | Just choose Window, Connection Doctor and mail will ping
the incoming and outgoing servers for your e-mail accounts.
| | 06:53 | It will spell out exactly what's
wrong if it finds a problem.
| | 06:57 | In this case, our example account
doesn't really do anything.
| | 07:00 | So, it's told me that it can't connect to the pop server.
| | 07:03 | Gmail is fine as is .NET.
| | 07:06 | I close this because everything looks good.
| | 07:09 | And that ends our look at the Essentials of Apple's Mail.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. iCalCreating complex iCal events| 00:01 | You know that iCal is all about events and
you know the basics of creating an event.
| | 00:05 | Double-click on a date in any iCal view
and you have a new event, big deal.
| | 00:09 | Now let's look at more powerful ways of creating events.
| | 00:14 | First of all it's kind of a waste of time to double-click
on a date and then enter the name and then double-click
| | 00:21 | on it again in order to get to the editing
window, this is a faster way to do this.
| | 00:26 | You can move to this event so double-click
to create the event and press Cmd+E.
| | 00:32 | Now you are in your new event window.
| | 00:35 | Enter a name and you can start
entering things in these fields.
| | 00:40 | Now I can do this the old fashion way to simply clicking
something and start typing but you can Address Book
| | 00:45 | and some other capabilities to do this little more quickly.
| | 00:48 | I will open Address Book.
| | 00:50 | I will select an address in any one of my Address
Book cards and I drag it to the location area.
| | 01:00 | Now I have an address in location without having to key it
| | 01:03 | in plus I know this is the right address
because it's in an Address Book card.
| | 01:07 | From and To you can also just click in a
field and change it by the use the Tab key.
| | 01:12 | Move around this way, Shift+Tab to go backwards.
| | 01:16 | You find a field you want to change you can
use the up and down arrow keys as I am now.
| | 01:22 | When you get to the calendar entry, currently
I am just using 2 calendars Home and Work
| | 01:27 | but if I had more let's say I have 20 calendars and
that's not unusual you can just type in the first letter
| | 01:31 | of each calendar to quickly navigate
to it so here's W and here's H,
| | 01:37 | here's Z and here's A just by typing a letter that's closed.
| | 01:41 | Now you can also create alarms the old fashioned way.
| | 01:44 | Okay great I want a message with sound to appear
15 minutes before it's going to make this sound.
| | 01:50 | One of the things I would like to
do is send myself an email message.
| | 01:54 | I choose email it sends to whatever account I choose
| | 01:59 | and I decide how soon before the
event I am going to get that email.
| | 02:02 | This is helpful to me because I have an iPhone
I check my email all the time and when I am
| | 02:06 | out of the house I am not going to hear that alarm go off
on my computer but if I send myself an email I will pick it
| | 02:12 | up on my iPhone and then I will be able
to respond to whatever that event is.
| | 02:17 | As for attendees a lot of people think
you need to click in the Attendee's field
| | 02:20 | and then start typing in address but you don't.
| | 02:22 | Go to the Window menu choose Address Panel,
select the people you want to attend your meeting
| | 02:30 | and just drag them in on top of the attendees' link.
| | 02:34 | All the contacts will now be added to the attendees' area.
| | 02:37 | Adding files works much the same way.
| | 02:39 | Go to the Finder I am going to add a couple of music files.
| | 02:43 | So I will go to my iTunes music folder to my album.
| | 02:48 | We will grab the first three files, drag it to attachments.
| | 02:55 | iCal will think about if for a
second and there are my attachments.
| | 02:59 | URL you could enter that by hand
but why bother let's go to Safari.
| | 03:10 | In the Address field just click on the icon
drag it down to URL and you have added your URL.
| | 03:19 | Here's a cute little trick.
| | 03:20 | I am going to go to Google Maps
page and I drag that into the URL.
| | 03:30 | When you do that and people receive your invitation all
they have to do is click on the URL and they will be taken
| | 03:35 | to a Google map that will show them
where the event is taking place.
| | 03:42 | And finally we will look at the note field.
| | 03:45 | If you like you can just click in that
note field and enter the note you like
| | 03:49 | or you can take any selected text that you drag in.
| | 03:53 | It's the document that we can look at.
| | 03:59 | I will select some text, click, drag and there is my text.
| | 04:08 | And your event is ready largely through drag and drop.
| | 04:11 | We will next look at calendar publishing and subscribing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Publishing and subscribing to calendars| 00:00 | Helpful as it is to have your calendar tucked
away on your Mac there are times when you want
| | 00:04 | to let the rest of the world know your schedule.
| | 00:06 | Likewise you may wish to add others' calendars to iCal.
| | 00:10 | You do this by publishing and subscribing
and it works this way.
| | 00:15 | Publishing a calendar is really easy.
| | 00:17 | Just choose a calendar for example, choose the work
calendar here and from the Calendar menu choose Publish.
| | 00:25 | In the sheet that appears you have a couple of options.
| | 00:28 | The first is that you can publish to your MobilMe
account or you can publish to a private server.
| | 00:33 | For now we will look at publishing to our MobilMe account.
| | 00:36 | You have the option to publish various things.
| | 00:38 | You can publish titles and notes.
| | 00:40 | You can publish your To Do items, you can publish
alarms and you can also publish attachments.
| | 00:45 | For now we are simply going to publish titles and notes.
| | 00:49 | To do that just click Publish, the calendar is set off to
MobilMe and now you see you have a couple more options.
| | 00:56 | One is that you can visit the page you can
see the calendar page or you can send mail.
| | 01:00 | Let's do the first we will visit the page
that launches Safari, click month view,
| | 01:07 | and here is our published calendar, quit Safari.
| | 01:11 | We can also send mail, click that and mail will launch.
| | 01:16 | It creates a new message all you have to do is address
it, it tells you where that calendar can be found
| | 01:21 | and then you can send this off to anybody you like.
| | 01:23 | Click Mail and we are back to iCal.
| | 01:26 | Once a calendar has been published because there
is a little icon just to the right of the calendar
| | 01:32 | that let's you know that it's been published.
| | 01:34 | Let's suppose you would like to unpublish this calendar.
| | 01:36 | Easily done.
| | 01:37 | Right click on it and choose Unpublish.
| | 01:41 | Yes I really want to do it, click
Unpublish and it's done the icon is gone.
| | 01:47 | One thing to note about MobilMe calendars is that they
are public, they are not password protected so anybody
| | 01:53 | who knows your MobilMe name can access your calendar so you
want to make sure you don't put things like I am on vacation
| | 01:59 | and leaving my house unprotected for
weeks on end on this calendar for example.
| | 02:04 | Now let's suppose you want to use the private server option.
| | 02:06 | Go to Calendar Publish and choose a private server.
| | 02:11 | Now here you will need the URL for the server you also need
a login name and a password and again you have the same kind
| | 02:17 | of publishing options you can decide what
you want to publish on your calendar.
| | 02:20 | Well what if you don't have a private server?
| | 02:22 | Easily done, we can find one and we
will do that by launching Safari.
| | 02:27 | And we are going to go to a website called
iCalexchange and the URL for that is iCalx.
| | 02:34 | Do this and you can signup for an account and then
you can publish your iCal calendars to iCal exchange
| | 02:44 | and use the information you have been provided by iCal
exchange to enter into the fields that we just saw in iCal.
| | 02:51 | Alright let's look at subscribing now.
| | 02:54 | We would like to subscribe to a calendar to do so.
| | 02:57 | Calendar Subscribe and all you need
at this point is the calendar URL.
| | 03:02 | A lot of websites will provide this information
you enter it here click the Subscribe button
| | 03:07 | and that calendar has brought in.
| | 03:09 | Let's look at an example of calendar.
| | 03:12 | One way to do that is to go to a site called iCalShare.
| | 03:21 | I think I would like to find a
sports teams' calendar so I go
| | 03:25 | into the search field and let's
look for San Francisco Giants.
| | 03:34 | Here they are, San Francisco Giants schedule and you will
see here a subscribe link that says iCal just beneath it.
| | 03:40 | To subscribe to that calendar just
click subscribe and watch what happens.
| | 03:45 | iCal is smart enough to take this kind of link and
automatically put it into that calendar URL field.
| | 03:52 | I click Subscribe.
| | 03:55 | If I choose to I can then change the color.
| | 03:58 | Red seems pretty cherry so I will leave
it right there and I will click OK.
| | 04:02 | Now there is a new subscription entry and
here is the San Francisco Giants Schedule.
| | 04:08 | And you will notice it goes on through the season.
| | 04:12 | Now this is not something that I can change.
| | 04:14 | I can't change any of these events because they are
being posted elsewhere and what if I change my allegiance
| | 04:20 | to a particular baseball team no problem.
| | 04:23 | Right click and delete and the calendar
is gone as well as the subscriptions entry
| | 04:32 | and that's how publishing and subscribing works in iCal.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing and exporting calendars| 00:00 | It's essence to import and export iCal calendars
and events and I'll show you how to do it.
| | 00:07 | We will begin by exporting a calendar.
| | 00:09 | Just select Calendar, choose File, Export, choose a
destination and click Export, and there you have it.
| | 00:19 | Your entire calendar has been exported into a .ics file.
| | 00:23 | You can then send this file to somebody
else or put it on another computer if you
| | 00:26 | like to drag into iCal and it will just work.
| | 00:30 | If you want to export just a single event, select that event
and drag it to desktop, and there you have a single event.
| | 00:37 | You can enclose that in an e-mail message
if you like and you're good to go.
| | 00:42 | Now, let's talk about importing a calendar.
| | 00:44 | To import a calendar, you just do the reverse.
| | 00:47 | You take your calendar, you drag it into the
calendar's area and it's imported just like that.
| | 00:53 | We'll get rid of it.
| | 00:56 | I can click iCal.
| | 00:58 | I can drag it into the iCal icon and
the Add Events dialog box appears.
| | 01:05 | It will then ask you what you would like to do with it.
| | 01:08 | You can put those events into any calendar you like.
| | 01:10 | I can merge them in home, work
or I could create a new calendar.
| | 01:14 | And that's very much like dragging it from the desktop
into the calendar's area and you're good to go.
| | 01:20 | I get rid of this one more time, click iCal.
| | 01:25 | I can also double-click on the Calendar and we see
the same event as if I had dragged it into the doc.
| | 01:32 | Home, Work, New Calendar, there
it is and it has been imported.
| | 01:41 | Simple enough, all you need to know about
importing and exporting iCal calendar.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Expanding iCal| 00:00 | Increasingly people are taking
advantage of Google's calendar service.
| | 00:04 | It's free.
| | 00:05 | You can access your calendars from any web browser
and you can create both public and private calendars.
| | 00:11 | Wouldn't it be great if you could synchronize
your iCal calendars with Google calendars?
| | 00:15 | Well you can and I am going to show you how.
| | 00:17 | First we are going to start with
importing a Google calendar.
| | 00:20 | First thing you want to do is launch
Safari and go to your Google calendar.
| | 00:24 | I bookmarked mine and here is my Google calendar.
| | 00:31 | Click Manage Calendars.
| | 00:34 | Click the link to your calendar and go to down to the
bottom of the window and you will see a couple of options.
| | 00:41 | You will see these buttons here XML, iCal, HTML.
| | 00:45 | The one you want is iCal.
| | 00:46 | Click that and you will receive
the address to your calendar.
| | 00:49 | We are after the public address.
| | 00:51 | This is the top one.
| | 00:52 | The bottom one is the private address.
| | 00:54 | This is for people who you have
allowed to see your private calendar.
| | 00:57 | I have made this a public calendar
so we will choose the upper iCal.
| | 01:01 | I click it and now I have an address
that I can enter into iCal.
| | 01:07 | I select that address, Cmd+C to copy it.
| | 01:12 | Click OK. I will move to iCal, Calendar subscribe.
| | 01:18 | I paste the address in and I press Subscribe
and sure enough here is my Google Calendar.
| | 01:26 | It's been brought in.
| | 01:27 | It's under Subscriptions and I am good to go.
| | 01:30 | I click OK and there are my events.
| | 01:33 | Regrettably this is not a two-way operation.
| | 01:36 | You can subscribe to Google Calendars but your
iCal calendar and Google Calendar aren't in sync
| | 01:42 | as you can't add events to a subscribed calendar.
| | 01:45 | To synchronize iCal in Google you need a third party
application and there are two that I can recommend.
| | 01:52 | The first is BusySync from BusyMac, which you
will find at www.busymac.com and this costs $25.
| | 02:01 | The other option is SpanningSync, which
we will find at www.spanningsync.com.
| | 02:07 | That's $25 a year for subscription
or $65 one time. They work similarly.
| | 02:14 | I am going to show you BusySync as it's less expensive.
| | 02:18 | I have installed it already.
| | 02:20 | You will find it as a preference
pane within System Preferences.
| | 02:24 | There is BusySync here.
| | 02:26 | I click the Google link and I click the Settings button.
| | 02:31 | Here I am asked for my Google login.
| | 02:35 | So this is my Google ID as well as
my Google password and I click OK.
| | 02:44 | Here are my iCal calendars on the left
and my Google calendars are on the right.
| | 02:49 | All I have to do to synchronize is choose the
ones on the left that I want to publish to Google
| | 02:54 | and on the right I can choose the ones
I want to subscribe to from Google.
| | 02:58 | We have already done this kind of the old fashioned way.
| | 03:00 | If you want to automate it you can use BusySync for that.
| | 03:03 | All you have to do at that point is click
Sync now and your calendars are synchronized.
| | 03:08 | That's all there is with BusySync.
| | 03:09 | It's very simple, it's worth having if you want to make your
calendars available to you on the web as well as at home
| | 03:15 | and then be able to synchronize the two together.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Address BookCreating complex contacts| 00:00 | As you're no doubt aware, it's not difficult
to add a new contact to Address Book.
| | 00:05 | Just click the Plus button under the Name column and enter
first name, last name, company and any other information
| | 00:12 | that you feel like answering into the appropriate fields
but you do a few more interesting things in Address Book
| | 00:17 | than that and let's take a look at a few of them now.
| | 00:20 | To begin with you don't have to settle for the
fields that appear by default on a new contact card.
| | 00:25 | To change that just choose card,
add field and then edit template.
| | 00:31 | By clicking on the Add field pop-up menu we can choose
new fields that we would like to appear on every card.
| | 00:36 | In this case let's add URL and we will add birthday.
| | 00:41 | Now in all contact cards these fields will appear.
| | 00:45 | Also these Plus symbols indicate that you can
add additional entries to a particular field.
| | 00:49 | For example, suppose we want to add another
phone field okay we will click the plus button.
| | 00:54 | We will choose another kind of phone and fax for example
| | 00:58 | or let's say I know a lot of people
that live on the water fine.
| | 01:02 | Click and hold on that.
| | 01:03 | Choose Custom and I will make my own custom
label and that will boat phone because so many
| | 01:11 | of my friends have Yachts and use new satellite telephones.
| | 01:14 | Now that we have edited the template we will close it and
let's talk about editing the fields in a current card.
| | 01:21 | Nearly all the fields in an editable contact are draggable.
| | 01:25 | That means you can drag information into it.
| | 01:27 | For example you can drag images into the Pictures area.
| | 01:31 | Let's do just that.
| | 01:32 | I will go to a folder that has images in
it and we will get the blue hound dog.
| | 01:44 | Click Set and now Adam is a dog.
| | 01:47 | You can drag URLs from Safari into the URL area so let's
do that and that's done and you can even drag Events
| | 01:59 | from iCal to be used in the birthday field.
| | 02:02 | Click iCal.
| | 02:04 | Now well it's Adam's birthday on the 15th so we will
select that event and drag it into the Birthday field
| | 02:10 | and when we click the Edit button Adam's
birthday will appear as the date we dragged in.
| | 02:17 | Speaking of birthday is an easy way to add the birthdays
of your contacts to iCal is to enter the birthdays
| | 02:22 | in the appropriate field, open
iCal, open the General Preference
| | 02:26 | and enable the show birthdays calendar
option I will show you what that looks like.
| | 02:32 | Preference is show birthdays calendar and close that
and now we have a new calendar that says Birthdays.
| | 02:40 | All my contacts that have made birthdays now appear in iCal.
| | 02:45 | Now within an existing contact some of these
headings will you show you special information
| | 02:49 | for example I click on Work I can see that in large type.
| | 02:53 | You are across the room.
| | 02:54 | You need to see that phone number.
| | 02:55 | This is easy way to do it.
| | 02:57 | Click other.
| | 02:58 | I can send an email message if I have
an email address in one of these fields.
| | 03:04 | Homepage, I can go to that location that will
launch Safari for me and take me to that location.
| | 03:10 | I can also choose an address field.
| | 03:12 | This one is marked Other.
| | 03:13 | Click on it.
| | 03:14 | Show map of Safari would launch.
| | 03:17 | Show me a Google map page and that map would
appear for this address making it very easy for me
| | 03:22 | to locate the address anytime I would like to.
| | 03:25 | Now before we leave this it's important that
we talk a little bit about the Note field.
| | 03:29 | I am going to do some editing right
here by clicking the Edit button.
| | 03:32 | We are going to add some information to the
Note field and why would you want to do this?
| | 03:36 | You should get into the habit of dropping
identifying bits of information into the Note field
| | 03:40 | so they can more easily search through your contacts so
let's say for example that Adam here is a business contact.
| | 03:49 | I just entered business in the Note field and then later on
if I am searching for business contacts any of my contacts
| | 03:58 | that have business in the Note field will appear on
the list so normally I have 608 cards I have a business
| | 04:06 | and I have 48 contacts that have
that information in the Note field.
| | 04:11 | Again making it very easy to trap down contacts
and that's how you extend contacts in Address Book.
| | 04:17 | In our next lesson we will talk about
importing, exporting and sharing of contacts.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing, exporting, and sharing contacts| 00:00 | Just as you need to be able to archive your email and
move calendar data around so too do you need to import,
| | 00:07 | export and share your contacts and here is how you do it.
| | 00:11 | Address Book supports something called a vCard standard.
| | 00:14 | This is a standard created for sharing contacts
between devices and applications regardless
| | 00:19 | of the manufacturer or computer platform.
| | 00:22 | vCards are generally your method for moving context around
but Address Book also supports some other standards.
| | 00:28 | To import addresses you simply drag a vCard into Address
Book and it will be added, let's see what that looks like.
| | 00:35 | Open up Documents folder look we
have an Address Book card right here.
| | 00:39 | This is a vCard I just drag it in to the Name
field, click Add and there is our contact.
| | 00:46 | Or you can choose File, Import vCards and then
navigate to where we have contacts stored.
| | 00:56 | You notice that within import there are some
other options let's take a look at those now.
| | 01:00 | vCard we just talked about.
| | 01:02 | LDIF is a format used by certain kinds of
servers to store data in a text format.
| | 01:08 | Text file refers to address stored in
tab delimited or comma separated formats.
| | 01:13 | Contacts in these formats usually
originate in databases but can also come
| | 01:17 | from something like an Excel spreadsheet for example.
| | 01:20 | And an Address Book archive is one of Address Books
options for exporting its data as a single file.
| | 01:26 | You would use this if you have saved a backup with your
Address Book and wanted to restore from that backup
| | 01:32 | and I will show you how to do that in just a bit.
| | 01:35 | Exporting is just as easy.
| | 01:37 | You can export individual contacts
by dragging them to the desktop,
| | 01:41 | so we will take an Adam here and drag him to the desktop.
| | 01:44 | He is now an individual contact.
| | 01:46 | You can also export multiple contacts by selecting them.
| | 01:52 | Dragging them as a whole to the desktop and you
see that you have the name of the first contact
| | 01:58 | and then the number of additional contacts in that vCard.
| | 02:01 | I can select All, choose Export and Export vCard.
| | 02:10 | This will take all my contacts and export
it as a single vCard and here it is
| | 02:18 | on the desktop and that has all 609 contacts in it.
| | 02:22 | We return to Address Book.
| | 02:24 | You can also choose what's going to
appear in that vCard when you export it.
| | 02:29 | We go to Preferences and click vCard and you will
see you have the option to export photos in vCard,
| | 02:34 | export notes and we will talk about
this enable private vCard in a minute.
| | 02:39 | Note although you can export notes and photos not all
applications support that so you may try to export photos
| | 02:46 | and import it into another application
or onto another device
| | 02:50 | and the device will say I am sorry I just don't
know how to do this and it will just ignore them.
| | 02:53 | You will take the rest of the information
but it won't display that information.
| | 02:58 | I said you could important an Address Book archive.
| | 03:00 | The File/Export command is where
you create one of these things.
| | 03:05 | File, Export, Address Book Archive and then you
just simply prompt it for a location for this thing.
| | 03:11 | Not only does it export all your contacts but it
preserves your groups and smart groups making it possible
| | 03:17 | to restore your data to the condition
it was in when you exported it.
| | 03:21 | It is a good idea to do this every so often because
sometimes your Address Book archive can become corrupted.
| | 03:27 | Now let's talk about sharing Leopard's
version of Address Book allows .Mac members
| | 03:32 | to share their contacts with other .Mac members.
| | 03:35 | To share go to Preferences and then to Sharing,
enable share your Address Book click the Plus button
| | 03:46 | and a sheet appears listing all your contacts and groups.
| | 03:49 | Note that you can only add those that have .Mac accounts.
| | 03:53 | The sharing is only for .Mac so it's a good idea to
create a group that only has .Mac addresses in it.
| | 03:59 | And in our next lesson where I talk about
Smart Groups I will show you how to do that.
| | 04:04 | Now on the recipient end if somebody wants to subscribe
| | 04:06 | to your Address Book they just choose
File Subscribe to Address Book.
| | 04:11 | In the sheet that appears enter the .Mac email address for
the person whose Address Book you want to subscribe to.
| | 04:16 | This won't work if that person hasn't explicitly allowed
you to share their Address Book and also it's nice
| | 04:23 | to share your own vCard with others so that they have
your contact info but you may not want to share all of it.
| | 04:30 | To share just the information you want go to
Preferences vCard and now Enable Private meCard.
| | 04:40 | Under Card choose Go To My Card, click Edit and then
disable any one of the fields that you don't want to appear
| | 04:49 | when you send your vCard to someone for example maybe I
don't want somebody to know my birthday or my home page
| | 04:56 | or maybe my home address maybe I will leave my
business address instead and we will get out of Edit
| | 05:02 | and that concludes importing/exporting and sharing contacts.
| | 05:06 | In the next lesson we talk about Groups and Smart Groups.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing with Groups and Smart Groups| 00:00 | If you are the outgoing type or your business
relies on you interacting with a lot of people,
| | 00:05 | you are going to accumulate a lot of contacts, and
when you do, you are going to need to find ways
| | 00:09 | to organize those contacts so that you don't wind up with
the equivalent the huge Rolodex, something you have to page
| | 00:15 | through just to dig up a few contacts you want.
| | 00:18 | Instead, you want to try to find a common theme
for individuals and organize them into groups.
| | 00:23 | This can be done manually as well as automatically.
| | 00:25 | We'll look at strategies for doing both.
| | 00:27 | Before we get there, keep this in mind.
| | 00:29 | Creating groups is important.
| | 00:31 | It's one of the criteria you can
use for filtering your e-mail.
| | 00:35 | The more organized your Address Book is, the
more automatically organized mail can be.
| | 00:40 | Now, we have covered the basics of
group in Leopard Essential Training,
| | 00:43 | so we won't retread all that ground here.
| | 00:46 | The old fashioned way to create group is to
simply click the + button under the group,
| | 00:51 | call your group something and then drag contacts into it.
| | 01:01 | A slightly faster way to do this is to command-click some
individuals and then choose File, New Group from selection.
| | 01:17 | Smarter is to gather together contacts by
filtering them first with a search field.
| | 01:22 | For example, let's say I want to find everybody
I know that has a prodigy e-mail address.
| | 01:27 | To do that, I select All and a prodigy and here I have
everyone in my Address Book that has a prodigy address.
| | 01:38 | At that point, I can select All, New Group from selection
or if I wanted to, I could create a smart group just
| | 01:48 | by performing that search and then choosing
New, Smart Group from current search
| | 01:53 | and that shows me the search term right here, prodigy.
| | 01:57 | Early, I suggested that you can add information to
the note field and this would prove to be helpful.
| | 02:03 | This is where that pays off.
| | 02:04 | You can use the search field to look for something
in the notes area and then quickly create a group
| | 02:09 | by selecting all the results and
choosing New Group from selection.
| | 02:13 | So in the past, we had a business.
| | 02:17 | There is everyone in my Address
Book that has that business note.
| | 02:21 | I select them all, New Group from selection.
| | 02:29 | You also want to create groups with e-mail in line.
| | 02:31 | For example, I have created a group that
just has the members of my band in it.
| | 02:36 | If a gig comes up and I need to let the band
know about it, I can address a single message
| | 02:41 | to system 9 rather than add each member's name.
| | 02:45 | Also, it's not a bad idea to create a group for
bunches of contacts that you are likely add over time.
| | 02:51 | For example, a PR group, is you
routinely receive press releases as I do.
| | 02:57 | Click here PR.
| | 02:58 | Now, for now, I don't have anything in that group, but later
on, as I receive e-mail from people from PR representatives,
| | 03:06 | I will add them and then I can drag them into this
group so that I can quickly sort may mail later knowing
| | 03:12 | that I am going to get press release from this individual.
| | 03:14 | Here is one of the cute contact tricks.
| | 03:18 | Select a contact and press the Option key.
| | 03:22 | All groups that include that contact will be highlighted.
| | 03:27 | Now, we also touched on smart groups in the Essential title.
| | 03:30 | Here is some more on that subject.
| | 03:32 | I just mentioned using the search field to find
related contacts and then creating a group around them.
| | 03:38 | A smart group does this sort of thing automatically.
| | 03:41 | So, if you want to find everyone within a certain area code
for example, and let's try that, File, New Smart Group,
| | 03:50 | we'll call this 415 area code, phone contains 415
and to eliminate the possibility that 415 is going
| | 04:05 | to be embedded somewhere inside the phone,
we will add the hyphen and click OK.
| | 04:11 | And we find that we have two contacts
with the 415 area code.
| | 04:16 | Also, if you are syncing a phone or something like a palm
device to Address Book, it makes all the sense in the world
| | 04:21 | to create a smart group that includes only those contacts
that have phone numbers as contacts without phone numbers
| | 04:27 | that don't do you a whole lot of good on many phones.
| | 04:30 | So, we will select it All, New Smart Group with phone.
| | 04:40 | Phone is set.
| | 04:44 | Click OK, and then all of our contacts
that have a phone number listed
| | 04:49 | in their contact information appear within that group.
| | 04:53 | Then it makes sense to sync these people to my device.
| | 04:56 | If you want to narrow that down a little bit
more, right-click and choose Edit Smart Group,
| | 05:03 | add a condition and include e-mail is set and click OK.
| | 05:14 | Now, we have narrowed down some people in the smart group.
| | 05:17 | This makes sense if you have something like an
iPhone for example, that can take advantage not only
| | 05:21 | of phone numbers but also e-mail addresses.
| | 05:24 | Also, I am keen on using a smart group to find
everyone in my Address Book with a .Mac account.
| | 05:30 | Let's do that and then I will tell
you why this is important.
| | 05:33 | New Smart Group and we will call this
.Mac, e-mail contains at Mac.com.
| | 05:48 | Click OK and here are the people
that have .Mac e-mail addresses.
| | 05:53 | Now, why is this important?
| | 05:55 | Well, when a contact is a .Mac account, you
can click on the heading next to that account
| | 06:01 | and you see that you have certain options.
| | 06:03 | The one that I care about is Open iDisk.
| | 06:06 | A lot of times, people take stuff that they want to
share with the public and they put it in their iDisk.
| | 06:11 | If you know somebody's .Mac account,
you can explore their iDisk.
| | 06:14 | However, if they protected their iDisks so that not just
anybody can come in and you don't know the password,
| | 06:19 | of course you can't look inside there, but
a lot of people leave these things open.
| | 06:23 | Also, if you care to, you can visit that person's
homepage and that's one of the advantages
| | 06:28 | of being able to separate out .Mac accounts like this.
| | 06:30 | And finally, note that while smart groups are dynamically
populated, they are just as exportable as any other group.
| | 06:37 | Just drag one of these or any other
group to the desktop to create a vCard.
| | 06:41 | We will do that for our .Mac folks and there they are.
| | 06:46 | All the contacts that have a .Mac e-mail address
are now in the single vCard and if you like,
| | 06:51 | you can also gain together groups into a single vCard.
| | 06:54 | Just Control-click on the groups
and drag those to the desktop
| | 07:01 | and those groups are all combined into a single vCard.
| | 07:05 | And now, you know all you need to
know about groups within Address Book.
| | 07:10 | Next, we will look at Address Book and printing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing from your Address Book| 00:00 | Normally, I don't spend a lot of time on the Print Dialog
Box with a single application but this dialog box is
| | 00:06 | where some of Address Book's hidden powers lie.
| | 00:08 | And by hidden powers, I do mean printing
labels, Address Book pages envelopes and lists.
| | 00:14 | To see how this works, select a group as we
have with our business to ungroup press Cmd+P.
| | 00:20 | In the print dialog box, check out the Style Popup menu.
| | 00:24 | Here, you see options for printing Mailing
Labels, Envelopes, Lists and Pocket Address Book.
| | 00:30 | Under Mailing Labels, the important area to look is Layout.
| | 00:34 | Under Page, you see that you can choose
from a variety of label manufacturers.
| | 00:38 | Avery is the most popular in the US.
| | 00:41 | Also, there is Dymo.
| | 00:43 | We choose Avery Standard.
| | 00:45 | You can choose from a number of different
templates, just choose a different catalog number
| | 00:49 | and the preview will change in the pane to the left.
| | 00:58 | Now, let's look at Envelopes.
| | 01:00 | Here is our envelope style.
| | 01:02 | One thing you can do here is print
the company name if you like.
| | 01:07 | We will do it of me and over here in preview, you
will see that changed to include Macworld.com.
| | 01:15 | You can turn that off and the company name is gone.
| | 01:20 | Now, choose Lists.
| | 01:22 | And here is a list of all the contacts in
that group that you can then print out.
| | 01:26 | You can decide what's going to go on that list
simply by enabling some of these options here.
| | 01:31 | So we are going to print the e-mail address, the physical
address, the company if one exists and we have lots
| | 01:39 | and lots of other options including birth date if you like.
| | 01:42 | And now, we look at Pocket Address Book.
| | 01:44 | You have two styles here.
| | 01:46 | You have the Indexed Flip Style and
you have the Compact Flip Style.
| | 01:52 | Use whichever fits your Pocket Address Book style.
| | 01:55 | Note that when you choose to print this way, last names
will appear first and then the first names will appear.
| | 02:02 | And that's the inside look at the
Print Dialog Box in Address Book.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. SafariDoing more with Bookmarks| 00:01 | You are likely comfortable getting
around the web with Safari.
| | 00:03 | In this section we will talk about
some refinements you could use
| | 00:06 | to make your browsing more productive and enjoyable.
| | 00:08 | We will start with some bookmark tricks.
| | 00:11 | Now at heart I am a lazy person and because I am I
like to get things done with as few steps as possible.
| | 00:17 | Here is how to config your Safari
so that it can do its part.
| | 00:21 | Access the Bookmark browsing window
by clicking the Bookmarks icon.
| | 00:25 | In the window that appears create a new folder
by clicking the Plus button below Collections.
| | 00:31 | Call it something like Morning Bookmarks.
| | 00:33 | Next find bookmarks that you would like
to open automatically in the morning.
| | 00:38 | Bookmark Menu, Control click on these to select some
| | 00:42 | and then option drag them into
this folder that you just created.
| | 00:49 | Drag the folder into the bookmarks bar.
| | 00:53 | Now click bookmarks bar.
| | 00:55 | Find that folder and enable the Auto Click option.
| | 00:59 | We will click out of the browser and watch what
happens when I click that Morning Bookmarks entry.
| | 01:06 | All those pages open up in separate tabs and I call this
Morning Bookmarks because they are certain sites that I want
| | 01:12 | to visit every morning as soon as I launch my Mac.
| | 01:15 | As soon as I started my Mac and this is an easy way
it's the lazy person's way if you will to do this.
| | 01:21 | Here is another trick.
| | 01:23 | You have noticed that Address Book makes its presence known
in other Apple applications and Safari is no exception.
| | 01:28 | Open Safari preferences and click the Bookmarks tab.
| | 01:32 | Enable Include Address Book and close Preferences.
| | 01:37 | When you do this you see a new Address Book entry.
| | 01:40 | Click on it and you will see that
all the contacts in Address Book
| | 01:44 | that have websites are now listed
in this Address Book entry.
| | 01:49 | This is a nice way to answer that
question, gee what was John's website again?
| | 01:55 | As long as that website entry is in John's contact
you can then access it easily from within Safari.
| | 02:01 | Safari is capable of using bits of JavaScript
called Bookmarklets to perform certain chores.
| | 02:07 | You save these bookmarklets as bookmarks
and then run them to perform that chore.
| | 02:11 | For example, let's look at a JavaScript
that I have already created.
| | 02:14 | I go in the bookmark browser.
| | 02:16 | I look at Google recent and here is my JavaScript
document.url and then a bunch of other stuff.
| | 02:23 | Let's see what this does.
| | 02:24 | I will perform a Google search under my name
and here is the normal Google page for me.
| | 02:37 | This time let's try our Google bookmarklet, which I
put here in the address bar, called Google Recent.
| | 02:44 | I clicked that.
| | 02:46 | It opens a new page and what this does is
it now organizes by most recent hit anything
| | 02:51 | that mentions me most recently
appears at the top of the list.
| | 02:55 | You can do this kind of thing for any sort of search.
| | 02:58 | Note that JavaScript must be enabled within the
security preference for these things to work.
| | 03:02 | Now JavaScript isn't only for this sort of thing
rather than you can use it for lots and lots of things.
| | 03:08 | I can't show you all the bookmarklets that are possible
but if you perform a Google search and use bookmarklet
| | 03:14 | as a search tool you are going to find a lot of useful
things that you can do with JavaScript inside Safari
| | 03:20 | and those are a few basic bookmark tricks.
| | 03:22 | Next we are going to look at ways
to cover your tracks in Safari.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Covering your tracks| 00:00 | One of the great things about Safari is
that it keeps track of where you have been.
| | 00:04 | That's allowing cached pages to load more
quickly, passwords to be stored in cookies
| | 00:08 | and an easily retraceable path is provided to be at the
History menu but there are times when you don't want Safari
| | 00:15 | to keep track, for example when you are sitting at
someone else's computer conducting confidential work
| | 00:20 | and this could be as innocent as hiding any traces of online
shopping you have done for your husbands upcoming birthday.
| | 00:25 | We will now look at how you can cover your tracks.
| | 00:27 | First it's helpful to know where those tracks are.
| | 00:31 | Let's first start with the History menu.
| | 00:34 | This menu shows the places you
visited going back a very long time.
| | 00:38 | You can quickly make that list of visit
disappear by going to the end of the menu
| | 00:43 | and choosing their history and then there is Auto Fill.
| | 00:47 | When you start typing an address into
Safari's address field that we will do
| | 00:50 | that now a helpful list of suggestions appears.
| | 00:55 | These are stored auto fill entries.
| | 00:57 | There are times when you don't want these to appear.
| | 00:59 | To clear them you have a couple of options.
| | 01:02 | Safari keeps track of auto filled
items particularly to a certain site.
| | 01:06 | For example, your Google search terms are stored by Safari.
| | 01:10 | When you return to Google and look for
something you have already searched
| | 01:13 | for when you begin typing Auto Fill will offer
suggestions for those previously searched four items.
| | 01:19 | To clear these site specific Auto Fills go to the Auto
Fill preference within Safari, click the edit button next
| | 01:27 | to other forms, select the sites that you would
like to clear Auto Fills from for example,
| | 01:31 | if I wanted to use Google I would select that
and then I would click the Remove button.
| | 01:36 | Those auto fill entries will be removed and
Remove All does this for all listed sites.
| | 01:45 | But suppose you want to get rid of all Auto Fill
entries the ones that appear in Safari's address field.
| | 01:50 | This is an all or nothing or fair.
| | 01:52 | You choose Safari, empty cache and those auto fills
should be gone but honestly they are not always.
| | 02:00 | Note that when you do that some pages you
visited before will take longer to load
| | 02:04 | because they are no longer cached and then there is Google.
| | 02:07 | Click the magnifying glass next to the Safari
search field and choose Clear Recent Searches.
| | 02:14 | Now you can perform a far more stern cleaning
by choosing Reset Safari from the Safari menu.
| | 02:21 | When you do you see you have a
host of things you can clear out.
| | 02:25 | Some such as clearing other auto fills entries,
emptying the cache, clearing the history
| | 02:30 | and clearing Google searches you already know how to do.
| | 02:34 | You can also kill the contents of the downloads window.
| | 02:37 | You can remove save names and passwords.
| | 02:40 | I am not sure that's a great idea but if you really
need to cover your tracks that's another option
| | 02:45 | and you can remove cookies and cookies are little markers
that websites leave so that when you return they know
| | 02:51 | who you are and they can help load a customize page for you.
| | 02:54 | If you select all these things and hit Reset your
tracks should be pretty well covered but honestly
| | 03:02 | if you think ahead you needn't to do any of things
simply by choosing private browsing from the Safari Menu.
| | 03:10 | This option ensures that you don't
leave tracks in the first place.
| | 03:13 | You are asked if you are sure you want to turn this on,
| | 03:16 | click OK and from then on you will
leave no tracks when using Safari.
| | 03:20 | Now that you know how to cover your tracks the
lesson talks about working locally with Safari.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working locally| 00:00 | Safari like other browsers is capable of
working with files stored on your computer.
| | 00:05 | It can play movies, display pictures,
even open folders, and here is how.
| | 00:10 | Certain kind of files, photos for example
will open in Safari if you simply drag them
| | 00:15 | to the Safari icon in the dock and let's give that a try.
| | 00:21 | Folder, use a JPEG image and we can drag that to
the Safari icon at the dock and there is our image.
| | 00:30 | Other files such as movies and audio files
must be dragged directly into a Safari window
| | 00:35 | so that they can take advantage of the
QuickTime plug-in that plays media files.
| | 00:40 | And back we go to our folder and this time
we drag in an audio file, and it plays.
| | 00:53 | Once files have been brought into Safari,
they can be bookmarked just like a website.
| | 00:58 | So if you drag in a movie or a song, you can simply
create a bookmark for it and we will do that right now.
| | 01:05 | Add bookmark.
| | 01:06 | We will put this in the bookmarks
bar, click Add and there is our file.
| | 01:11 | We will go somewhere else for now.
| | 01:16 | And when we want to play our file, we just click it.
| | 01:25 | Note that the file must remain in the
location it was in when you bookmarked it
| | 01:29 | as the address is a strict path to the file.
| | 01:32 | Now, while it's true that not all files will open in
Safari, for example Microsoft Word and Excel files,
| | 01:38 | Safari can open PDF files and do interesting things
within like show two-page spreads and zoom in and out.
| | 01:45 | And as you may remember, you can create PDF
files by choosing Print in any application
| | 01:51 | and then selecting Save As PDF from the PDF menu.
| | 01:55 | Let's take a look at one of those.
| | 02:02 | And here we have a PDF file right here.
| | 02:05 | I will drag it up into the address
field and there is our PDF file.
| | 02:13 | Now, if I right-click on it, I have a number of options.
| | 02:16 | I can zoom in and zoom out.
| | 02:19 | I can show the actual size.
| | 02:21 | I can also change how the pages are displayed.
| | 02:26 | It can be a single page, it can be a single page
continuous, two pages and then two pages continuous
| | 02:37 | and I can just scroll through my
document like that, so not a bad PDF view.
| | 02:43 | You can even use Safari as a launcher.
| | 02:46 | Using this protocol, file:/// and then the path
name, you can create a path to a local file.
| | 02:54 | And let's try that with our Downloads
folder and there is our Downloads folder.
| | 03:04 | Now, I will drag that to the bookmarks
bar, name it Downloads and click OK.
| | 03:12 | Now, within Safari, when I want to open my Downloads folder,
I just click the Bookmark and there is my Downloads folder.
| | 03:18 | Finally, you can even mount a volume on your local network
by entering something like AFP:// and then the address
| | 03:27 | to that volume, and let's do that now, and hit Return
| | 03:37 | and there is my laptop's drive ready
for me to access all from within Safari.
| | 03:45 | And now, you know how to work with local files in Safari.
| | 03:49 | In our next lesson, we will look at
Safari Add-Ons that you will find helpful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Expanding Safari with Saft and PithHelmet| 00:00 | Safari is a very good web browser
but there are ways to enhance it both
| | 00:04 | through a somewhat hidden feature
as well as add on utilities.
| | 00:07 | We will start with that somewhat hidden feature.
| | 00:10 | Go to the Safari Menu, choose Preferences.
| | 00:13 | Go to Advanced and enable the Show Develop Menu in Menu Bar.
| | 00:18 | Close that.
| | 00:20 | We will click on Develop.
| | 00:21 | Although there is a lot of kind of geekish stuff in here
the one we are going to focus on is the user agent command.
| | 00:27 | When Safari visits a website it identifies
itself to that website as being Safari.
| | 00:32 | This isn't something you want if the site
is constructed to work only with something
| | 00:36 | like Internet Explorer, which I
grant you is poor web design.
| | 00:40 | Using this command you can ask Safari to impersonate
a different web browser which may allow you
| | 00:45 | to visit otherwise incompatible websites.
| | 00:48 | So for example if your banking site won't let you in you can
user agent and then choose Internet Explorer 7 for example
| | 00:55 | and maybe you will be lucky and be let in.
| | 00:59 | There is another option.
| | 01:00 | If a site isn't opening because it doesn't
like Safari and you have another web browser
| | 01:04 | such as Firefox installed you can use the
Open Page With command to open that page
| | 01:09 | with another web browser installed on your computer.
| | 01:12 | If you are overwhelmed by the amount of flashing
content that greets your eyes when you attempt
| | 01:17 | to surf the web you will be well served to
use an application such as PithHelmet or Saft.
| | 01:23 | These utilities among other things let you filter images,
| | 01:27 | animation and give you a modicum
of control over web cookies.
| | 01:30 | We will start with PithHelmet.
| | 01:33 | We will go to downloads folder.
| | 01:36 | We find PithHelmet and we will install it.
| | 01:41 | PithHelmet is almost entirely about image blocking although
it includes an option for turning the Debug Menu on or off.
| | 01:47 | This is a tricky area because websites
make their money from ads
| | 01:51 | and if you don't see those ads they don't
count and the site doesn't get paid.
| | 01:55 | If enough people do this the websites
could go out of business.
| | 01:58 | However PithHelmet lets you see the ads but
still strip out their most obnoxious elements
| | 02:03 | for example you can choose Animate Images and select once.
| | 02:07 | That way you see the ad but it doesn't constantly
blink at you and now we look at the PithHelmet Menu.
| | 02:13 | Here is PithHelmet.
| | 02:15 | You can reload sites unfiltered so if
something is being blocked that you want
| | 02:18 | to see simply do Reload Unfiltered
and you will see all the content.
| | 02:26 | You will notice on this particular page
that the moving items are not being blocked.
| | 02:30 | That's because a flash plug-in
is controlling that animation.
| | 02:33 | We can turn that off.
| | 02:35 | Choose block all plug-ins, refresh
the page and that content is gone.
| | 02:46 | Also within PithHelmet you can control cookies
so you could purge your session cookies
| | 02:50 | or you can purge cookies just from that particular site.
| | 02:55 | If you go into Safari's Preferences you will now
see a new preference and that will be for PithHelmet
| | 03:02 | and in here you can enable filtering
or you can turn it off if you like.
| | 03:06 | They have an ad blocking level so block some, block
most it's up to you to decide if it's blocking too much
| | 03:12 | so that blocks images you really want to see
or not and again you see the Enable Debug Menu.
| | 03:18 | This is really for an older version of Safari.
| | 03:21 | We now have the Develop Menu option
that's within Safari's Advance preference.
| | 03:24 | We will flip that off and it doesn't really make any
difference at all and we will close that and now it's time
| | 03:31 | to turn to Saft and we will install that as well.
| | 03:39 | Here is my Saft installer.
| | 03:41 | All we have to do is throw this
into the Applications folder.
| | 03:46 | We will quit Safari, open Applications,
find Saft and double click it to install it.
| | 04:04 | You want to install this input manager plug-in
because that's the way it really works.
| | 04:14 | Close the windows and now we can close the
PithHelmet installer and we will launch Safari again.
| | 04:24 | Now let's click on the Safari Menu
and watch what's happened.
| | 04:27 | There are lots of new items in here.
| | 04:30 | In the past we had blocked pop-up windows but now we
have blocked ad banners, blocked images and plug-ins
| | 04:35 | and much like PithHelmet we now
have the option to block plug-ins
| | 04:40 | or we can simply block images and
block animation if you want.
| | 04:44 | We will now go to Safari Preferences
and now we have a couple of options.
| | 04:53 | First thing I am going to do is go back
to PithHelmet I am going to turn it off.
| | 04:59 | Now we go to Saft.
| | 05:01 | Saft has a number of option set.
| | 05:03 | The first is ad blocking.
| | 05:04 | Here you can add ad text if you like
so if you find a particular kind of ad
| | 05:08 | that you find obnoxious you can add it here by
clicking Add and then entering a wildcard for example
| | 05:14 | and then the keyword you are looking for.
| | 05:16 | There is also a Shortcuts tab.
| | 05:18 | What this allows you to do is to create
a shortcut to launch certain websites.
| | 05:22 | For example, we have got here iArtist.
| | 05:25 | This will automatically launch iTunes when you
type that short bit of text into the address field,
| | 05:31 | miscellaneous tab you can make sure
that Auto Complete is always on,
| | 05:36 | enable control drag, a number of options are in here.
| | 05:40 | Tabs you can always open your browser window in tab view.
| | 05:43 | I like this a lot.
| | 05:44 | I like using tabs and it's nice to have that there
at all times and using full screen you can show
| | 05:50 | and hide certain elements of the Safari interface.
| | 05:54 | The last option is Kiosk and honestly unless
you are running a Kiosk somewhere don't touch it
| | 05:59 | and he is very careful to say that.
| | 06:01 | Do not enable this for a normal use and please don't.
| | 06:07 | Saft costs $12 and in addition allowing you to do things
like those keyboard shortcuts for websites you often use.
| | 06:13 | You can also search your bookmarks
within the bookmarks browser.
| | 06:17 | Saft's features are so well integrated that after using
it for a while you may forget what Apple originally put in
| | 06:23 | and what Saft has added to the browser and
that's why I look at some helpful Safari add-ons.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. The Utilities FolderMonitoring your computer with Activity Monitor| 00:01 | We will now begin our exploration
of activity monitor which is program
| | 00:04 | that as its main hints tells you what is occupying
your Mac's time and to what degree it's doing so,
| | 00:11 | and you will find it in the Utilities folder.
| | 00:13 | So we go to the Go menu, choose Utilities or
the keyboard shortcut for this is Shift+Cmd+U.
| | 00:20 | We open the Utilities folder and there
is activity monitor right at the top.
| | 00:24 | So why would you run this thing?
| | 00:25 | If your Mac seems slow, you can use activity
monitor to find out what's taking up its attention.
| | 00:31 | This may allow you to stop the Mac from doing whatever
it's doing or tell you that such and such application,
| | 00:37 | maybe such a processor hog, then it might
be time to search for an alternative.
| | 00:42 | Activity monitor is made up of two main parts.
| | 00:44 | At the bottom, you see five tabs
for various kinds of activity.
| | 00:48 | And at the top is a long list of processes,
the things that your Mac is doing.
| | 00:53 | It's amazing how much stuff is going on, isn't it?
| | 00:55 | Well, let's start at the top.
| | 00:57 | You can sort these processes by process name.
| | 01:00 | We know who the user is because
we have My Processes selected.
| | 01:04 | The amount of attention that the CPU has
devoted to a particular process, memory threats,
| | 01:09 | the real memory that's being devoted to this process, the
virtual memory that's being devoted toward it and the kind,
| | 01:14 | we are using an Intel Mac but we still
have an older copy of Photoshop on here
| | 01:20 | and it's running under PowerPC using Rosetta.
| | 01:23 | Now, if you have something that's really slowing
down your Mac, my first suggestion would be
| | 01:28 | under this Popup menu at the top
to choose Windowed Processes.
| | 01:33 | This shows you the currently running visible
applications and what they demand on your Mac.
| | 01:38 | So, if you see something here for example CPU,
we have been running a DVD in the background.
| | 01:43 | It's taking up 19.4% of the CPU.
| | 01:46 | That's not a big deal.
| | 01:47 | However, you have got an application that was
running in the 80%, 90%, even 100% consistently
| | 01:54 | and your Mac is behaving very poorly, this is an
application to take a look at and say "you know, maybe,
| | 01:59 | I don't want to be doing that right now because I need my
Mac for the things or maybe I can find another application
| | 02:04 | that does the same kind of thing that
doesn't hit my CPU quite so hard."
| | 02:08 | If that doesn't tell you much, try My Processes.
| | 02:12 | This shows you all the processes that are running
under your account, both visible and invisible.
| | 02:17 | Now, some of these may make no sense to it at all but the
names of some of the invisible ones can give you a clue.
| | 02:22 | For example, there may be a program that requires
a helper application that runs in the background.
| | 02:27 | If you can identify that helper
application, you might reconsider using
| | 02:31 | that particular application as it's a processor hog.
| | 02:35 | You can also group these things by hierarchy.
| | 02:37 | Again, some of these may not make sense to you.
| | 02:39 | For example, launchd, what does that mean?
| | 02:41 | Well, it's a kind of a root process and now we are
looking at processes for everything on the computer,
| | 02:46 | not just within your account but we have
some root activities here that are running.
| | 02:50 | You can't do much about these things because the Mac really,
really, really needs these processes to run so you can look
| | 02:56 | at it kind of out of a curiosity and say "Oh gee, that
seems to be taking up a lot of the processor's time,"
| | 03:01 | not much I can do here, but every so often, you may
see a process that's gone completely out of whack
| | 03:07 | which means something may be going on with
your Mac that isn't so great and it may be
| | 03:11 | at that point that you start troubleshooting your Mac.
| | 03:13 | Let's go back to My Processes.
| | 03:16 | Now, it's helpful to sort your processes.
| | 03:18 | The best way to do it in my opinion is to choose by CPU.
| | 03:22 | The reason you do that is because you can see exactly
what's taking up your processor's time and that's
| | 03:27 | where you are going to see some slowdowns on your Mac.
| | 03:30 | This may not tell you what's happening however.
| | 03:32 | Your Mac's hard drive, maybe busy or it could
be too full, but it's a good place to start.
| | 03:37 | Now, let's suppose that you have a process.
| | 03:39 | Let's say you have a bunch of time and you
say "I have got to get rid of this thing,"
| | 03:42 | and you can safely do it not putting
your root process but one of your own.
| | 03:45 | Let's choose DVD player for example.
| | 03:47 | I can click Quit Process to make this thing quit.
| | 03:51 | You have three options in this sheet.
| | 03:53 | One is Cancel so you can reconsider saying "No,
you know actually I don't want to do that."
| | 03:57 | Quit is the one you should choose first.
| | 03:59 | That will gracefully ask the application or
the process to quit and it will try to do so.
| | 04:05 | If it can't do so, if it's totally locked up, what
you may see is that the process name will be in red.
| | 04:13 | This indicates it's locked up, it's not going
to respond politely to your request to quit.
| | 04:18 | So instead, you would click Force Quit and that
makes the process quit whether it likes it or not.
| | 04:25 | We don't want to quit any processes
right now so we will click Cancel.
| | 04:29 | Now, let's look at the tabs below.
| | 04:31 | First is CPU.
| | 04:32 | This is a visual representation of the
stress being put on your Mac's processor.
| | 04:37 | The percentage indicators to the left give you
some idea of what's going on with the processor.
| | 04:42 | Right now, we have an 8-core Mac Pro here.
| | 04:45 | So this thing has plenty of horsepower so we are
not using up a ton of this processor's attention.
| | 04:51 | You can look at it by percentage, by the
amount of stuff that's going with the processor
| | 04:55 | or you can look at the graph on the right.
| | 04:58 | We have a bunch of things going here and even with that,
we are really not putting a lot of stress on our CPU.
| | 05:04 | The next tab is System Memory.
| | 05:06 | This tells you how your RAM is being allocated.
| | 05:09 | We have a bunch of free RAM right now even
though we are running several applications.
| | 05:13 | If you routinely have no free RAM, that may
tell you that you need more or that you need
| | 05:18 | to run fewer applications at the same time.
| | 05:23 | Is your Mac spending a lot of time writing or reading data?
| | 05:26 | Well, one way to find out is to look at Disk Activity.
| | 05:30 | This graph will tell you how your Mac is spending
its time moving data on and off the disk.
| | 05:35 | Currently, we are reading and writing a fair amount of data
right now because we do have several applications running.
| | 05:41 | A lot of the times, you may see that you are
writing a lot but you are not reading so much
| | 05:44 | or vice versa depending on what your Mac is doing.
| | 05:47 | And there is Disk Usage.
| | 05:49 | This tells you how full your hard drive is.
| | 05:51 | If you don't have about 10% of the startup disk free,
your Mac will run more slowly because it needs that space
| | 05:58 | for writing virtual memory swap files in and out.
| | 06:01 | If it has to do this a lot because there is much
free space on the Mac, things could slow down.
| | 06:06 | And finally network.
| | 06:08 | As its name hints, this is where
you get a view of network activity.
| | 06:12 | Currently, we are receiving a lot of data but we are sending
very little, so green for receiving and red for sent.
| | 06:19 | If you want to change these colors,
you are welcome to do so.
| | 06:22 | Simply click on them, up comes the color picker
and you can choose another color for these things.
| | 06:27 | Finally, up in the Window menu are
a couple of grass they are helpful.
| | 06:30 | One is CPU usage.
| | 06:32 | This gives you a nice representation of what
all the cores within your Mac are doing.
| | 06:37 | As I said, we have 8 cores in this Mac
and all of them are a little bit occupied.
| | 06:41 | The tasks are being nicely spread out between them.
| | 06:44 | It's not always the case that you will
see all of your cores moving at once.
| | 06:48 | For example, a little earlier we had core
#4 just completely pegged by some process.
| | 06:54 | Core #5 was doing a little bit of stuff and then
other cores were all apparently taking a nap
| | 06:58 | because there was no representation
of anything that they were doing.
| | 07:03 | But we can also look at our CPU
history to see how this looks.
| | 07:07 | So, this kind of keeps a running tab of what's
going on and where your cores are being hit.
| | 07:12 | On this representation, again, you can see that all
the cores are generally occupied doing something
| | 07:18 | and that's nice knowing that you are getting your monies
worth out of your Mac that all those cores were hard
| | 07:22 | at work, but a lot of times again you may
see that one or two cores are doing something
| | 07:25 | and the rest of the cores are doing nothing.
| | 07:27 | Again depending on the application,
if it will address multiple cores,
| | 07:31 | some will not, they will just address a single core.
| | 07:34 | Before we leave activity monitor, here
is one other very cool little tip.
| | 07:38 | Suppose you would like to see what your
Mac is doing in regards to activity
| | 07:42 | but you don't want this big activity monitor
in front of you, well, you can do this.
| | 07:46 | You could minimize activity monitor
if you like, drop it down here.
| | 07:50 | You note that activity monitor is still under the dock.
| | 07:52 | Well, click and hold on that and choose a dock icon.
| | 07:57 | Okay, great, I would like to see CPU Usage.
| | 08:02 | When you do that, the Activity Monitor icon changes to
this little meter that shows you how the CPU is doing.
| | 08:08 | I don't care for that right now.
| | 08:09 | Let's see maybe I would like to see the CPU history.
| | 08:14 | Okay, now I get this little graph.
| | 08:16 | It seems that my CPU is doing just fine, so
we will switch back to the Application icon.
| | 08:23 | So, we get monitor back up and that is our
look at the Essentials of activity monitor.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring an airport base station with Airport Utility| 00:01 | AirPort Utility is use to manage
your AirPort Wireless Base Station,
| | 00:04 | because it's called AirPort Utility it's
likely found in the Utilities folder
| | 00:09 | and sure enough, here it is, open it up here.
| | 00:12 | In the past, Apple, who did couple of different
AirPort Utilities including AirPort Admin Utility
| | 00:19 | and AirPort Disk Utility.
| | 00:21 | It's all gathered together in this one application now.
| | 00:24 | I am not going to go into every nook and cranny of AirPort
Networking but I can offer the basics of what this does.
| | 00:30 | In this lesson, we are going to look
at configuring an AirPort Express
| | 00:33 | and here you see our AirPort Base Stations along left
side, little express and these are both AirPort Extremes,
| | 00:39 | we are going to configure the little guide, to do that
we simply click Continue and walk through the setup.
| | 00:45 | This will ask us a series of questions.
| | 00:47 | First we are going to name our AirPort.
| | 00:50 | I will call this For Leopard Beyond the Basics.
| | 00:54 | I need an AirPort Express password.
| | 00:57 | This is the password that you will
use in order to configure the AirPort
| | 01:00 | at another time if you need to and we click Continue.
| | 01:08 | Now, you have another question to answer.
| | 01:10 | The first one is you currently already have a wireless
network and you would simple like to add an AirPort Express
| | 01:16 | to it or replace an existing device on my network.
| | 01:19 | We don't want to do that instead what we want to
do is I don't have a wireless network and I want
| | 01:24 | to create one and this is how we will go.
| | 01:27 | Select that option and click Continue, here we
name the network and this is what people will see
| | 01:31 | when they are accessing the wireless network.
| | 01:33 | Here also are your encryptions settings.
| | 01:35 | Now, if you choose No Security, this means
that your wireless network is open to anybody,
| | 01:40 | who happens by within range with a wireless device.
| | 01:43 | So for example, somebody comes by with
a laptop, if your network is open,
| | 01:47 | they can access it and they can share your bandwidth.
| | 01:50 | This may not be such a good idea.
| | 01:51 | First of all some people pay extra for more bandwidth
| | 01:54 | and you may incur greater cost so
that also it's not terribly secure.
| | 01:58 | If people are really smart, they might find a way to get
into your computer and do stuff with it that you prefer
| | 02:04 | that they not do, so it's a good idea
to have some kind of encryption on.
| | 02:08 | Next level up is 128 bit WAP.
| | 02:11 | This is more compatible with older wireless computers
and devices, but it's not the strongest encryption
| | 02:17 | in the world WPA/WPA2Personal and that's the
strongest security that AirPort currently offers.
| | 02:26 | One thing you have to know about this is when entering a
password, your password must be between 8 and 63 characters.
| | 02:33 | I can't believe you are going to enter 63 characters,
but if you want to knock yourself out, I am not going to,
| | 02:38 | I will enter something shorter and we click Continue.
| | 02:46 | Now, at this point you have to tell the AirPort,
how you use an IP address and you have two options,
| | 02:52 | one is you connect to the Internet with a DSL or
Cable Modem and it's already assigning DHCP addresses.
| | 02:57 | What this means is that you have some kind of
modem at your house, you have broadband coming in,
| | 03:03 | that device then says okay, this is my IP address, but I
am going to send out other IP addresses around two devices
| | 03:10 | on my network and this is the way you would set
up the AirPort Express if you wanted to do this
| | 03:15 | or if you have a Static IP, I do not use DHCP
instead I am going to use my AirPort as the router.
| | 03:22 | It will then distribute addresses throughout my network.
| | 03:25 | In our case, we are going to use DHCP, that's
the option I choose and I click Continue.
| | 03:30 | At this point, you get a little summary of
what AirPort Express is configured to do,
| | 03:36 | looks good to me so I will click Update and
after a few minutes it will be ready to go.
| | 03:41 | This just tells you, it's going to be offline for
a while, go have a cup of coffee or cup of tea
| | 03:45 | and when you get back, it will be ready to go.
| | 03:48 | And congratulations you are done, you return with
your coffee and everything is set up and ready to go.
| | 03:53 | So all you have to do is click Done, because you are,
and that concludes setting up an AirPort Base Station.
| | 04:01 | In our next lesson, we are going to dig down into the guts
| | 04:05 | of an AirPort Base Station, by
clicking the Manual Setup button.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring manual settings on an airport base station| 00:01 | You can access the more interesting settings
by double-clicking on a Base Station you want
| | 00:05 | to configure or by clicking the Manual Setup button.
| | 00:08 | I will double-click on my AirPort Express, and in
this AirPort tab, we will first see the Summary tab
| | 00:14 | and here is an overview of how your
AirPort Base Station is set up.
| | 00:19 | One thing to notice is this Status button.
| | 00:22 | Currently, everything is working well on our AirPort
Base Station, that's why you see the green light.
| | 00:27 | If I were to click this, it would tell
me "Hey, look, everything is good."
| | 00:31 | But if you see a yellow light or if you see a red
light, that indicates the things are not good.
| | 00:37 | Now, sometimes if it's just a single error that can quickly
be corrected, it will say Ethernet cable is unplugged
| | 00:43 | for example, there is something wrong
and it will tell you what that is.
| | 00:46 | However, it may just say you have an error.
| | 00:48 | If you click on the Yellow or Red, you will
get more details on what that error might be.
| | 00:54 | In the next tab, in Base Station, you see that
you have the option to rename your Base Station.
| | 00:58 | I like the way it's named now, but
I could change that if I wanted to.
| | 01:02 | You can also change the password and again, this is the
password you use in order to configure your Base Station.
| | 01:07 | This is not your security password.
| | 01:09 | Under Wireless, you have three options at the
top and these are the most interesting things.
| | 01:15 | Under Wireless Mode, you can create a wireless network.
| | 01:18 | That's how we set his up.
| | 01:19 | The idea being that this is going to be our router,
all other wireless devices are going to connect
| | 01:25 | to this and we are going to be good to go.
| | 01:27 | The next option Participate in a WDS Network means that
this is going to be a part of another AirPort network.
| | 01:35 | So for example, downstairs, I have an AirPort Extreme
Base Station, I would like to extend the range
| | 01:42 | of that Base Station and I do it by choosing
this option Participate in a WDS Network,
| | 01:47 | then this becomes part of that network and it extends
the signal from the main Base Station elsewhere.
| | 01:53 | Also, I can join a wireless network.
| | 01:56 | This doesn't extend but rather just
becomes a node on that wireless network.
| | 02:00 | I am going to leave it just as it
is to create a wireless network.
| | 02:04 | You can change your security settings down here.
| | 02:07 | So before we had a password for
configuring the Base Station, at this point,
| | 02:11 | these are your security and encryption settings.
| | 02:13 | So you can change the password for that here
or you can choose another option for security.
| | 02:19 | Access, that's where you get into the geeky stuff.
| | 02:22 | This is for more advanced network techniques
that we are not going to get into here.
| | 02:26 | If I click the Internet tab, here
is where I configure my IP settings.
| | 02:31 | Currently, we are connected using Ethernet.
| | 02:33 | I can configure a couple of different ways.
| | 02:35 | We have it set up to use DHCP but
I can also choose manually.
| | 02:40 | If I wanted to do that, I would then manually enter
information such as my IP address, Subnet Mask,
| | 02:45 | Router Address, DNS servers, that kind of thing.
| | 02:49 | I am not going to do that.
| | 02:50 | I want DHCP as it was originally configured.
| | 02:53 | I click DHCP.
| | 02:54 | At this point, I can then assign
addresses to my local network.
| | 02:59 | My AirPort Base Station will act as a router
| | 03:02 | and then it distributes local addresses
and you see three naming schemes.
| | 03:06 | So there is 10.0, 172.16 and 192.168.
| | 03:11 | These are not addresses that you are going to find
on the Internet, rather these are local addresses
| | 03:16 | that are distributed throughout your local network.
| | 03:20 | That is another thing for distributing addresses that too
is a more advanced topic that we are not going to get into.
| | 03:26 | Now, some base stations, you will see this
music entry for example on this AirPort Express.
| | 03:31 | What this does is allows you to use a really cool technology
that is part of iTunes, and the way it works is this.
| | 03:38 | You have a computer downstairs.
| | 03:39 | On it, you have all your music in your iTunes Library.
| | 03:42 | If you have something like an AirPort Extreme upstairs,
| | 03:45 | you can plug into it your stereo
because it has an audio port on it.
| | 03:49 | At that point, you can stream the music from your
iTunes Library downstairs from your Mac Pro for example
| | 03:57 | to that AirPort Express and then play the music
through your stereo wirelessly across your house
| | 04:04 | and this feature supports up to
three AirPort Express Base Stations.
| | 04:08 | It's a really cool feature and so you should
definitely check out if you have the opportunity.
| | 04:12 | Printers is an option that will appear if you
have a base station that has a USB Port on it,
| | 04:18 | this allows you to do wireless
printing, a very nice feature.
| | 04:21 | So, again, I could have an AirPort Express Base Station
upstairs with a printer plugged into and any Mac
| | 04:29 | on my network at home I could print to this
printer that's attached to the base station.
| | 04:34 | And advanced, as it suggests, these are advanced settings.
| | 04:38 | Now, I could go through some of these things and configure
them but it's going to be different for your setup.
| | 04:42 | What you really need to do is if you need to configure
these kinds of things, you want to get this information
| | 04:47 | from your IT person or the person that's
supporting your Mac for complex network settings.
| | 04:52 | One thing I will mention however is Port Mapping.
| | 04:55 | Port Mapping is something that
people at home may need to do.
| | 04:59 | The idea behind Port Mapping is this.
| | 05:02 | Let's suppose you have got your
AirPort Base Station at home.
| | 05:05 | This is a traffic cop for any bit of information
that comes into your house as well as it goes up.
| | 05:09 | Let's suppose that you are distributing
addresses internally.
| | 05:12 | You have got 10.0 address.
| | 05:15 | Some computer out there on the Internet would like
to contact your computer or one of your computers
| | 05:20 | on your network and speak to you well, how does it know to
do that, if it enters 10.0.whatever, that can go anywhere
| | 05:27 | and of course it won't go anywhere
because it's a local address.
| | 05:30 | So instead, what happens is it will connect to
your router, it will connect to your base station
| | 05:34 | and then the base station will say "Okay,
this kind of request, I know what to do with.
| | 05:39 | I need to route it to Chris's MacBook
for example and put it to the right port.
| | 05:44 | I will take care of routing traffic for
you," and this is done through Port Mapping.
| | 05:49 | I am not going to get into the
specific details of Port Mapping
| | 05:53 | because it will change depending
on how your network is set up.
| | 05:56 | So, return to AirPort, Summary, make
sure everything is working okay.
| | 06:00 | We have got the green light and
that means we are good to go.
| | 06:03 | We haven't updated anything.
| | 06:04 | I can just simply close this window.
| | 06:06 | Don't update and that is the guts of AirPort Utility.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Copying files with Bluetooth File Exchange| 00:00 | You know that you can move data across a network
via a Mac's 802.11 wireless connection and of course
| | 00:06 | over a wired ethernet connection but most Macs
offer yet one more way to move data over the air
| | 00:11 | and not just Macs but other compatible devices.
| | 00:14 | Of course I am talking about Bluetooth, the short
range, not terribly fast wireless transfer protocol.
| | 00:21 | One of the major means for moving data over
Bluetooth is the aptly named Bluetooth File Exchange,
| | 00:26 | which you find in the Utilities folder.
| | 00:29 | It's pretty darn easy to use.
| | 00:32 | First make sure that Bluetooth is enabled on your Mac,
launch Bluetooth File Exchange and you will be prompted
| | 00:38 | for the File you would like to copy through a
Bluetooth device such as a PDA phone or other Mac.
| | 00:44 | Choose that file and in the Send File dialog box that
appears, select a Bluetooth device and click Send.
| | 00:50 | So we are going to send this little
file here called proteus.
| | 00:55 | Here's my phone, click Send.
| | 01:01 | We connect to the device and sure enough it
transfers over to the phone when it accepts the file.
| | 01:08 | Now on a Mac receiving files over a Bluetooth,
by default the receiver has the option
| | 01:14 | to accept all documents coming from this device.
| | 01:17 | You can change this setting in the Bluetooth sharing pane
| | 01:20 | within the sharing system preference
so that you can always accept.
| | 01:23 | Bluetooth File Exchange can also pull data from the
Bluetooth device, so choose File, Browse Device,
| | 01:31 | select your device, click Browse, and
you will see the contents of that device.
| | 01:37 | Here's my phone, I would like to work
in the Pictures folder, let's see,
| | 01:41 | I think I would like to get this chess picture here,
and all I have to do at this point is click Get.
| | 01:47 | It has to save that.
| | 01:50 | Click Save.
| | 01:53 | Now look at My Documents folder
to make sure I actually got it.
| | 01:56 | Here it is, click Chess, it opens the
preview and there is my jpeg file.
| | 02:01 | So it transferred just fine.
| | 02:03 | Now open the top on the toolbar
you will see the new folder option.
| | 02:07 | This is not something that's going to work on my phone
because it doesn't allow me to create new directories on it.
| | 02:12 | However if I am connected to a Macintosh and I click
new folder, as long as I have permission granted
| | 02:17 | by the person running that Mac, I can create a new
folder there and then put files into that folder.
| | 02:24 | Also on a Mac if I choose to and I have permission
to, I can select items and delete them as well.
| | 02:30 | And that's the workings of Bluetooth File Exchange.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up a partition with Boot Camp Assistant| 00:01 | A Mac with an Intel processor and that includes all Macs
till today is capable of running Microsoft Windows XP
| | 00:07 | with Service Pack II and Vista natively, meaning you can
restart your Mac so that it boots directly into Windows.
| | 00:15 | The means to this minor miracle is Boot Camp
Assistant, another application that we will find
| | 00:20 | in the Utilities folder so we go to
Go, Utilities and Boot Camp Assistant.
| | 00:28 | Now in addition to having an Intel
Processor you must have room
| | 00:31 | for at least 10 gigabytes of free
space on an internal drive.
| | 00:36 | To get this going we just walk through or we click Continue.
| | 00:40 | And once you click Continue, you will see two
options, Create or Remove a Windows Partition
| | 00:45 | or start the Windows Installer and we don't
yet have a Windows Partition so we need
| | 00:48 | to create one and we do so by clicking Continue.
| | 00:52 | In the next page you have the option to choose
the disk you want to create the partition on.
| | 00:56 | Note that this works only with the internal
drives including the start-up drive.
| | 01:01 | You can't use a FireWire or USB drive for this.
| | 01:04 | Also you don't have to reformat your
start up drive for this to work.
| | 01:07 | Boot Camp Assistant will make the
partition without formatting your drive,
| | 01:12 | so we will put this on our hard drive and click Continue.
| | 01:17 | In the next page you choose how big the partition will be.
| | 01:21 | You have the option to use 32 gigabytes, divide equally
or you can drag the dividing line between the Windows
| | 01:30 | and Mac partition to make it the size you like.
| | 01:33 | It is not going to eat into room that's already
been taken as you see over here on Mac OS X,
| | 01:38 | we still have 5 gigabytes free
and you need to have that free.
| | 01:42 | We are actually going to use 32 gigabytes, resizes and
then we click partition and wait for it to do its magic.
| | 01:50 | Now to complete the installation this is
actually easier than installing Windows on a PC.
| | 01:56 | You click the Start Installation button, you will then be
prompted for your disk, we don't happen to have one here
| | 02:02 | because we are not going to install Windows on this Mac
but at this point you would open up the media drive,
| | 02:07 | insert your Windows XP or Vista disk, go ahead with
the installation and what makes this more convenient is
| | 02:14 | that unlike with the regular Windows installed, the
Mac answers all those Windows questions for you.
| | 02:20 | So often times when you are installing Windows,
it will say "Oh, do you want to do this,
| | 02:24 | what kind of setting do you want here, please push this
button here", you don't have to do that with Boot Camp.
| | 02:28 | Boot Camp just does the right thing, does all the
installation for you and then it is ready to go.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Console| 00:01 | Behind the scenes, your Mac is like a court reporter.
| | 00:03 | Quietly, in the background, it's carefully
taking notes on many other things going on.
| | 00:07 | It stores these notes as logs and the logs can be read
by the Console application and we will now fire it up.
| | 00:13 | It's in the Utilities folder but
we will launch it from spotlight.
| | 00:18 | And oh my goodness, look at all these stuff.
| | 00:23 | And you could see while a lot of people will open the
Console, look at it once and say "I am never coming back
| | 00:29 | in here again," and quit immediately because you can see an
awful lot of messages that make no sense to you whatsoever
| | 00:35 | and for most people these things don't make sense,
but you can make a little bit of sense of them
| | 00:40 | by choosing entries carefully in order
to read out some helpful information.
| | 00:44 | For example, if you look at all messages as we
are now, you are going to become overwhelmed,
| | 00:48 | there is just an awful lot of stuff happening in here.
| | 00:51 | Choose Console Messages however and you are going to
see little notes that applications have said "you know,
| | 00:57 | I think we need to keep track of this one," and
they will send a little console message to Console,
| | 01:02 | put it in log so that later on, somebody can come
back and then check and say "oh wait, wait, wait,
| | 01:07 | there was a problem yesterday, I wonder what that,
| | 01:09 | there seems to be console message
here," and this is what the message was.
| | 01:13 | Maybe I can make some sense of it and do something
about it, or maybe I don't know anything about this
| | 01:19 | but at least I can tell somebody else like a tech support
person that I found this kind of information in the Console.
| | 01:25 | Here's an example of helpful information.
| | 01:27 | Just the other day, I was trying to launch iDVD.
| | 01:30 | I clicked on the icon in the doc, it bounced a couple of
times and then I got a message saying it quit unexpectedly.
| | 01:36 | I wondered what the heck is going
on here, I thought this worked.
| | 01:40 | Well, it turns out that some of the elements of
iDVD had been tossed out and I hadn't realized it.
| | 01:45 | I was able to go into the Console and again, go through
a lot of these gobbledygook but I saw enough to say
| | 01:51 | that certain directories didn't exist, that
indicated to me, ah, this needs to be reinstalled
| | 01:56 | because clearly iDVD is not seeing
all the things that it needs to see.
| | 02:00 | Once it saw them, because I reinstalled everything
was fine, and that's where the Console helped out.
| | 02:06 | You can also look at log files to see
if you can find some information there.
| | 02:10 | For example, under this log file where it says tilde library
logs, these are log files created within your user account.
| | 02:18 | Let's take a look at one of them.
| | 02:20 | Under Adobe, Software Updates, we will click one of
these and we will see an awful lot of information here.
| | 02:27 | Now, here's an interesting entry, directory does not exist.
| | 02:31 | That may be perfectly fine for what's going on
right here but this is also the kind of thing
| | 02:36 | that could keep an application from running or
uninstall if working improperly because it's looking
| | 02:41 | for a particular folder or a directory,
it doesn't find it, it crashes or it quits
| | 02:45 | or it says something is not going right here.
| | 02:48 | So, even though I don't have a clue what all these other
stuff means, conflicting process I don't know what that is.
| | 02:53 | But if I get to the end and I see ah, directory is
missing, okay, well directory does not exist, okay.
| | 02:59 | I know something is wrong here and I can start to try
to troubleshoot or if I end up talking to somebody
| | 03:05 | in tech support, I can say the log tells me the
directory does not exist, what does that mean,
| | 03:10 | and then maybe they can clue me as to what's going on.
| | 03:14 | So, outside your user logs, there is also library logs.
| | 03:18 | This is the stuff that happens to everybody on the computer.
| | 03:21 | This is outside your user account and happening elsewhere.
| | 03:23 | Let's go to Adobe again, Installers, Add and
Remove here's bunch of stuff in here as well.
| | 03:29 | It's important that you understand that log files
don't necessarily mean that there is always a problem.
| | 03:33 | Sometimes it's just to report of hey,
this is how the installation went.
| | 03:36 | This is what I did.
| | 03:37 | This can be helpful as well.
| | 03:39 | If you install an application and you are trying to remove
it by dumping out the application and that doesn't seem
| | 03:44 | to get rid of it, you can look into a console
file and say okay, let me look in the installer,
| | 03:49 | where did you install stuff, oh I see, you have
got a hidden thing here and here and here and here.
| | 03:53 | You can then go and find where that
stuff is and then toss it out by hand
| | 03:58 | if the application doesn't have an uninstaller.
| | 04:01 | If you like to find out if your Mac is panicked,
well, there will be a panic reporter log.
| | 04:06 | If your Mac has never panicked meaning
that gray screen hasn't shown with a bunch
| | 04:10 | of foreign text on it, you won't see this entry.
| | 04:12 | But if you have panicked your Mac, the panic reporter
log will appear and then you can look at that and say oh,
| | 04:17 | your Mac isn't behaving as it should,
you have talked to tech support.
| | 04:20 | One thing they may ask you to do is send them the log file.
| | 04:23 | How do you do that?
| | 04:24 | Easily done, go to File, save a copy as, and here's the way
you save that particular log, and then you can send that log
| | 04:33 | to someone like Apple tech support if something
wrong with your Mac, if it's another application,
| | 04:37 | the tech support person may say boy, show
what can help me if I had a log file.
| | 04:41 | No problem, I can generate one, I will email it
to you and then you can tell me what's going on.
| | 04:46 | So this is a very handy way to get information that maybe
you don't understand into the hands of somebody who does.
| | 04:52 | Finally, there is one other trick
you can try, Quick Console Messages.
| | 04:56 | If you have an application that's
quitting all the time, you try something,
| | 05:00 | it blows up every single time whenever
you perform a certain action,
| | 05:03 | go to Console Messages in the Filter
field, enter the name of that application.
| | 05:08 | So let's say iTunes is having a problem
and then run the application again.
| | 05:13 | Let it blow up and in all likelihood,
some console messages will be generated.
| | 05:18 | You will see only those messages for iTunes appearing
in this window as long as you filtered it out.
| | 05:24 | In other words, you are not going to see scads and scads
and scads of messages that are unrelated to that app,
| | 05:29 | you want to see just the messages
that have to do with iTunes.
| | 05:33 | And that is a basic look at the Console with the idea that
you can make sense of a lot of complicated information.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Storing your passwords with Keychain Assistant| 00:01 | You will notice that when a website or application prompts
you for a password, your Mac will offer to store it for you.
| | 00:06 | It stores it and later retrieves it in the Mac's Keychain
and Keychain Access is where you manage keychains.
| | 00:13 | We will find that in the Utilities folder Keychain Access.
| | 00:20 | In this lesson, we will look at the basics of keychains
and then in the next lesson here under the hood.
| | 00:26 | When you launch Keychain Access you
will find at least one keychain listed
| | 00:30 | at the left side of the window in the Keychains pane.
| | 00:33 | This login keychain is created when you first
install Leopard, unless you created a new keychain
| | 00:38 | and I will show you how to do that later, it contains
entries for your email accounts, network passwords, website,
| | 00:44 | usernames and passwords and certificates, which
are small security files passed to your Mac
| | 00:50 | that verify a website is what it says it is.
| | 00:52 | Below this pane is the category pane, where you can
look at specific items within a selected keychain.
| | 00:58 | So for example if you click Passwords and then Internet,
you will see entries for your email accounts for example.
| | 01:06 | So, what good is this stuff?
| | 01:08 | Well, because Keychain Access stores your passwords,
it's also the place where you can retrieve them
| | 01:13 | if you forgot them and to do so, you just do this.
| | 01:17 | Choose an item and we will choose
our mailexample.com password
| | 01:21 | and click the "I" button at the bottom for information.
| | 01:25 | In the Attributes tab you will see an option for
Show Password, select that you will be prompted
| | 01:31 | for your administrator's password, enter it and click Allow.
| | 01:37 | There your password is revealed and in this case for
my password is example, which is a terrible password,
| | 01:44 | so please don't use a password that's that easy to
guess, but for this example it's perfectly okay.
| | 01:48 | If I want to hide that again, all I have
to do is close this window and it's gone.
| | 01:54 | So you notice I will click "I" again, it's not longer there.
| | 01:57 | So in case somebody else is using their Mac they can easily
get and they have to have the administrator's password.
| | 02:03 | At the bottom of the category list you will see a Secure
Notes option; this is for creating and saving locked notes.
| | 02:10 | For example, you might create one of
these things to store credit card numbers
| | 02:13 | or super secret company tittle-tattle
that you can lay or retrieve.
| | 02:17 | Unlike passwords and certificates, this information isn't
automatically fit to an application that asks for it;
| | 02:23 | rather it's just a place to store protected information.
| | 02:27 | To create a new note, just click the Plus button; enter
a title for your note, enter your note and click Add.
| | 02:44 | Now, when you want to open that note, click Show Note.
| | 02:48 | Once again prompted for your password,
allow and there is your note.
| | 02:54 | Close it again and it's locked, so let's suppose
this isn't secure enough for you because what
| | 03:00 | if somebody finds your administrator's password and they
find out that your company doesn't have good Doughnuts?
| | 03:05 | Simple enough choose File, New
Keychain, Create type in a password,
| | 03:17 | verify it and you will see a password strength
meter to tell you how good or poor your password is.
| | 03:24 | I didn't type in a particular good one, click OK and now
you have a new keychain with a completely separate password
| | 03:32 | and then you can create secure notes in
here or you can add items to that keychain
| | 03:37 | if you want to and there you have the basics.
| | 03:40 | In the next lesson, we will talk about Keychain Extras.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using keychain access for more than just passwords| 00:01 | As you have seen, keychains are important and because
they are, it's important that you keep them backed up,
| | 00:06 | you maintain their health and you don't allow others
access to them, and that's what this lesson is all about.
| | 00:12 | There is no function within Keychain Access for backing
up your keychain so you should do this manually.
| | 00:17 | You will find your keychain by going here.
| | 00:21 | Go menu, go to folder and the path
to your keychain is your user folder
| | 00:27 | and that's what this tilde means /library/keychains,
| | 00:32 | click Go and you see within the
Keychains folder, here are your keychains.
| | 00:38 | I'd back up this entire folder rather than
cherry picking the keychains within it.
| | 00:42 | If there is a keychain in there other than your
login keychain, it's likely that you will need it.
| | 00:47 | And yes, Time Machine backs up your Keychain folder along
with everything else, but keychains are important enough
| | 00:52 | that I think they are worth a double backup.
| | 00:54 | Back to Keychain Access, if you seem to be getting
more keychain alerts than usual or you're being bugged
| | 00:59 | for passwords, when you know you have already entered them
and click the Always Allow option that allows the password
| | 01:05 | to be added to the keychain, it's possible
that your keychain is corrupted in someway
| | 01:09 | and this is something that you want to fix.
| | 01:11 | You do so by choosing Keychain First
Aid from the Keychain Access menu.
| | 01:17 | In this window, all you have to do is edit your
password because your username is already selected,
| | 01:22 | make sure that Verify is enable and then click Start.
| | 01:26 | This is what you hope you see.
| | 01:28 | Verification started, it checks the keychain,
verification completed and no problems found.
| | 01:34 | However, if you see red text in here, that means that
there is a problem, there is some kind of corruption
| | 01:39 | and to fix that, all you have to
do is enable the Repair option,
| | 01:42 | click Start and this Repair function
works very well most of the time.
| | 01:46 | If it doesn't work out, if it continues to show
errors, it's time then to pull up your backup.
| | 01:51 | You would replace the current keychain
that's corrupted with the older keychain
| | 01:56 | from your backup and hopefully that works.
| | 01:58 | So, we will get out of Keychain First Aid now.
| | 02:01 | When we talked about security, you learned that you
could lock down your Mac so that others couldn't use it.
| | 02:06 | You can add yet another layer of security by automatically
locking your keychain so that should someone gain access
| | 02:12 | to computer, they won't be able to use items
and services that require the password stored
| | 02:16 | in your keychain and this is pretty easily done.
| | 02:19 | Just right-click on the keychain that you would like
to protect and choose Chain Settings for the name
| | 02:26 | of the keychain, here you see a couple of security options.
| | 02:29 | The first is you can lock your keychain after
a certain number of minutes of activity.
| | 02:34 | Let's suppose you're in an office environment and a lot
of people come wondering by your cube and they have access
| | 02:40 | to your Mac, you have gone off to get a cup of coffee, get
a doughnut with it that takes 10 minutes or so and somebody
| | 02:46 | in the meantime sitting on your Mac and they are
sending startling e-mail on your e-mail account
| | 02:52 | because they can get in because you are logged in.
| | 02:54 | Maybe you don't want that to happen and
instead, tell the keychain to lock itself
| | 02:58 | after a certain number of minutes of activity.
| | 03:01 | I think 5 is a little too few.
| | 03:04 | If I am working on my Mac and the phone rings and I am on
the phone for 10 minutes, it would be inconvenient for me
| | 03:09 | to have my Mac lock its keychain because what
happens when it locks down, I would go into something
| | 03:14 | like my e-mail application, I will attempt to get my e-mail
and then will say "I think I need your password again."
| | 03:21 | So, make sure this is reasonable amount of time
and only you know what that time is going to be.
| | 03:25 | The other option is you can lock your
keychain when the Mac goes to sleep.
| | 03:30 | This is a great little option when you
sleep as some kind of security setting.
| | 03:35 | I showed you in security how you could do that before.
| | 03:37 | This is something you can do here as well.
| | 03:39 | So when your Mac goes to sleep, the keychain is unlocked.
| | 03:42 | If somebody comes and wakes up your Mac and they try to
access your e-mail or something else that's protected
| | 03:47 | by keychain, they will be prompted
for your administrator's password.
| | 03:51 | If they don't know that password, they are out of luck.
| | 03:54 | And finally, you can do this manually,
that's also easily done.
| | 03:58 | Select the keychain you want, right-click
on it and lock keychain and then the name
| | 04:03 | of your keychain and it happens immediately.
| | 04:05 | So, if you need to dash away, you
choose this, it locks it down.
| | 04:09 | You come back and then try to access something in keychain,
you will be prompted for your administrator password.
| | 04:13 | That will unlock the keychain so you can use it again.
| | 04:17 | And that is the complete lowdown on keychains.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Transferring user accounts with Migration Assistant| 00:00 | And now it's time for a look at Migration Assistant
once again, Utilities, Migration Assistant we launch it.
| | 00:08 | Now hang on a second, you probably would be
thinking, "We covered Migration Assistant
| | 00:11 | in the Leopard Essential Training Title why are
we back here again", well for this reason helpful
| | 00:17 | as Migration Assistant is for transferring
data from your old Mac
| | 00:21 | to a brand new Mac you can use
it later on in your Mac's life.
| | 00:24 | For example, you have been running a copy
of Mac OS X 10.4 Tiger on your computer
| | 00:30 | and you have been thinking about
moving to Leopard but only slowly.
| | 00:33 | You would still like the option use Tiger sometimes
and Leopard others, well this is easily done.
| | 00:38 | Simply add a hard drive to your Mac and
this could be a FireWire drive for example.
| | 00:42 | Install Leopard on that drive and play with it for a while.
| | 00:45 | When you are then ready to fully commit to Leopard you
can copy your old non-Apple applications and data from it,
| | 00:52 | fire up migration assistant and choose
your Tiger drive to migrate data from
| | 00:57 | and let me show you how this migration works.
| | 00:59 | You fire up Migration Assistant and you click Continue
| | 01:02 | into your administrator's password
and you see you have three options.
| | 01:08 | The first is very much like what happens when you
first install Leopard and you have another Mac.
| | 01:12 | You are offered to transfer data from that other Mac.
| | 01:15 | The second option is you can migrate from a time
machine back up or you can migrate from another disk.
| | 01:21 | This is like the example I just sided.
| | 01:23 | You have two disks on your Mac 1 has Leopard on it
one has Tiger on it you want to migrate that way
| | 01:29 | and the last option is to another Mac and this is
for sending information from your Mac to another Mac.
| | 01:35 | And this is what we are going to do, we are
going to choose from another Mac click Continue.
| | 01:40 | Now we have the option to connect these Macs via FireWire
but look at this there is this new option in Leopard
| | 01:46 | and that is we can use a network instead
and that's what we are going to try.
| | 01:49 | So I click Use Network.
| | 01:51 | I am presented with the pass code
that I must enter on the other Mac.
| | 01:56 | The other Mac must have migration assistant running on it
| | 02:00 | that other Mac you enter this pass code it
receives and it says it's preparing information.
| | 02:05 | And it says it's ready to go.
| | 02:07 | I click Continue and at this point it's looking for user's
accounts on the other Mac that they can transfer over.
| | 02:14 | This can take a little while.
| | 02:15 | We are going to speed it up so you don't have to sit
through the whole process and there are our accounts.
| | 02:21 | At this point all we have to do is choose which
accounts we would like to transfer the data from.
| | 02:26 | I don't need Judy, I don't need Mac but I would like
what's in the troubleshooting account and so I leave
| | 02:32 | that Transfer option checked, click Continue and it
will present me with the kind of things I can transfer.
| | 02:40 | But I like applications, yes I think I would.
| | 02:42 | If you already have these applications on your Mac
it's not going to copy over the duplicate copies
| | 02:46 | so for example I am not going to get
yet another copy of iTunes or iCal.
| | 02:50 | I already have these things.
| | 02:52 | It's smart about what it transfers over.
| | 02:54 | It will then look in that user account for the files
and folders and it will give me files and folders
| | 02:58 | from that account and finally library is grayed out because
this is information that you are going to get by default.
| | 03:04 | At this point all I would have to do is
click Continue and the transfer would occur.
| | 03:09 | This isn't something that you need
to see again it's something
| | 03:12 | that may take a long time depending
on how much data you are moving over.
| | 03:16 | If that other Mac is a 500 GB hard drive on it and you
are asking it to transfer over 400 gigabytes of data
| | 03:22 | on a network and if you are not using
gigabyte Ethernet that can take a long time.
| | 03:27 | So that's another thing you want to think about.
| | 03:29 | If you can physically move these Macs together and do
this over FireWire that will be a much faster transfer
| | 03:35 | than if you were to try to do it over something
like AirPort, which could be deathly slow.
| | 03:39 | If that's the only option that you have that you have
to do it over AirPort start this at the end of the day
| | 03:45 | and go to bed and with luck it will be done in the morning
and that is the way that you can use Migration Assistant
| | 03:53 | to move data from other Macs either over network, over
FireWire or from another disk that is on your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Monitoring your network with Network Utility| 00:00 | When you open the Network Utility, you may be entering
new territory because a lot of people don't go in here
| | 00:07 | because they are not sure that they are
going to understand what's happening in here,
| | 00:10 | and even for normal users there is a lot of
useful things that you can do within here.
| | 00:14 | Some of it will be for IT sorts of people or people who
spend a lot of time troubleshooting the niggling details
| | 00:19 | of the network, but you as a normal user can
also find some interesting things in here.
| | 00:25 | The first thing we are going to look at is Ping.
| | 00:28 | Pinging a computer is similar to poking your
sleeping mate and asking "Are you awake?
| | 00:33 | Ha, are you, ha, ha ,ha", except the computer
being pinged isn't likely to slap you.
| | 00:39 | Essentially you are asking the remote computer to tell
you if it is there by sending it a ping or a little packet
| | 00:45 | of data and waiting for it to respond
with the 'Yeah, I got it' message.
| | 00:49 | There are a couple of useful things
you can do with pinging, for example,
| | 00:52 | if you are on the road you may want to
know if your home server is running.
| | 00:55 | If you have that Mac's IP address you just enter it
in the network address field here and click Ping.
| | 01:03 | If you see a response in the ping below
you know it is alive and maybe even well.
| | 01:07 | Also pinging a computer is a good way
to tell if your firewall is working.
| | 01:11 | If you switch on the firewall in the Security System
Preference so that it accepts only essential services
| | 01:17 | or just those services you have allowed and a ping isn't one
of them, that Mac should not reply to the ping which is good
| | 01:23 | when you don't want other computers
on the internet or locally talking
| | 01:26 | to your Mac, so we are going to give this a try.
| | 01:28 | I am going to ping my laptop and
the address there is .255.72.
| | 01:38 | I had the firewall configured so that
it is open, so I will ping the computer
| | 01:42 | and it should tell me that it's up and working.
| | 01:48 | And sure enough these little messages here are
being sent back by the computer saying, yes,
| | 01:53 | I am here and this is how long it took for me to do this.
| | 01:56 | Now let's try this again, this time I am going to
switch on the firewall, I will try to ping the computer
| | 02:01 | and nothing will come back, let's see
how that works, and sure enough it works.
| | 02:11 | By this time we should have seen some kind
of response if we were going to get one,
| | 02:14 | we didn't get one because the firewall is switched on so
if you are concerned that your firewall may not be working,
| | 02:20 | this is one way to do it, and you don't have to ping
another computer, you can also ping your own computer.
| | 02:26 | Simply enter your computer's IP address, which you can
find in the Sharing System Preference, enter it here
| | 02:32 | and click Ping, to ping your own computer.
| | 02:35 | If you like to look up the IP address of a particular
website, that's easily done as well, simply click Look Up,
| | 02:41 | and enter the name of the domain you want to check.
| | 02:45 | In this case let's check out lynda.com,
find it what the IP address is.
| | 02:48 | Click Look Up and there it is, here
is the IP information about lynda.com.
| | 02:55 | Now if you find that certain websites take forever to
load on your Mac it is possible that your Mac is having
| | 02:59 | to jump through several hoops to get there.
| | 03:02 | If you use traceroute, this will help
confirm the length of the journey.
| | 03:07 | Just enter the domain name or IP address in
the network address field and click Trace.
| | 03:12 | So we look for something like a www.guardian.co.uk so we are
going to go to London on the strip and we will click Trace.
| | 03:32 | And the journey is complete, click Stop, we
will see where we have gone to trace the route.
| | 03:36 | See we have been to San Jose, New York, London
and we hopped a bunch of places in between.
| | 03:43 | So what good is this for you?
| | 03:45 | This one may help you decide to change your ISP if yours
is taking way too many trips to get where you wanted to go.
| | 03:52 | Some ISPs have big pipes that go directly to places,
| | 03:55 | others sort of take more secured routes
and tend to be slower, and now to WhoIs.
| | 04:00 | I moderate some message boards and I use WhoIs
all the time to figure out where the people
| | 04:06 | who post spam on our message boards are coming from.
| | 04:08 | And it works much like the other network utility tabs.
| | 04:11 | You enter a domain or an IP address
in the address field and click WhoIs.
| | 04:15 | We will watch how that works.
| | 04:17 | Now, let's go to the New York Times
site for example, nyt.com.
| | 04:25 | I will choose one of the services that
reports these, how about network solutions,
| | 04:30 | and click WhoIs, and here is our WhoIs information.
| | 04:35 | This provides as much information as it can.
| | 04:39 | You will actually get more information if you type in an
IP address and let's see if they give us one somewhere.
| | 04:45 | Indeed they do, here is our IP address
here at the bottom, we will copy that,
| | 04:51 | paste it up here, and now do another WhoIs search.
| | 04:55 | And now we will do another search but we use a different
search body, in this case we will use arin.net,
| | 05:00 | which I often have a lot of success with.
| | 05:02 | Click WhoIs and we have more information.
| | 05:06 | This is showing us the information
for the ISP that handles that domain.
| | 05:11 | Why this is important and useful is because of
information like this, the abuse e-mail address.
| | 05:18 | So for example, if you look into an e-mail message
that you received, that has a lot of spam in it,
| | 05:24 | if you look in the header information sometimes you
can find the IP address of the person spamming you,
| | 05:29 | you can then use a Look Up to find out who the ISP is,
you can send an e-mail message to the abuse address
| | 05:36 | and then hopefully they will be able to unplug
that spammer's account and the spammer would be
| | 05:40 | out of business at least until they can find a new ISP.
| | 05:43 | And finally port scan, this is another
good option for testing a Mac's firewall.
| | 05:49 | You can add in your Mac's IP address or local address in
this field and click Scan, and we will give that a try.
| | 06:00 | And this will tell me about the ports that are
open on my Mac, and nothing appears to be open
| | 06:07 | and the reason is because my firewall is on.
| | 06:10 | Now let's turn off the firewall and see how it looks.
| | 06:13 | And now we will scan the port again and see now
that the firewall is off what it looks like.
| | 06:17 | And here we go; now we can see that certain ports are open.
| | 06:22 | This is a good security measure if you know something about
ports you can find out which ports are open on your Mac
| | 06:27 | and if some show up, that you are a little concerned
about, you can then use the firewall application
| | 06:32 | to close those ports or you can use a firewall
utility such as NoobProof to close specific ports.
| | 06:38 | And that concludes our tour of Network Utility.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using System Profiler| 00:00 | There comes into every computer user's life a time when
they must pick up the phone and talk to tech support
| | 00:06 | and when that happens you want to be prepared, and
by prepared I don't mean answering the question,
| | 00:10 | so what kind of graphics card do you have
in your Mac with, a good one I think,
| | 00:16 | no the correct answer is something along the lines of
I have an NVIDIA GeForce 8800 GT with 512 megabytes
| | 00:25 | of video RAM powering two 20-inch monitors at
resolutions of 1680x1050 at 60 Hz, why do you ask?
| | 00:34 | And where do you learn such intimate details of your Mac?
| | 00:36 | well you find them in the System Profiler.
| | 00:39 | Now unless you happen to be mucking around on the
inside of your Utilities folder, the quickest way to get
| | 00:44 | to System Profiler is to choose about this Mac
from the Apple menu and then click More Info.
| | 00:50 | In the resulting window, you will see
all kinds of information about your Mac,
| | 00:54 | filed within easy to understand categories.
| | 00:57 | Much of the information you will
need is found in the hardware entry.
| | 01:01 | This tells you the model of your Mac, the kind of processor
it has and its speed and the amount of installed RAM.
| | 01:08 | It also has your Mac serial number; you
may need to provide that serial number
| | 01:11 | to an Apple Tech if you call in for tech support.
| | 01:15 | There are a few other entries in here that
you should pay attention to, ATA for example,
| | 01:20 | is for devices such as your Mac's media drive
and on some older Macs its internal hard drives.
| | 01:26 | Macs that use eSATA drives, you will find under Serial ATA.
| | 01:31 | Other useful headings include disk burning.
| | 01:34 | If you wonder what the kind of disks that your
Mac is capable of burning they are listed here
| | 01:39 | under CD write, DVD write and various write strategies.
| | 01:43 | Is your Mac having a hard time recognizing FireWire devices?
| | 01:46 | We will click the FireWire entry, choose the
Bus and then see what's connected to your Mac.
| | 01:52 | Any devices the Mac recognizes will be
displayed here, however, they may still not work.
| | 01:57 | The Mac sees them but may be on the fritz.
| | 02:00 | Graphics Display, this is where you
answer that question about what kind
| | 02:04 | of graphics card you have this is where you tell.
| | 02:07 | For example, on this one we are using a
Radeon X1900, it has 512 megabytes of RAM
| | 02:14 | and we see the displays listed beneath this
heading here, so we have two displays here
| | 02:19 | and this is the resolution that we are using.
| | 02:22 | The memory option is for the RAM that's inside your Mac, you
can select various RAM modules and you can see their size,
| | 02:31 | you can also see their status, are they working
okay, yes they are great, that's confirmed
| | 02:36 | and also you can see the status in
the column here that says Status.
| | 02:41 | Click Printers and you see a list of all the printers
that are connected to your Mac and their driver version.
| | 02:47 | This is helpful when you want to see if your printer drivers
are up to date, if there is something more up to date,
| | 02:52 | you may want to install that printer driver.
| | 02:55 | Click the USB entry and like the FireWire
entry this tells you what's connected
| | 03:00 | to your Mac's USB ports and what kind of USB device it is.
| | 03:04 | An important thing to look for is the Bus Power entry.
| | 03:07 | For example, here under Bus Power we see 500.
| | 03:12 | This indicates that you have a USB 2.0
device, which is much faster than USB 1.1.
| | 03:17 | However, if you see something less
than that, 250 for example,
| | 03:21 | our Apple Pro keyboard has a 250 Bus Power
ready, this means that it is USB 1.1.
| | 03:28 | Why this is important is let's say you have a USB
key drive that you are going to plug into USB port,
| | 03:33 | you want to try to plug that into a USB 2.0
port because transfer will be much faster.
| | 03:38 | If you use USB 1.1 the transfer
rate is going to be very slow.
| | 03:42 | And now the network, the items in the network area give
you a nice overview of how your network is configured
| | 03:48 | and the network interfaces at various addresses.
| | 03:51 | Click Software and you will see what version of the
Mac OS you are running along with its user name.
| | 03:56 | You can even see how long that Mac has been running.
| | 03:59 | We have only been up for 18 minutes but if you are a
typical Mac user you look under here and you will find
| | 04:04 | that your Mac has been up for days
and days and days and that's one
| | 04:07 | of the reasons that we love Macs as much as we do.
| | 04:09 | Below that in the Contents column you will also see
Applications, Extensions, Fonts, Frameworks, Logs,
| | 04:16 | Managed Clients, Preference Panes,
Startup Items and Universal Access.
| | 04:21 | If you are having a problem on Start
Up it is worth your while to look
| | 04:24 | at that Startup Items heading to
see what's running in there.
| | 04:28 | It is possible there are things in there
that you no longer need and can be removed
| | 04:33 | from within your account's login items preferences.
| | 04:36 | Finally, you may be asked to send your System
Profile to Apple to help troubleshoot a problem
| | 04:41 | and you do this by choosing File, Send to Apple.
| | 04:46 | This generates a port that you can then send off to Apple.
| | 04:49 | We are not going to do that because we don't need
for them to know what we are doing with our Mac here.
| | 04:54 | You can also save a copy of your System Profiler report for
sending to other bodies by choosing Save from the File Menu.
| | 05:02 | You will be asked to name your document and then
you can send that file off to another company.
| | 05:08 | For example if you have a problem with say an Adobe product,
you can generate this report, you can send it to Adobe
| | 05:14 | and they can check it out to see if there is something
going on with your Mac that may help solve the problem.
| | 05:19 | And that is our overview and essential
guide to System Profiler.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Disk UtilityUnderstanding Disk Utility| 00:00 | And now we will take a look Disk Utility.
| | 00:03 | Disk Utility is such a versatile utility that it gets an entire
chapter of its own, one lesson isn't enough to do it justice.
| | 00:10 | Versatile, well, yes, let's take a look at
the interface, and that should give you an idea.
| | 00:15 | Scan across the top of the window and you see
entries for verify, for intra, burn, mount, eject,
| | 00:22 | enable journaling, new image convert, resize image
| | 00:25 | and there is a log entry. I will explain what
all this stuff is for, but it gives you an idea
| | 00:30 | of the number of kind of things that Disk Utility can do.
| | 00:34 | To the left, are any volumes attached to your Mac, and this includes
not just hard drives and partitions but mounted disk images
| | 00:41 | and CDs and DVDs.
| | 00:43 | You'll notice that a single drive has at least two entries,
| | 00:47 | one for the drive itself and another below the drive
| | 00:50 | for the partitions on it.
| | 00:52 | If a drive has a single partition meaning that you haven't
split it up into more than a single chunk of storage,
| | 00:57 | it will appear below the drive entry.
| | 01:00 | Now when you select a hard drive's name, you will see information
at the bottom of the screen as to the type of connection.
| | 01:06 | In this case, it's a serial ATA 2 hard drive.
| | 01:10 | The connection type and that tells us whether
it is an internal or an external drive.
| | 01:14 | The connection ID
| | 01:16 | on our Mac Pro, it tells us that it is in drive bay 1.
This is really helpful so that if I need to go inside my Mac
| | 01:22 | and identify a drive, I know oh, good it is
drive bay 1 I will just pull it out of there,
| | 01:26 | shows you the total capacity,
| | 01:27 | the write status
| | 01:29 | for a hard drive that would read and write because the drive is
capable of doing both. If I had to burn a CD in here and that was
| | 01:35 | selected, it would be read-only.
| | 01:37 | The SMART status.
| | 01:39 | SMART is an internal diagnostic that most hard drives have.
| | 01:43 | It's a way of checking on itself to see how it is doing.
| | 01:46 | If you see verified here, everything is good, the drive
is doing well, if you see anything except verified in here,
| | 01:51 | that's not so good. It may indicate that the
drive is on its way out and that's the drive you
| | 01:56 | definitely want to back up and maybe pull out and replace.
| | 02:00 | And finally there is a Partition Map Scheme.
| | 02:04 | I am going to talk about Partition Map Schemes in another lesson.
| | 02:07 | So as you can see there is a lot going on here and so we
need to spend more time with various parts of this utility.
| | 02:12 | In the next lesson we will focus on disk permissions
| | 02:15 | and disk verification and repair.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Verify and repairing with Disk Utility| 00:00 | Earlier we talked about permissions, the ability for
your account to do things forbidden to other accounts.
| | 00:05 | For example, your account is allowed to move
files in and out of folders in your user folder
| | 00:09 | but other accounts aren't allowed to touch these folders.
| | 00:12 | Sometimes these permissions can get mangled and
when they do your Mac can act in unexpected ways.
| | 00:18 | One of the first reasons Mac users turn to the Disk
Utility is so that they can repair permissions.
| | 00:24 | To do this make sure the first data tab is selected
as we have it here, click on your Startup Volume,
| | 00:30 | in this case this is Macintosh HD
and click Repair Disk Permissions.
| | 00:36 | I see no point in clicking Verify Disk Permissions because
it takes just as long to verify as it does to repair
| | 00:42 | and if it finds problems you are
going to click Repair anyway.
| | 00:45 | If there is nothing to fix, Repair
Disk Permissions does nothing.
| | 00:51 | As you can see we had one permission that
was out of whack and it was repaired.
| | 00:55 | Now if you have used a Mac for a long
time you may recall the age-old advice
| | 00:59 | to rebuild your desktop under Mac OS 9 and earlier.
| | 01:02 | This was kind of a voodoo repair
technique that everyone suggested you try
| | 01:06 | but no one was sure if it really did any good.
| | 01:08 | Repair Permissions is a little like that.
| | 01:10 | If your Mac is having problems almost everyone
will suggest that you first repair permissions.
| | 01:15 | It is not a bad idea and at worst it's no help but
certainly not harmful, and on occasion it really can help.
| | 01:22 | For example, after an OS update my Mac
refused to recognize DVDs in its media drive
| | 01:27 | and repairing permissions fix that problem.
| | 01:30 | Now people will sometimes repair
permissions twice, once to do it
| | 01:34 | and again to see if it worked and let's give that a shot.
| | 01:40 | You see that the estimate is sometimes
way off when it first starts.
| | 01:44 | This is a good example, if you see the same
errors crop up twice don't worry about it.
| | 01:49 | Sometimes the Mac OS will throw up these
error messages that can't be fixed.
| | 01:53 | I have yet to see one that indicated a real problem.
| | 01:56 | On the other side of the window you will
see the Verify Disk and Repair Disk buttons.
| | 02:00 | These are for checking out the general health of your Mac.
| | 02:03 | If you have chosen your Mac's startup drive as
we have, the Repair Disk button will be grayed
| | 02:08 | out because the Mac can't repair its own startup drive.
| | 02:11 | However, if you click Verify Disk and a problem crops up you
have the option to boot from your Leopard installation disk,
| | 02:18 | choose Disk Utility from the Utilities
menu and run Repair Disk from there.
| | 02:22 | Let's see how our disk is doing.
| | 02:29 | When you click Verify Disk you can take a
little while for the verification to happen.
| | 02:34 | This is what you want to see, it will tell you what it
has checked and you want to see that green text at the end
| | 02:38 | that says the volume and whatever the name
of your started volume as appears to be okay.
| | 02:43 | This is a good thing.
| | 02:43 | If you see a red message you want to
go in and try to repair your disk.
| | 02:48 | Now Disk Utility's repair feature isn't
the most effective tool out there.
| | 02:52 | There are better tools that I will
discuss when I talk about troubleshooting
| | 02:56 | and such a better tool is Alsoft's Disk Warrior for example.
| | 02:59 | But it is worth a shot as it can often repair niggling
little problems and point out where the bigger problems
| | 03:05 | that it can't fix but some other applications can.
| | 03:09 | Next we will look at formatting
and partitioning your hard drive.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting and partitioning with Disk Utility| 00:00 | Disk Utility is the Mac's Go To tool for formatting
and partitioning hard drives and we are going to work
| | 00:06 | with our Macintosh HD 2 drive so I click the Erase tab and
in the Erase tab you do pretty much what the name suggests.
| | 00:14 | You erase the data from a hard drive or partitioning.
| | 00:17 | When doing so you choose the format for the
volume, with the Volume Format pop-up menu
| | 00:22 | and in nearly every instance you will choose Mac OS Extended
Journal for the format, which is selected by default.
| | 00:29 | If you intend to use the disk with a PC
then click on that and choose MS-DOS FAT
| | 00:36 | and that FAT stands for File Allocation Table.
| | 00:39 | You can also rename the drive here by clicking
in this field and then typing in a new name.
| | 00:45 | Now when erasing a drive or volume you have the
option to erase a lot, more or less thoroughly
| | 00:50 | and you do this by clicking the Security Options button.
| | 00:54 | In the sheet that appears you will see a number of options.
| | 00:56 | The first is don't erase data.
| | 00:58 | What this really does is it erases
any information that allows a user
| | 01:03 | to access the files but it leaves the data in there.
| | 01:06 | A lot of drive utilities can still be
used to recover that data if necessary.
| | 01:10 | Next option is zero out data.
| | 01:13 | When you erase a hard drive what happens is
the Mac will overwrite nonsense on the drive
| | 01:17 | and that nonsense is comprised of
a series of zeroes over the data.
| | 01:21 | This is, it does it once and it is done,
this is not the most secure way to go.
| | 01:25 | There could still be some data left on the drive
that could be recovered by another kind of tool.
| | 01:30 | The next option is 7-Pass Erase this means that
the Mac is going in and erasing that data 7 times
| | 01:37 | by writing those zeroes 7 times over the disk.
| | 01:40 | Note that this takes 7 times longer than zero out data.
| | 01:44 | The final option is 35-Pass Erase.
| | 01:48 | As the name implies this option takes 35 times longer
but it also writes nonsense 35 times over the drive.
| | 01:57 | A lot of people may consider this to be overkill but it
may be very important for you to get rid of this data.
| | 02:02 | For example, you have a computer that you use for work,
you are carrying company's secrets around with you,
| | 02:08 | you need to take your Mac in for repair for example and you
don't want somebody to see this, you have got to get all
| | 02:13 | that stuff off there and make sure it's really gone.
| | 02:16 | You can use this it takes a long time but
that data will really, really be gone.
| | 02:23 | Now when you partition a drive, and that means you
split it into separate volumes that the Mac treats
| | 02:28 | like individual hard drives, you might
erase the drive but not necessarily.
| | 02:32 | It is possible to expand the size of partitions
on the drive as well as add partitions
| | 02:37 | to the drive without erasing the data on it.
| | 02:40 | This is something that was impossible in the past.
| | 02:43 | With the drive you haven't used yet,
you partition it by choosing the number
| | 02:46 | of partitions you want from the Partitions pop-up menu.
| | 02:49 | Currently we have one partition
out there but we can choose two,
| | 02:53 | we can choose 14 if you like, that's
an awful lot of partitions.
| | 02:56 | Let's take it back to the current scheme.
| | 03:00 | Now in the case where I have done
something like this and I click Apply,
| | 03:03 | all the data will be erased and
then the partitions will be created.
| | 03:07 | Now before you partition a drive, click the Options button.
| | 03:11 | This is where you decide what kind
of partitioning scheme is used.
| | 03:14 | If you are going to use this Mac to boot an Intel
Mac, you want to use the GUID Partition Table option.
| | 03:20 | If you will use this hard drive to boot a PowerPC Mac,
choose Apple Partition Map and if you were to use this drive
| | 03:27 | to boot a Windows machine, you have to transfer the
drive for example, from your Mac and put it into a PC,
| | 03:32 | you want to use master boot record, GUID and cancel.
| | 03:38 | We return once again to our current scheme, but let's
suppose that you have a drive that you have already worked
| | 03:43 | with and you would like to add a partition.
| | 03:45 | If you have some free space on the drive it is easily done.
| | 03:49 | Just drag the lower right corner of the volume to
create some free space; you will be able to work
| | 03:55 | with the available space the drive has to offer.
| | 03:58 | Now click the Plus button.
| | 04:00 | This creates a new volume on the drive that
consumes all the space that was on there.
| | 04:05 | If you have done this and you would like to remove
partitions, simply select them and click the Minus button.
| | 04:12 | Any data that was on that partition will
be erased and its space will be empty.
| | 04:16 | You can then resize the partition so that it takes
up the bulk of the hard drive and there you have it,
| | 04:24 | the essentials of formatting and
partitioning a drive on your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring a RAID with Disk Utility| 00:00 | Disk Utility includes Mac OS X's
tools for working with multiple drives
| | 00:04 | so that they appear to the Mac to be a single unit.
| | 00:07 | This is called RAID or Redundant Array
of Independent or Inexpensive Disks.
| | 00:13 | The Mac supports two kinds of RAID
plus a kind of sort of RAID type.
| | 00:18 | The 2 official RAID types are mirrored RAID, this
is a type 1 RAID, and striped RAID, a type 0 RAID.
| | 00:26 | This kind of sort of thing is called a Concatenated Disk Set
and it is known informally as JBOD or Just a Bunch Of Disks
| | 00:35 | and no, I am not kidding, that's really what
the acronym stands for and they work this way.
| | 00:40 | A mirrored RAID set writes your data to 2 or more
disks, each drive contains the exact same data.
| | 00:48 | If one drive dies or is pulled from
the RAID, another will take its place.
| | 00:52 | You would use a mirrored RAID, it
is kind of the ultimate backup.
| | 00:55 | For example, if you are running a server from your Mac
and you can't afford for it to go down for a second
| | 01:00 | because of the drive giving up
the ghost, this is the way to go.
| | 01:04 | Note that the size of the RAID is limited to the size
of the smallest volume, so if you have a 500 GB drive
| | 01:11 | and a 300 GB drive, the RAID can only hold 300
gigabytes because obviously the 300 GB member
| | 01:18 | of the set can't mirror more data than it can hold.
| | 01:21 | A striped RAID splits data among the drives in a set.
| | 01:25 | So for example, half a file may be written to drive A while
the other half maybe written to drive B. The advantage
| | 01:31 | of a striped RAID is that it is fast when you
are writing and reading really large files,
| | 01:36 | huge databases or video files for example.
| | 01:39 | The danger is that if one drive dies, you have lost
access to all your data because it has been split up.
| | 01:46 | A Concatenated Disk Set lets you take
your Mac's drives and combine them
| | 01:50 | so that the storage is available in one virtual drive.
| | 01:53 | For example, you can take 3 to 150 gigabyte hard drives and
combine their storage in a concatenated set so that you wind
| | 02:00 | up with the drive that appears
to the Mac to be 750 gigabytes.
| | 02:04 | To create a RAID just select drives in the left side
of Disk Utility and drag them into the main window.
| | 02:15 | Choose the kind of RAID you want from the RAID
Type pop-up menu and click the Create button.
| | 02:20 | In this case, we have chosen a mirrored
RAID, it tells us what the storage is
| | 02:25 | because the smallest disk we have here is a 320
gigabyte drive which appears to be 298.1 gigabytes,
| | 02:32 | so that will be the largest that this RAID can go.
| | 02:34 | We do have a larger hard drive over here,
but again it's the smallest hard drive
| | 02:39 | that will determine the size of the RAID.
| | 02:41 | A striped RAID.
| | 02:42 | We have more storage available to us because it's
going to split the data up between the 2 drives.
| | 02:48 | And finally a concatenated set is where it combines
the storage so we end up with a much larger RAID set.
| | 02:54 | So for example, we will create a mirrored RAID
set, and we simply click Create to create the RAID.
| | 03:02 | Note that all the data on the drives will be erased
when you create a mirrored or a striped RAID, however,
| | 03:07 | when you create a concatenated set,
you don't lose any of your data,
| | 03:11 | the drives just appear to be a much larger drive to the Mac.
| | 03:16 | And there's our RAID, it appears as a single
volume on a Mac and the storage is available to us.
| | 03:22 | And to take a portion of the RAID
offline, click the Minus button.
| | 03:25 | If you would like to get rid of that
volume altogether, simply click Delete.
| | 03:30 | You will be told that the RAID is going to be deleted,
and you end up with 2 separate hard drives again.
| | 03:37 | And just for fun, let's make a concatenated set.
| | 03:45 | Click Create, want to combine those, and here is
our concatenated drive on the right and you notice
| | 03:58 | that we have much more storage here because the
storage capacity of both drives has been combined.
| | 04:02 | And we are going to check the RAID, and we are ready
to move on to creating disk images in Disk Utility.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating disk images with Disk Utility| 00:00 | When you download a hunk of Mac software, it
sometimes arrives in the form of a disk image,
| | 00:04 | which is identified by its .dmg extension.
| | 00:08 | Disk Utility has the ability to create disk
images, which can come in handy but how so?
| | 00:13 | Well let's follow along.
| | 00:15 | One of the most immediately useful things you can do with
disk images is copy a mounted volume or folder on your Mac.
| | 00:21 | For example, suppose you just got a CD ROM based
game for your kid, and that kid is likely to smear it
| | 00:28 | with peanut butter and honey, meaning
you have to buy another copy of the disk.
| | 00:32 | You can create a disk image of that CD and mount it; as far
as the Mac is concerned the mounted disk image is the CD
| | 00:39 | so you can safely tuck that disk away from
your kid while still allowing him to use it.
| | 00:44 | To this kind of thing insert a CD and select it in Disk
Utility, choose File, New, and then Disk Image From
| | 00:54 | and this will be the name of your media drive.
| | 00:56 | In the sheet that appears you have a number of options.
| | 00:58 | You can leave it as compressed, if you are
copying a disk and you want to do it bit by bit
| | 01:03 | for example an installation disk of some kind,
you might choose DVD/CD Master, this is what I do.
| | 01:09 | You can also do Read Only, let's try
Read Only, and encryption should be none.
| | 01:14 | Click Save, and we will create a disk image
on the desktop and now we have our disk image.
| | 01:28 | Now this can take a while, we sped this up so you
wouldn't have to sit through the creation process
| | 01:33 | but it maybe a good idea if you particularly
have a DVD that you are creating an image from.
| | 01:37 | Start the process, go have a cup of coffee and by the
time you come back everything should be ready to go.
| | 01:43 | Once you have this disk image, you can mount it simply
by selecting it in Disk Utility and clicking Open.
| | 01:53 | And here it is.
| | 01:56 | And we drag that into the trash to unmount it or you
can simply double click on the image on the Finder.
| | 02:02 | I will skip that, and here it is again.
| | 02:07 | As I said you can also create a disk image from a folder,
to do so, choose File, New, Disk Image From Folder,
| | 02:17 | navigate to our Documents folder, let's take
this Music folder here and we click Image.
| | 02:25 | Now here's something interesting that you can do.
| | 02:27 | In the sheet that appears choose Compressed and
then one of the encryption options and click Save.
| | 02:35 | You will be asked for a password
for this disk image and click OK.
| | 02:52 | Great, so now we have our image, so what good is this?
| | 02:55 | You have now created a compressed image
file that requires a password to open.
| | 03:00 | You can now pass this file along to someone you trust
without fears that other people will be able to open it
| | 03:05 | or don't pass it along and keep it as a password
protected archive that only you can open.
| | 03:10 | Speaking of password protection, you can use this disk
image capability to create password protected virtual
| | 03:17 | and expandable volumes on your Mac and you do it like this.
| | 03:21 | Click the New Image button at the top of the window.
| | 03:24 | In the sheet that appears, enter a name for your archive.
| | 03:28 | In the Volume Size pop up menu, choose the size of the
archive you would like, we will make this one 500 megabytes.
| | 03:35 | From the Encryption pop-up menu choose the
kind of encryption that you would like,
| | 03:41 | and from the Image Format pop-up
menu choose Sparse Disk Image.
| | 03:46 | Click Create and once again I am prompted
for a password so I will enter one.
| | 03:54 | Now note I am going to disable the option
to remember password in my Keychain
| | 04:00 | and the reason I do this is because
I want this to be encrypted.
| | 04:04 | If somebody sits down on my computer while I am using
it if I have wandered away for a bit they come in
| | 04:09 | and they find my image and double click on
it, they will be prompted for a password.
| | 04:13 | If I remember that password in the Keychain this
doesn't help me very much if I leave the computer
| | 04:17 | and somebody double clicks on it because up comes the image,
because it is in the Keychain and they can access my files,
| | 04:23 | and now I will click OK to create
that disk image, and there we are.
| | 04:32 | So at this point I can drag files
into this disk image if I like.
| | 04:35 | Once I am finished with it I just drag it into the trash.
| | 04:38 | Now somebody walks up to my Mac later and says, "Oh, your
files, let's just check that out" and they double click
| | 04:44 | on it, they are prompted for the password
that I have put into the disk image.
| | 04:48 | Well let's see if we just do share password, how about that?
| | 04:54 | Okay, gee, I still have to enter the password so you can
see how secure this is and that's a real benefit to you.
| | 05:00 | Another benefit of this sparse
image is that it's expandable.
| | 05:03 | Regular disk images hog all the space you have allotted to
them so that if you have created 500 MB image for example,
| | 05:10 | that's how much space it will take up on your hard drive.
| | 05:13 | A sparse image understands that you can have as much space
as you have given it if needed but it will tell the Mac OS
| | 05:19 | that it is only as big as the sum of the files in
it, and of course thanks to the encryption option,
| | 05:25 | you now have that level of extra protection.
| | 05:28 | And that's how you create disk images in
Disk Utility, up next, burning images.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Burning CDs with Disk Utility| 00:00 | You have got enough experience with the Mac
to know that you can insert a writable CD
| | 00:03 | or DVD in your Mac SuperDrive drag files
to it and then record them or burn them
| | 00:09 | as we save the computer disk into the disk.
| | 00:12 | So why does this utility feature a Burn button?
| | 00:15 | Well for a few reasons.
| | 00:16 | The first is that you can burn disk images to disk
that the CD or DVD has the same contents as the image.
| | 00:23 | This is one way to create a duplicate master of a CD or DVD.
| | 00:28 | To do this just select a disk image,
right click on it and choose Burn.
| | 00:34 | If the image isn't on the desktop and therefore
it doesn't appear in the list of images inside
| | 00:39 | of Disk Utility you can choose Images, Burn
and then locate that image wherever it maybe.
| | 00:48 | At that point simply click Burn.
| | 00:51 | Another reason is that unlike the Finder you
can burn multisession disks with Disk Utility.
| | 00:56 | This means you can have a CDR disk
and burn to it more than ones.
| | 01:00 | To perform this trick, do this.
| | 01:03 | In the Finder put the stuff you want to burn into a folder
and then in Disk Utility choose new image from folder.
| | 01:09 | Navigate to the folder that has the burnable items and
save it as a disk image so we will do something like this.
| | 01:16 | New image folder, documents we
choose, music and then the image.
| | 01:20 | Fortunately we have already done this so we have
our music disk image here so right click on that,
| | 01:27 | choose Burn then click the triangle
that appears in the sheet.
| | 01:32 | You now see that there is an option
called Leave Disk Appendable.
| | 01:36 | Select that and that leaves that
disk open it's not finished.
| | 01:41 | At this point simply click Burn to burn the disk.
| | 01:49 | And it has burned successfully.
| | 01:52 | When you next want to burn to that disk follow
the same procedure where you create a disk image
| | 01:57 | of the folder and then choose to burn it.
| | 02:02 | We insert the disk and you will notice
that the Burn button has changed to append.
| | 02:08 | When you do this and then later insert the
disk 2 CD icons will appear on the desktop
| | 02:14 | and each holds the contents of its own disk image.
| | 02:23 | And I will skip verification because I
know this is going to work beautifully.
| | 02:26 | I click OK.
| | 02:28 | Now kick up the disk and insert it again and when I do
you will see that we now have 2 disks on the desktop,
| | 02:38 | a music and our other disk image that we burnt.
| | 02:42 | Now let me kick that out in anticipation of one more tip.
| | 02:48 | Finally the last reason for the
Burn command is rewritable disks.
| | 02:52 | If you have such a disk and would like to erase
it just insert it with Disk Utility running.
| | 03:00 | Select the Disk in Disk Utility.
| | 03:03 | Click the Erase Tab and choose one of the erase options.
| | 03:07 | You can do it quickly or completely.
| | 03:11 | And that concludes our look at the wonders of disk utility.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. The TerminalIntroducing the Terminal| 00:00 | At one time Mac users had to laugh at people running DOS
on their PCs because these poor schmos had to type commands
| | 00:06 | into their computers in order for them to do something
| | 00:08 | something very simple like save or copy
a file. I mean how primitive is that?
| | 00:13 | And then along comes OS X with its UNIX underpinnings and the
ability for us to access that UNIX stuff by typing commands
| | 00:19 | into our computers.
| | 00:20 | What was once archaic is now powerful.
| | 00:23 | And truly although the Mac's graphical user interface is mighty,
mighty, there are things you can do in the command line that
| | 00:29 | are either really difficult or nigh-
on impossible with the Mac's GUI.
| | 00:34 | And the avenue to that command line
| | 00:36 | is the Terminal application.
| | 00:38 | In the next couple of lessons I am going to
provide a very basic introduction to Terminal.
| | 00:42 | And I call it basic because the workings of UNIX
are a subject well outside the scope of this title.
| | 00:48 | My job is to show you a little bit
about what lurks underneath the surface
| | 00:52 | and offer a few tips for putting Terminal to good use,
| | 00:55 | all the while understanding that
Terminal is daunting to a lot of people.
| | 00:59 | Just understand that Terminal is just another way to view
the workings of the Mac OS and I will show you what I mean.
| | 01:07 | Here's my Home folder as viewed through the Mac's GUI.
| | 01:11 | Now let's look at it in Terminal,
| | 01:14 | and here it is.
| | 01:15 | Shows me the desktop, downloads, movies, picture, sites,
documents, library, music, public. It's all in text here.
| | 01:22 | It's in text and pictures.
| | 01:24 | Again all Terminal is doing is giving us
access via text to the guts of the Mac OS.
| | 01:30 | In the next lesson we will look
at some Terminal navigation commands.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Essential Terminal commands| 00:00 | When you first open Terminal you don't
see a lot that's very helpful to you.
| | 00:03 | You learn about when you last logged in and you will see
the name of your computer followed by a ~, your user name
| | 00:11 | and a command prompt which is this dollar sign that you see.
| | 00:14 | The ~ is shorthand for your user folder.
| | 00:18 | UNIX and terminal are all about shorthand so Unix was
developed in the days when you had to type everything
| | 00:24 | and people back in those Stone Age days were just as lazy as
we are today and didn't want to spend a lot of time typing.
| | 00:31 | So they developed shorthand convenience for doing things.
| | 00:34 | I am going to show you a couple of those.
| | 00:36 | To see the contents of the directory or in the Macs terms
folder that you are in, you type ls followed by Return
| | 00:44 | and you see the contents of the
directory that you are currently in.
| | 00:49 | Now suppose I want to look inside another directory.
| | 00:52 | I type CD followed by a space and
then the name of the directory.
| | 00:57 | And I will use Documents.
| | 01:01 | This colon followed by Documents tells me that I am
inside the Documents directory inside my home folder
| | 01:09 | and to prove it again, ls and that
shows me the contents of that directory.
| | 01:15 | When you are in this view you can discover something
important about the contents of this particular directory.
| | 01:20 | Anything in the directory that is
a file will have a file extension.
| | 01:25 | For example, .vcf indicates that this is a file.
| | 01:30 | Anything that does not have an extension is a folder so for
example for Safari is a folder within my Documents folder
| | 01:38 | and in case you are wondering what the CD
command is for it stands for Change Directory.
| | 01:42 | Now but wait I forgot where I am.
| | 01:44 | No problem to view a path of where you currently are
type pwd, which stands for Print Working Directory.
| | 01:52 | What you end up with is a written path of
where you are in this case within Users,
| | 01:56 | my Users folder and the Documents folder.
| | 01:59 | Okay so it's dragged to change directories
and type ls to see what's in them.
| | 02:03 | Fine here's a shortcut you can type a command followed by
a path to cause that command to affect what's in the path.
| | 02:10 | So if I want to see what's inside my users download
folders I would type in ls users/myshortname/Downloads
| | 02:25 | and again this is case sensitive so downloads is
capitalized you must capitalize downloads and press Return.
| | 02:32 | And here we see the contents of the Downloads folder.
| | 02:35 | You notice after the colon I have documents here.
| | 02:38 | So that indicates I am still in my
documents folder but I have been able
| | 02:41 | to use the ls command to look into another directory.
| | 02:45 | Let's go back to the root level of my user folder so I
type CD ~ return and that takes me back to my user folder.
| | 02:54 | Now once I am in here I can use another kind of shortcut.
| | 02:57 | If I am in my home folder I can simply type CD
and then the name of the directory that I want.
| | 03:02 | So CD Documents, press Return and in my Documents
folder so I didn't have to type out the full path name
| | 03:12 | because terminal knows I am already
in my home folder and it can see
| | 03:15 | that the Documents folder is relative
to my current position.
| | 03:19 | Now let's suppose I want to back up a level you can
type CD space followed by two periods and then return.
| | 03:26 | And here again I am back into my user folder.
| | 03:30 | You can go to another user's account home
folder by typing CD ~ and then the user name.
| | 03:36 | In this case we will do CD ~ lynda.com
which is another user on this machine.
| | 03:45 | And here is lynda.com's admin short name.
| | 03:49 | Go back to my directory ~ and I am back into my home folder.
| | 03:55 | You can also use the tab key as a shortcut.
| | 03:57 | To move within a directory just type the first
few letters of the path name and press tab.
| | 04:02 | So if I wanted to type CD and go to my documents folder
I could type doc, press Tab and it fills in the rest
| | 04:12 | of the path for me because you can see it on that level.
| | 04:15 | We will erase that because we go there right now.
| | 04:17 | Now you are looking for a full proof way to enter a
path just switch over to the Finder and drag the folder
| | 04:22 | or file you want the path to into terminal and
its path is printed in the terminal window.
| | 04:27 | So let's say for example CD I will open my hard
drive and I would like to go to the library folder.
| | 04:35 | I will just drag it in here and the path is drawn for me.
| | 04:39 | Press return and now I am inside the Library as evidence by
the ls command and there are the contents of the library.
| | 04:47 | So we will go back to my user folder
okay so now you know how to enter paths
| | 04:55 | and move around so let's do a couple
of useful things from within terminal.
| | 04:58 | The first thing you can do is open a
file or you can launch an application.
| | 05:02 | If I want to actually run a program or launch
a file I just type Open and then the path name
| | 05:10 | to the file or application that I want to launch.
| | 05:12 | In this case we will go to the Applications folder at
the root level of the hard drive and open Text Edit.
| | 05:17 | So to indicate with the root level/applications/textedit
followed by its extension, if it's an application followed
| | 05:32 | with .app Return, and TextEdit opens for us.
| | 05:36 | While we are in there let's create a document
because I want to use this as a test file.
| | 05:42 | Save it, save it to the desktop
and there we are quit TextEdit.
| | 05:50 | Now suppose I want to copy this file from one location to
another I use the CP command to do that and use it this way.
| | 05:57 | CP and then the path name to where the document currently is
I am just going to drag this in to create that path followed
| | 06:06 | by a space and then the path name to where
you would like the document to end up.
| | 06:11 | We will put this in the documents folder/users/documents
followed by the return key and we will look
| | 06:27 | at the documents folder and see if it is actually there.
| | 06:29 | And here it is, here is the test file that
we created, come out of that and close.
| | 06:40 | Now suppose you had a folder on
the desktop and I wanted to move
| | 06:43 | that to get a folder anywhere and you wanted to move it.
| | 06:45 | Let's see what happens if I do that
and I try to use the same technique.
| | 06:49 | Create a new folder I will take my test file and I
will put it in there and I will try the same thing,
| | 06:58 | CP path to the folder where I want
to move it and I press Return.
| | 07:18 | Ah but look what happens test folder
is a directory it's not copied.
| | 07:22 | This indicates that you cannot use the CP command by
itself to move a directory you have to do something else
| | 07:29 | and what you have to do is add a flag to that command.
| | 07:32 | Now a flag is an addendum to the command so
the command is the big deal saying please copy
| | 07:37 | but a flag it's a little addendum it says ah
| | 07:40 | but also when you are copying I also need
you to execute the following instructions.
| | 07:45 | In this case we are going to add
something called a recursive tag.
| | 07:49 | Meaning I want you to take this item and
everything in it and I want you to copy that.
| | 07:54 | And that's how you move a directory so in this case
CP -R then drag the thing in so that you have its path
| | 08:07 | where you want to put it/documents return.
| | 08:21 | Let's check our documents folder.
| | 08:25 | And here it is, here is our test
folder we will do it one more time
| | 08:32 | because we have one more command we are going to look at.
| | 08:34 | Let's suppose you don't want to copy but
rather you would like to move something.
| | 08:38 | For this you would use the mv command
again, shorthand for move.
| | 08:43 | So we type mv.
| | 08:44 | We will drag our test folder.
| | 08:48 | I know what you are thinking now wait
you didn't put a recursive flag in there,
| | 08:51 | if you are moving something you
don't need to use a recursive flag
| | 08:55 | so it's not consistent of space
where we are going to put it.
| | 09:06 | And we press Return and it's gone and let's hope
| | 09:10 | that because it's gone it has moved
somewhere where we wanted it to go.
| | 09:13 | And sure enough there it is because of course we typed the
right command and it's exactly where we wanted it to be.
| | 09:21 | And great googly-moogly, is there more?
| | 09:25 | As I said this is the very basics.
| | 09:28 | I showed you the very basics of getting around in the
terminal, doing a couple of very simple operations
| | 09:33 | like copying and moving things of course
this is much easier to do in the Mac's GUI.
| | 09:39 | However once you start ganging together more
complex commands you can do some amazing things.
| | 09:44 | And where in the world you learn about all these commands?
| | 09:46 | Well actually the Mac itself will tell you what some of
them are and it will explain them to and this is done
| | 09:52 | through something called the man pages and the man pages
are exactly what we are going to look at in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the manuals| 00:00 | If you are going to get seriously into Terminal it
will help to have a UNIX reference guide at your side.
| | 00:04 | However, before you dash off to the book store check
out the help that Terminal itself has to offer.
| | 00:10 | That help is the man command.
| | 00:12 | As you might suspect
| | 00:13 | man is shorthand for manual. So let's give it a go.
| | 00:16 | To see if I was right about some of the
commands I just told you about type man,
| | 00:21 | space, ls and press Return.
| | 00:24 | The text that appears is the manual page for the ls command.
| | 00:27 | You can see that it gives you the command's name,
| | 00:30 | a synopsis of the command,
| | 00:32 | and this lists any flags or ancillary commands you
can append to the command to make it more useful.
| | 00:37 | For example, in the ls command, you can
append a "-G" flag that colorizes the text,
| | 00:43 | which differentiates directories from files
| | 00:46 | and then a description follows.
| | 00:48 | To scroll down press Return,
| | 00:50 | and move down an entire page,
| | 00:53 | press the spacebar.
| | 00:55 | To leave the man page and return to the command prompt,
| | 00:58 | press Q.
| | 00:59 | If you like more information on man
you can ask man itself by typing
| | 01:03 | man.
| | 01:04 | Men and Return.
| | 01:06 | And by pressing the spacebar we can
see all the wonderful is, that is man.
| | 01:11 | Once again to leave the man page, we will press Q
| | 01:14 | and that's the lowdown on man.
| | 01:16 | Up next a look at some useful Terminal tricks.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| More useful Terminal commands| 00:00 | We have looked a very little at Terminal,
other than feeling geekier for it
| | 00:03 | and probably a little confused, what good is it?
| | 00:06 | Well quite honestly, for a lot
of people it is no good at all.
| | 00:09 | The Mac's GUI was developed in parts so you would never
have to do this kind of thing but there are occasions
| | 00:15 | when the Terminal is your one way of getting
something done and we will look at a couple
| | 00:19 | of those things the Terminal does
to make your life a little easier.
| | 00:22 | First, let's look at the Trash.
| | 00:24 | There may come a time when your trash simply won't
empty, you have done everything you can including holding
| | 00:30 | down the option key while attempting to empty the
trash and the file within it just won't budge.
| | 00:35 | There is a Terminal command that will do this for you.
| | 00:38 | It is sudo rm -rf ~ /.TRASH/*.
| | 00:43 | Now before I invoke this command
let me tell you what it does.
| | 00:56 | Sudo some people call 'soodoo', some people call 'sudo',
means you have granted yourself temporary super user powers.
| | 01:09 | This is very, very powerful so you want to
be careful wherever you issue this command.
| | 01:16 | 'Rm' means remove, '-rf' generally means don't bug me
about it, and ~ /.TRASH/*' is the path to the trash.
| | 01:28 | That * is a wild card that means anything that
happens in here, I want you to take care of.
| | 01:34 | Again be very careful when using this sudo command.
| | 01:36 | It grants you the kind of power that allows you
to destroy every bit of data on your Mac easily.
| | 01:42 | If you use this command type it exactly this way-
sudo rm -rf ~ /.TRASH/* and let's watch what happens.
| | 01:48 | I am asked for a password, and look
down here; the trash is now empty.
| | 01:56 | What this command really says is no kidding around,
I don't care what's wrong that you somehow can't seem
| | 02:09 | to empty the trash, I want you to
do it and I want you to do it now.
| | 02:13 | And it will happen this is how powerful the Terminal can
be particularly when you are using that sudo command.
| | 02:20 | And let's move on, in order to do so I
want to put a few things on the desktop.
| | 02:24 | Now let's say someone wants to bar your Mac and you haven't
time to create a user account for them but you have a lot
| | 02:29 | of stuff on your desktop for you
would rather that person not get into.
| | 02:33 | With this simple command, you can hide it all, just
type "chflags hidden ~/DESKTOP/*" and press Return.
| | 02:43 | With this simple command everything
on the desktop is suddenly hidden.
| | 02:48 | To undo your work you just type
"chflags nohidden ~/Desktop/*"
| | 02:56 | and return, and your files are now back in view.
| | 03:00 | You haven't done anything except a
flip of visibility flag within Leopard.
| | 03:10 | You flip it off and everything is gone,
flip it back on and everything returns,
| | 03:17 | you put this back in your documents folder.
| | 03:19 | Here's another trick, let's say you are just a little
too lazy to open iCal to look at this month's calendar,
| | 03:25 | go and just type cal, return and
there is the month's calendar.
| | 03:33 | One moment, hidden inside Terminal is a Text
Adventure Game, and to access it all you have
| | 03:46 | to do is type emacs -batch -l dunnet and press Return.
| | 03:56 | If you have been using computers for a long time
you recognize this as an interactive fiction game.
| | 04:08 | The idea is that long before we had these cool looking games
with 3D and things moving all over the place, we used text.
| | 04:15 | These were little stories and you would get a little
bit of the plot and then you would have to type
| | 04:19 | in commands in order to move through the game.
| | 04:22 | Most of these were things like pick this up, look at it, go
east, go west and that's how you navigated around the game.
| | 04:29 | For example, here we have there is a
shovel here, let's examine a shovel.
| | 04:38 | It tells us it's a normal shovel with
a price tag attached that says $19.99.
| | 04:44 | Now honestly there are a lot of things you can
do with this, let's say hit Control with shovel.
| | 04:52 | It is going to tell you, "I have no
idea what you are talking about."
| | 04:54 | So it is very rudimentary, in this case it is
just the road goes east and so we just type east
| | 05:01 | and we move elsewhere into the
game, it tells us where we are.
| | 05:04 | If you want to leave the game we can just type
Control+Z and we are back once again at the prompt.
| | 05:12 | There are a couple of silly little tips in their
butt there are a couple of very important ones
| | 05:16 | as well particularly tossing the trash
when it doesn't seem to be any other way
| | 05:20 | to do it and that wraps up our look at Terminal.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. PermissionsChanging permissions| 00:00 | As I have mentioned a couple of times OS X is designed
| | 00:02 | so that multiple users can operate
the Mac and not bump into each other.
| | 00:06 | This is exhibited by each user having a
separate account and a work environment.
| | 00:10 | You can see what that looks like.
| | 00:12 | By going into the user's folder at the root level of
the hard drive, as you can see I am an administrator,
| | 00:17 | I have my account here, but we have
other accounts on this Mac as well.
| | 00:23 | For example, I go into the lynda.com admin account
and you see that account has its own environment
| | 00:29 | and as these red icons indicate those areas
are locked out; I am not allowed to touch them.
| | 00:35 | Now each user has special powers to perform certain
actions and the admin has his or her own set of powers.
| | 00:42 | One of the actions that administrative users
can perform is to change permissions so that he
| | 00:47 | or she has access to previously forbidden files.
| | 00:51 | Now why would you want to do this, well let's suppose you
have used Migration Assistant to move files from an old Mac
| | 00:56 | to a new one, or from a hard drive
running Tiger to one using Leopard.
| | 01:01 | It is possible that during that transition some
other permissions were mucked up to the point
| | 01:06 | where you don't have access to those files when
you used to and you need to have access again,
| | 01:11 | or you need to get to the files inside
another user's account but those files are
| | 01:16 | as indicated by those red icons, locked by default.
| | 01:19 | We will now work with the Permissions folder in another
user's account to see how to change those permissions.
| | 01:24 | We will go back to our lynda.com admin account, double
click on it and let's look in the Documents folder.
| | 01:31 | I select it and I press Cmd+I to
expose the information window.
| | 01:35 | Down at the bottom you will see sharing and permissions
and you can see who has permissions to do what.
| | 01:42 | The LDC admin user can read and write, everyone has no
access and that's why we see the red forbidden icon there,
| | 01:51 | but I am an admin user and I can change
these permissions if I want to and I do.
| | 01:56 | To do so I click the Lock icon, I enter my admin
password, click OK and now I have the ability
| | 02:04 | to change the permissions on this folder.
| | 02:06 | To do so, I click the Plus button, this now shows a window
| | 02:10 | that includes not only Address Book entries
but also users and groups on this Mac.
| | 02:15 | In this case here I am Christopher Breen.
| | 02:19 | I can grant myself access to this to change things or I
can give all administrators on this computer to do things
| | 02:25 | or I can give individual users that kind of power.
| | 02:28 | I am just going to restrict this
power to me and choose Select.
| | 02:32 | Now I have been added as someone who
can do something with this folder.
| | 02:36 | Currently and by default you are granted a read-only access
but if I click and hold on that entry, I can also have read
| | 02:42 | and write privileges and that's what I want right now.
| | 02:45 | Now that I have that I can open
this folder and see its contents.
| | 02:50 | If I try to open another one of these folders
that's locked to me, I am told "I am sorry,
| | 02:55 | you don't have sufficient access privileges.
| | 02:56 | You may not touch this."
| | 02:58 | But I can get in here.
| | 02:59 | Now let's look at the document inside and see
what kind of privileges there are there, Cmd+I,
| | 03:05 | and I have access to read and write this as well.
| | 03:09 | Now something may occur that if you have folders within
folders within folders within folders that you find
| | 03:15 | as you dig down a couple of layers
that you don't have access to things.
| | 03:19 | I do have access to the Documents folder, I am okay
with this, but if there were several folders in here,
| | 03:24 | I might discover that I dig down a couple,
I try to open it or use a document within
| | 03:28 | and it tells me I am sorry you
do not have the access to this
| | 03:31 | because you only have access up
the line but not down this far.
| | 03:34 | What I can do in this case is choose from
the Tools menu apply to enclosed folders
| | 03:40 | and what this does then changes the
permissions everything down the line.
| | 03:44 | So all the folders that are contained
within a folder are then changed
| | 03:48 | so that I have permission to do anything I like with them.
| | 03:51 | Now if I have made a change and then decide
you know I really don't want to have this kind
| | 03:55 | of privilege all the time, I needed to get in
here to change something on say, my wife's account
| | 03:59 | or my daughter's account, I want to flip that back so that I
don't normally have access to it that's easily done as well
| | 04:05 | from the Tools menu you just choose Revert
Changes and you see here in this account,
| | 04:11 | it has changed back to the red forbidden icon.
| | 04:13 | I try to double click on it and it says
you don't have privileges to do that,
| | 04:17 | and things are back to the way they were, and
that's what you can do as an administrator.
| | 04:23 | In the next lesson I am going to show
you something about the root user.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Enabling the root user| 00:00 | In regard to permissions and access the
court of last resort is the Root User.
| | 00:04 | If you can't find a way to manipulate a file to your
liking, you can do what you want as the Root User.
| | 00:09 | For now, just watch and learn and I will tell
you how dicey this is a little bit later.
| | 00:14 | Should you really need to do this, here are the steps.
| | 00:18 | Go to the Utilities folder, launch the
Directory Utility, click the lock icon to unlock,
| | 00:25 | and enter your administrator's password, click OK.
| | 00:28 | From the Edit menu choose Enable Root User.
| | 00:32 | Go back to the Edit menu and select Change Root
Password, enter a password and verify, click OK,
| | 00:42 | you can now quit Directory Utility, we close this
window and now we will logout and we log back in.
| | 00:48 | When we log back in we are going to be
looking for a new user called 'other'.
| | 00:55 | We have now logged in as the Root User and
this is what the root account looks like.
| | 00:59 | It looks very much like what you see when you
first launched your Mac for the first time.
| | 01:04 | There are a few things missing for example, there is no
Documents folder because one has not been created in root
| | 01:09 | and by anything I like, I mean you have access to
everything on the Mac, we will just take a look.
| | 01:14 | We go on to users, look there are no
forbidden icons on any of this stuff.
| | 01:20 | You can go into any folder that
you like and do what you want.
| | 01:24 | This also includes the Mac's own system
files and these are files you should not muck
| | 01:30 | with unless you really, really know what you are doing.
| | 01:33 | For example, you have looked something up on the internet,
| | 01:35 | you are having a real problem you know exactly the file you
need to deal with, you can't find any other way to do it,
| | 01:41 | and accessing the Root User is the only way to do that.
| | 01:44 | In that case fine, do what you need to do and then get
out and the reason you need to get out and not muck
| | 01:49 | with things is because you could without much effort
make your Mac unusable until you reformat your drive
| | 01:56 | and lose your data along the way and then reinstall Leopard.
| | 01:59 | So this is what root looks like, we are going to
get out of root now by logging out and logging back
| | 02:04 | in to our regular account at which point we
are going to disable root because we have done
| | 02:08 | with what we need doing and don't want to leave that on.
| | 02:13 | And now we are back in our regular account
and our job is to disable Root User
| | 02:17 | because we don't want to leave that option open.
| | 02:19 | Utilities, Directory Utility, Edit menu, Disable Root
User and we click the lock icon in case somebody wanders
| | 02:28 | by the Mac and thinks "Aha, look I can get
into root and do all kinds of terrible things"
| | 02:33 | and we definitely don't want that to happen.
| | 02:36 | And that's the ins and outs of enabling and
more importantly disabling the Root User.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. AutomatorAutomator essentials| 00:00 | Back in the old days Apple released AppleScript a kind of
programming language that Apple boasted anyone could use
| | 00:06 | because it was written in plain English.
| | 00:08 | We will see how just plain English that is.
| | 00:17 | Problem is, that just because a command includes the
phrase set user input to display dialog "enter some
| | 00:25 | message text:"& return & return &"
| | 00:30 | minimum character size and on and on and on,
| | 00:34 | doesn't mean that it is comprehensible to the vast majority of
Mac users. A lot of non programmer Mac users have toyed with
| | 00:40 | AppleScript but the majority have done no more than that.
Although the inclusion of pre made AppleScripts has been a boon in
| | 00:46 | such applications as Mail and iCal,
| | 00:48 | a solution for giving users the power to create
their own automated actions was still missing.
| | 00:53 | That is until Automator came along.
| | 00:59 | Automator puts a friendly face on Macintosh automation.
| | 01:03 | Coupled with AppleScript it can be incredibly powerful
| | 01:06 | but you don't need to know AppleScript
in order to get some use from it.
| | 01:09 | In the next few lessons,
| | 01:10 | we'll look at how you go about making
Automator workflows. Along the way,
| | 01:14 | we will build a couple of useful things.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an Automator workflow| 00:01 | Let's start by getting familiar
with the Automator interface.
| | 00:03 | The follow up pane is the Automator library.
| | 00:07 | It includes entries for common applications and tasks.
| | 00:10 | For example, if you tend to manipulate files
and folders, click the Files and Folders entry,
| | 00:15 | if you want to do something with music
and iTunes, the Music entry is for you.
| | 00:20 | When you click on a library item a series of
actions appear in the Actions pane to the right.
| | 00:25 | Select an action and the description of that
action appears at the bottom left of the window.
| | 00:31 | The big empty space to the right is where you drag
actions to build workflows and a workflow is nothing more
| | 00:36 | than a series of steps or actions for performing a test.
| | 00:39 | For example, you may want to automatically
convert any image placed
| | 00:43 | in a particular folder to the JPEG
format and then resize it.
| | 00:47 | A workflow is made up of the steps necessary to do that.
| | 00:50 | To place an action in the workflow simply click it and
drag it in, okay so let's do exactly what I suggested.
| | 00:58 | I will make a workflow that takes images tossed
into it and converts them to JPEG and resizes them.
| | 01:04 | So let's get ready, first thing I want to do is resize
the window because I need to work with the desktop
| | 01:09 | and I will create a file on the
desktop and I will call it original.
| | 01:15 | Let's put some images in there.
| | 01:18 | I have some in my Documents folder and there I go.
| | 01:29 | Now click Files & Folders in the Library Pane and I want
to Get Specified Finder Items; drag it into the workflow.
| | 01:38 | I click Add, and I navigate to my original folder
because this is the folder I want to work with.
| | 01:44 | I click Add and I am ready to go.
| | 01:46 | Now that you know the hard way let me show you
the easy way, click the X to get rid of that,
| | 01:51 | just drag that folder directly into the
workflow and Automator is smart enough
| | 01:54 | to know this is what you want to work with.
| | 01:57 | Now you need to tell Automator to do something with items
put in this folder, so you select Get Folder Contents.
| | 02:03 | You want to convert your images, right, okay so choose
Photos and then change type of images and drag that in.
| | 02:13 | At this point Automator looking out for your interest says
I see you want to manipulate these images and so would you
| | 02:19 | like to make a copy first so you don't mess with the
originals, in this case yes, we do, so we click Add.
| | 02:27 | And we have an additional action that we
didn't ask for and that is Copy Finder items.
| | 02:32 | Well we need somewhere to copy those Finder items too,
so let's create another folder and we call it Convert.
| | 02:40 | Drag that right onto the pop-up menu and the
convert folder appears wherever you want it.
| | 02:46 | Getting close to the end oh we have one more
step, we would also like to scale those images.
| | 02:51 | We still have photo selected, we go down to
the bottom of the list and here's scale images.
| | 02:56 | We add it to the bottom of the workflow, again it is
asking, I see that you are trying to manipulate images,
| | 03:02 | do you want to save the originals, we are
already going to do that so we don't need
| | 03:05 | to worry about that' why we click Don't Add.
| | 03:07 | And finally how are we going to resize our images, pixels
or by percentage, in this case I would like to choose pixels
| | 03:14 | and we will enter 640, let's go back
a step and look at type of images.
| | 03:22 | I said I wanted JPEG images; I already have TIF
images so from that pop-up menu I choose JPEG.
| | 03:28 | And it appears that our workflow is ready, in order to
execute it we just click Run and watch what happens.
| | 03:36 | Let's take a look inside the convert
folder and watch what Automator does.
| | 03:44 | It is converting our TIF images into JPEG after copying
them into this folder and as you can see at the bottom,
| | 03:50 | it is telling us that it is scaling them.
| | 03:55 | Here's my image in preview and
it tells me indeed it was scaled.
| | 03:59 | It's now 640 as I asked it to be.
| | 04:09 | Let's do one more thing; this workflow will be a
whole lot more useful if we don't have to shove files
| | 04:14 | into a particular folder and then push
the Run button whenever we wanted to work.
| | 04:18 | Therefore let's find a quicker way to do what we want.
| | 04:22 | We will delete all the actions prior to copy Finder items,
| | 04:27 | and to do that expand our workflow
window, X, X and we are good.
| | 04:35 | Now from the File menu we choose Save As.
| | 04:38 | We are going to save it not as a
workflow but rather as an application.
| | 04:44 | I save it to the desktop and we will
call it Convert and it is saved.
| | 04:49 | We will take the items in our Convert folder just so
that you can see what happens, and get rid of them.
| | 04:57 | It is our original folder where we have our original
TIF images, and we will drag one of these TIF images
| | 05:02 | on to this icon on the desktop to see what happens.
| | 05:11 | Automator does its job and you saw briefly there a little
red icon indicating that a workflow is taking place
| | 05:17 | and sure enough simply by dragging an image onto the Convert
to JPEG application we created, we converted that image
| | 05:24 | and it was copied into our Convert folder
just as our workflow asked it to be.
| | 05:30 | Close a couple of folders, now those of you are hipped
| | 05:35 | to Automator might say wait a minute why didn't you
just leave the workflow and create a folder action?
| | 05:40 | The answer is because currently folder
actions are kind of hit and miss.
| | 05:44 | I tried creating a folder action for this
workflow and it you know frankly just blew up.
| | 05:48 | For those who don't know what I am talking
about here's how you would go about it.
| | 05:53 | You choose File, Save As plug-in, name the plug-in and
from the plug-in for pop-up menu you choose folder actions.
| | 06:03 | At this point I would attach to a folder and I would
choose Other, select Original and then click Open.
| | 06:11 | That all I have to do is Enable Folder Actions.
| | 06:14 | Now theoretically what would happen at this point is anytime
I dragged an image to my original folder it would convert
| | 06:22 | that image to a JPEG and then it
would drop it into my Convert folder.
| | 06:26 | As I said folder actions as I record this are a little
bit flaky and this doesn't work so at this point a lot
| | 06:32 | of Automator users find it easier to simply create an
application, drop it on the desktop and then drop items
| | 06:38 | that you want to affect onto that
application and your workflow is executed
| | 06:44 | and so much for our first handy Automator workflow.
| | 06:47 | In the next few lessons I will show you some
other cool workflows that you can create.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Mailing images easily| 00:00 | Now that you have got the idea
behind workflows let's make a few.
| | 00:04 | First thing we are going to do is resize this window
so we can see what's going on, on the desktop.
| | 00:09 | We have got this pretty nifty image converting workflow
| | 00:12 | so let's make a similar one that
e-mails images that you drop on it.
| | 00:16 | From the photos library, we will choose changed
type of images and drag that into the workflow.
| | 00:22 | We are not going to make a backup this time.
| | 00:24 | We are going to convert this to JPEG.
| | 00:29 | Next we are going to scale those images because we
don't want huge images being e-mailed to someone
| | 00:33 | and we choose scaled image, again no back up, thank you, and
we will choose mail and then new mail message, drag that in.
| | 00:43 | When we do that Mail launches in the
background and probably checks our mail.
| | 00:50 | Now in the subject heading we are
going to call this picture 2 for you
| | 00:56 | because we don't know we may use this thing a bunch
and perhaps one time we will send one picture,
| | 01:00 | and maybe we will send a hundred another.
| | 01:02 | And something also is innocuous in the
message body and we also write 'enjoy'
| | 01:08 | because of course we sent nothing but enjoyable pictures.
| | 01:11 | Finally we choose the account that we want to send
from and in this case it will be the default account.
| | 01:16 | Back up scale images if you like you can change
this to something else, 480 is a pretty good size
| | 01:21 | for an e-mail image so I am going to leave it as it is.
| | 01:24 | Now to save it as an application we do just as we did
before, File Save As, we will call this 'e-mail pics',
| | 01:34 | save it to the desktop and we will save it as an
application and click Save, and here it is on the desktop.
| | 01:42 | Go to the Finder, hide everything else,
get an image which is a TIF image,
| | 01:49 | it will be converted to JPEG, and
drag it onto our application.
| | 01:54 | Mail launches, it produces an e-mail message
that contains our image that has been converted,
| | 02:01 | here's a little message 'enjoy', and the
subject heading is exactly as we asked it to be.
| | 02:07 | At this point all we have to do is then enter the
name of the person we want to receive the message,
| | 02:13 | lucky Christopher L Anderson, we will precede this, and
then we just simply send the message and we are good to go.
| | 02:22 | Now I am actually going to send it so off that
goes and we click e-mail and return to Automator.
| | 02:32 | We have everything in anticipation of our
next workflow, which will be a workflow
| | 02:37 | that allows you to trigger something from an iCal alarm.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a timed backup system| 00:00 | Now here is one that lets you trigger
a workflow within iCal alarm.
| | 00:04 | First we are going to create a
couple of folders on the desktop,
| | 00:08 | call the first one backup, and
the second one will be backed up.
| | 00:14 | Drag backup into the workflow area and we
create a new Get Specified Finder Items action.
| | 00:22 | We need to get the contents of this, so we
choose Get Folder Contents and drag it in
| | 00:28 | and then follow it with a Copy Finder items.
| | 00:34 | So we have got our folder, we are going to get the
contents of it and now we want to copy that to something,
| | 00:40 | we don't want to copy it to the desktop, we want
to copy it to the backedup folder, we select that
| | 00:44 | and drag that into the pop-up menu,
and now our destination is set.
| | 00:48 | Now we go within Automator to File, Save As Plug-In, Plug-In
for iCal Alarm, and we call this Backup and click Save.
| | 01:00 | When we do, iCal launches and we can see it here
in the background and it creates a new event,
| | 01:06 | and it also creates a new Automator calendar.
| | 01:09 | So here is our back up event, let's edit this.
| | 01:13 | We will have this go off at 11:00 PM.
| | 01:19 | We are going to have it repeat every day, and you
can see here under Alarm that Backup is selected.
| | 01:26 | This is the action that it will take when this alarm
goes off every day at 11 o'clock and we click Done.
| | 01:32 | And if you look in the Automator calendar, you can see that
Backup is set to go off every single day at 11 o'clock.
| | 01:42 | Alright now we will click iCal
so we will show what this does.
| | 01:47 | Let's take an item and we will drop it
into the backup folder and here it is.
| | 02:07 | Now you notice there is nothing in the backedup folder
right now, but if I click Run to run the Automator,
| | 02:15 | it tells me it is copying Finder items, workflow
completed and now we look inside the backedup folder
| | 02:21 | and sure enough here is the folder that we asked to back up.
| | 02:26 | Now although I did this largely
to show you what you could do
| | 02:29 | with an iCal plug-in this might actually be a useful
thing to do, for example if you have an external drive
| | 02:34 | and want a quick and dirty way to automatically
back up a project file at the same time everyday,
| | 02:39 | you can use this kind of alarm, and now
we throw this way to clean things up.
| | 02:45 | Let's swipe everything in our workflow and delete it.
| | 02:52 | Create a new workflow in anticipation of our
next project, and this next project will be
| | 03:01 | about creating a random collection
of songs from your iTunes library
| | 03:05 | and playing them without you having to launch iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Playing songs randomly from iTunes| 00:00 | And as promised here's a workflow that allows
you to play a random collection of songs
| | 00:05 | from your iTunes library without
you having to launch iTunes.
| | 00:08 | So to start we are going to reveal the AppleScript menu.
| | 00:12 | I will tell you why in just a second.
| | 00:14 | So we go to Applications, AppleScript, AppleScript
Utility and enable the Show Script Menu in menu bar.
| | 00:22 | The reason that I am revealing this
now is because I want to be able
| | 00:25 | to trigger this workflow from within the AppleScript menu.
| | 00:29 | And this menu will show up in any
application including the Finder.
| | 00:34 | Alright so let's build the workflow.
| | 00:37 | First of all we click the Media tab,
make sure the Audio tab is selected,
| | 00:41 | and we will take the music library
and we will drag it into the workflow.
| | 00:46 | This creates a get specified iTunes out in action
and the element in it is that music collection.
| | 00:52 | Now we choose music from our library
area and play iTunes playlist.
| | 01:03 | And we will click shuffle because we
want these things to play randomly.
| | 01:07 | Finally we choose File, Save As Plug-In
we call it something like a random music,
| | 01:14 | and choose Script menu from the
plug-in for and we click Save.
| | 01:20 | At this point our command is available in the Script menu
and here it is, I choose Random Music, iTunes launches
| | 01:33 | and in the background it starts
playing music randomly from my library.
| | 01:42 | And there it is and we can quit any time we want.
| | 01:44 | Now there is one other very cool thing
that you can do with this kind of workflow.
| | 01:48 | Instead of saving it as a script action,
you can save it as an iCal plug-in
| | 01:53 | that goes off at a specified time every morning.
| | 01:55 | Of course you don't have to save it as a script menu.
| | 01:58 | Instead try this, save it as an iCal plug-in and then you
could use it as a virtual alarm clock so set the iCal alarm
| | 02:05 | to go off let's say 7:00 a.m. Monday through Friday.
| | 02:08 | Have it on a Mac that's in your
room with some speakers on it
| | 02:11 | and every day the alarm will go
off it will trigger the workflow
| | 02:15 | and randomly iTunes will play some wake up music for you.
| | 02:18 | And we will get rid of this workflow because next
we are going to look at recording Automator actions.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Recording automation| 00:00 | New in Leopard is Automator's Watch Me Do feature.
| | 00:02 | This is a feature that records your mouse and keyboard
movements and allegedly plays them back as you perform them.
| | 00:08 | I used the word allegedly because as I record this it
doesn't work all that well, it often goes off track.
| | 00:14 | So why mention it?
| | 00:15 | Well it is bound to work well one day
and when it does you can find it useful.
| | 00:19 | So let's record a fairly basic
sequence and see how Watch Me Do does.
| | 00:24 | When you first click on the Record button, you are going
to be prompted to open Universal Access and the reason is
| | 00:30 | that in order for Watch Me Do to work, you have to
enable, enable access for your assisted devices.
| | 00:36 | Once you have done that, quit System Preferences.
| | 00:38 | Now let's record our actions, click Record, click System
Preferences in the dock, go to Desktop and Screen Saver
| | 00:48 | and click Translucent Menu Bar, Cmd+W to
close the window and click the Stop button.
| | 00:56 | Now at this point we should have all our
actions recorded, let's see how it does.
| | 01:01 | We click Run, down we go to System
Preferences, Desktop and Screen Saver,
| | 01:12 | Translucent Menu Bar and our workflow is complete.
| | 01:17 | It worked.
| | 01:17 | Now all we have to do is go to the File menu, Save As,
call this 'Translucent', we will put it on the desktop.
| | 01:27 | It will be an application, save it and there it is.
| | 01:32 | Now let's see how that works.
| | 01:34 | Quit Automator and we double click on it,
and hurray, it worked, this one worked.
| | 01:48 | Again sometimes it always doesn't because there are a lot of
factors that can change, for example what if something moves
| | 01:54 | in that dock, well this mouse, this
cursor is looking for that position.
| | 01:58 | So if there is another icon in the dock, it is
going to head here or head here or head here
| | 02:02 | or head here depending what the arrangement is.
| | 02:05 | This is not a really reliable way to do this.
| | 02:07 | However, if I instead want to try to
go to the Apple menu, it is worse.
| | 02:11 | It tries to get to System Preferences but
it will pick dock instead or something else,
| | 02:15 | it is not very good at getting to that menu.
| | 02:19 | So Watch Me Do is a very interesting idea, currently
it doesn't work that well, to get the best success
| | 02:25 | out of it use as many keyboard commands as you
possibly can because it records those accurately.
| | 02:31 | It's when you start massing around and expecting it
to find things that is when it starts to fall apart.
| | 02:37 | But again, a potentially interesting feature
so keep your eyes on this as things change
| | 02:41 | and before we leave let's change that menu bar back
to the way I like it and watch Automator do its stuff.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
15. Other ApplicationsUsing the Calculator| 00:00 | There are a few applications that we skipped in the Leopard
Essential Training title that I would like to take a look
| | 00:05 | at now and we will start with Calculator.
| | 00:08 | Calculator, come on you mean it does
more than just basic arithmetic?
| | 00:11 | Well yes, as a matter of fact it does.
| | 00:13 | We will launch it from Spotlight, type
in a first few letters, press Return.
| | 00:18 | First of all press Cmd+T to show the Paper Tape.
| | 00:22 | A calculator without a record is completely useless to me.
| | 00:25 | You may prefer to work blind but I don't.
| | 00:27 | You can then save the Paper Tape by choosing File, Save
Tape As and then you can name it when your sheet appears.
| | 00:36 | Next if you find the Calculator's simple functions
too simple, click the green expand button.
| | 00:43 | Check that out, you now I have a scientific
calculator, click it one more time
| | 00:49 | and you now have a programmer's calculator
that does hex conversion for you.
| | 00:54 | If that's too much just go back to the regular
calculator by clicking the green button again.
| | 00:59 | There are also keyboard commands for this, Cmd+2 will
take you to the scientific; Cmd+3 is the programmer's
| | 01:05 | and back to Cmd+1 is the basic calculator that you
would use for working on your taxes for example.
| | 01:11 | If you like the calculator can talk to you, and to do
that just choose Speech and then Speak button pressed.
| | 01:19 | For example, "45 times 65 equals"
and there you have "your total".
| | 01:27 | This can be really useful if you got your
head buried in a page full of numbers.
| | 01:32 | Clear that and we clear this" clear", thank
you and we will return Alex off to biology.
| | 01:39 | The Calculator is also a convertor, to convert a
value, type the number you would like to convert.
| | 01:44 | So let's say we take 100, enter it here, and then choose the
conversion you would like to perform from the Convert menu.
| | 01:52 | So we add any number of conversions here we can convert
area, currency, energy or work, length, power, pressure,
| | 01:58 | speed, temperature, time, volume and weights and masses.
| | 02:02 | In this case I am going to convert currency.
| | 02:06 | We have the option here to convert
from US Dollars to Australian Dollars.
| | 02:11 | We have lots of other options we can convert to Canadian
Dollars, Chilean Pesos, Indian Rupees for example,
| | 02:19 | Japanese Yen, well let's see how
the dollar is doing against the yen.
| | 02:23 | Click OK and this tells us that US
$100 gets us 10,584 Japanese yen.
| | 02:33 | Note that the Mac updates currency rates everyday
if your Mac is connected to the internet.
| | 02:38 | So the figure you see for these kinds of
conversions should be darn close to accurate.
| | 02:42 | Now if you often perform the same
calculations over and over,
| | 02:45 | you will be happy that the Convert menu
includes a recent conversions option.
| | 02:51 | This way you can just simply select
the conversion you would like to use.
| | 02:55 | So for example, I have entered
100, convert, recent conversions,
| | 03:03 | let's see how a 100 degrees Fahrenheit appears in Celsius.
| | 03:07 | It is 37.78 degrees Celsius.
| | 03:11 | And we will clear this out and we will
close Calculator as we are done with it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Font Book| 00:00 | Your Mac will be pretty dull if it displayed all
your documents and the Mac's interface in a type face
| | 00:05 | that looked like the output from an old typewriter.
| | 00:07 | Fortunately the Mac supports oodles of fonts.
| | 00:10 | Your Mac ships with over 50 fonts and is
capable of using thousands of these things.
| | 00:15 | But with thousands of these things how do you
manage them, all that's what Font book is for.
| | 00:20 | In this lesson we will look at the basics of using
this application and we will launch it from Spotlight,
| | 00:25 | type a few characters, return and there is Font Book.
| | 00:29 | The first thing that you wanted to do upon opening Font
Book is to take a gander at some of the fonts in your Mac.
| | 00:34 | You can do this by choosing a font collection
in the upper left of the font book window.
| | 00:41 | All fonts are of course all the fonts that are
installed on your Mac that you have access to.
| | 00:46 | English fonts are fonts that use English characters.
| | 00:50 | Users for fonts that you have installed
only in your account.
| | 00:53 | You will find these in your User folder within
the Fonts folder inside your Library folder
| | 00:57 | and computer is all the fonts installed on
that Mac that are available to all users.
| | 01:03 | This contains the largest collection of fonts by default.
| | 01:06 | Below this are collections of fonts created by Apple.
| | 01:10 | Their name is pretty well described what they are for
text width, these are more fun, modern PDF and so on.
| | 01:19 | The selected font is shown in the right most pane.
| | 01:23 | Using the size slider you can shrink
or enlarge the size of the font.
| | 01:29 | To get it back where they all fit simply choose Fit from
the Size menu or you can enter a point size if you care to.
| | 01:35 | The 2-point looks like that.
| | 01:38 | We will go back to Fit so it fits nicely in there.
| | 01:41 | Just scroll through your fonts, simply select
one and use the up and down arrow keys.
| | 01:47 | To expand a type face so that you can see the
various styles it holds press the right arrow key
| | 01:55 | and then press the up and down arrow keys.
| | 02:01 | You can choose from 3 views from the Preview menu.
| | 02:04 | By default you see sample.
| | 02:06 | You can also choose Repertoire, which
displays every character in the font,
| | 02:10 | and Custom is a view that you can
use to type in any text you like.
| | 02:20 | If you would like to see the details of your font
its name, kind, language and designer for example
| | 02:25 | from the Preview menu choose Show Font Info and you get more
information than maybe you want about that particular font.
| | 02:33 | There is one other interesting way to preview your fonts
| | 02:35 | and that's the print a font book
of them and you do it like this.
| | 02:40 | Choose Print from the File menu, click
the triangle to reveal the entire window
| | 02:45 | and from the Report Type pop-up menu you have the option
to see your fonts in 3 different views one is Catalogue,
| | 02:52 | Repertoire we have talked about before you can see
all your fonts and finally Waterfall which allows you
| | 02:59 | to see a cascading view of your
fonts and then print them out.
| | 03:02 | If you like you can print the sample to paper or you can
click the PDF button and choose to open the PDF and preview
| | 03:09 | or save it as a PDF for later viewing on your Mac.
| | 03:13 | And those are the basics of previewing fonts.
| | 03:18 | In the next lesson we will get adding, enabling and
disabling fonts as well as checking on their health.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing and managing fonts in Font Book| 00:00 | You can do more with Font Book than take
a gander at what your fonts look like.
| | 00:04 | You can for example, install fonts as well as disable them.
| | 00:07 | You can create collections and libraries and fonts
and you can read out sick or duplicate fonts.
| | 00:12 | We will examine how to do all these things in this lesson.
| | 00:15 | Installing fonts couldn't be much easier.
| | 00:18 | Just locate the fonts in the Finder and
drag them to one of the collections.
| | 00:22 | I happen to have some in my Documents folder, open that
my fonts and here we have this nice bunny rabbit font.
| | 00:31 | I will drag it into computer so that it will
be available to everyone on this computer.
| | 00:37 | If I dragged it into user again it's available
only to me and to no one else on the computer.
| | 00:42 | Everyone gets to use the bunnies.
| | 00:46 | And here is our preview of the bunny rabbits.
| | 00:50 | Another thing you can do is drag a font to a collection.
| | 00:52 | We will take the Angelina font I will drag it into fun.
| | 00:57 | And here it is you notice when I do this and
select user it is also in my user account.
| | 01:05 | So when you drag it directly into collection it
is added to your user rather than to computer.
| | 01:10 | If you like to remove the font
it's easily done simply select it
| | 01:14 | and press the Mac's lead key to remove it and click Remove.
| | 01:19 | You can create your own font collections.
| | 01:21 | Just choose new collection from the File menu
| | 01:25 | or you can just click the Plus button
at the bottom of collections pane.
| | 01:29 | Name your collection and then choose a
collection that actually has fonts in it
| | 01:36 | and you can then move some into
that collection and there they are.
| | 01:44 | This is very much like an iTunes playlist.
| | 01:46 | You are not moving the real fonts into this
collection rather you are only pointing to them.
| | 01:51 | You can put the same font into
as many collections as you like.
| | 01:55 | The benefit of collection is that it becomes
available in the font panel that many programs use
| | 02:00 | and this makes it really easy to
quickly find the fonts you want.
| | 02:04 | So for example, we launch Text Edit click
Return Font Show Fonts and there are my fonts.
| | 02:16 | My collection is right there so I
can easily get to the fonts I want.
| | 02:21 | You can also export a collection of fonts.
| | 02:23 | This is useful when you need to send document to a printing
house that may not have all the fonts that you have.
| | 02:29 | Just choose a collection go to the
File menu and choose Export Collection.
| | 02:35 | You can also create font libraries.
| | 02:40 | These are different than collections in that they are
comprised of fonts not stored in the Fonts folder but rather
| | 02:45 | in any old folder on your Mac that's
accessible to your account.
| | 02:48 | This lets you temporarily use a collection of fonts for a
particular project without jamming them into a Fonts folder.
| | 02:55 | To create one choose File New Library enter the name
of the library and then drag fonts into the library.
| | 03:11 | There may come a time when you wish to disable a
collection of fonts, font family or a single font.
| | 03:17 | For example, if you have loaded your Mac with countless
fonts you may want to disable some so the Fonts menu
| | 03:22 | in a particular application doesn't
take forever to draw or scroll through.
| | 03:26 | To disable an item in font book just select
it and choose Edit Disable and then the name
| | 03:36 | of whatever item or items you have chosen.
| | 03:38 | You will be asked to confirm, do that and you
will see that the font now says off next to it
| | 03:46 | and that indicates that it is been disabled.
| | 03:48 | Finally your Mac can act up when you have a corrupt font.
| | 03:52 | If your Mac is acting a little strangely
it's worthwhile to validate your fonts.
| | 03:56 | To do so select the all fonts collection, select all your
fonts by pressing Cmd+A and then choose File Validate Fonts.
| | 04:07 | The font validation window appears and in it there
is an indication of how your fonts are doing.
| | 04:15 | If you see a green bubble with a checkmark in
it that means the fonts are perfectly fine.
| | 04:20 | If you see a yellow bubble that means there are some
minor problems and font bubble tell you what those are
| | 04:27 | and if you see red that indicates that there
is a more serious problem perhaps a font
| | 04:32 | that you would like to disable.
| | 04:35 | Let's select one that has an explanation mark next to it.
| | 04:37 | Click the triangle next to it and we will look for
the yellow icon that tells us what the problem is.
| | 04:44 | In this case we have a duplicate font.
| | 04:46 | The way to resolve this is to close this window,
choose Edit and then choose Resolve Duplicates.
| | 04:53 | This will turn off any duplicate fonts that you may have and
that in a nutshell are the essential features of font book.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing your devices with iSync| 00:00 | Not everyone has an iPhone yet they still like
to sync their cell phone and PDAs to their Macs.
| | 00:05 | The means for doing this is iSync, which
you will find in the Applications folder.
| | 00:11 | Considering that we are well into the 21st Century I will
assume that you have a phone with Bluetooth capabilities.
| | 00:16 | To sync that phone with your Mac turn on
Bluetooth on your phone as well as on your Mac.
| | 00:21 | In iSync, choose Devices, Add Device.
| | 00:27 | It will look for devices.
| | 00:28 | If it doesn't find one it will
launch the Bluetooth setup system
| | 00:32 | because you haven't yet configured your phone for Bluetooth.
| | 00:35 | In our Bluetooth system preference
movie we showed you how to do this.
| | 00:38 | We will do it again quickly one more time.
| | 00:40 | Mobile Phone Continue, it will just
resolve the name in just a second.
| | 00:54 | There is my phone I click Continue.
| | 00:57 | It's got the information it needs, continue again.
| | 01:01 | It asks that I enter a passkey on the
mobile phone, which I am doing now.
| | 01:06 | We are good to go.
| | 01:07 | I don't need to worry about accessing the
Internet with my phone's data connection.
| | 01:11 | I want to deal with iSync.
| | 01:13 | Setup iSync to transfer contacts
and events, you bet click Continue.
| | 01:18 | And it tells us we are ready to go.
| | 01:20 | I click Quit.
| | 01:21 | And here is iSync and it has my phone in it.
| | 01:27 | The phone is selected here and
there are a number of options below.
| | 01:31 | For first sync it will ask you how you want to do this.
| | 01:33 | Do you want to merge data on the
computer and device or would you
| | 01:36 | like to erase the data on the device and then sync?
| | 01:39 | In this case I am going to choose
erase data on device and then sync.
| | 01:43 | Under contacts I can decide which
contacts I would like to synchronize.
| | 01:47 | Do I want all contacts or do I want for example
just the contacts for my band that's System 9?
| | 01:54 | And within calendars I can choose
which calendars I would like to sync,
| | 01:57 | all of them or in this case just the selected calendars.
| | 02:02 | Let's say all and put events created
on iPhone into which calendar.
| | 02:07 | Let's make this work.
| | 02:09 | Now let's take a look at the More Options button.
| | 02:11 | The first one is a really great option.
| | 02:13 | That is synchronize only contacts with phone numbers.
| | 02:17 | On some phones you don't need that data.
| | 02:19 | You don't need an email address.
| | 02:21 | You don't need a physical address.
| | 02:22 | What you really want is phone numbers and
you don't want contacts that don't have them.
| | 02:27 | Leave that on and it will grab only those
contacts that have a phone number field filled in.
| | 02:33 | Next option is don't synchronize events prior to for
example, today one week ago, two weeks ago, one month ago.
| | 02:41 | You may not want to carry around a bunch
of events that have already taken place.
| | 02:46 | Maybe you need to keep track of stuff
that happened last week but beyond
| | 02:49 | that you don't want it so let's say one week ago.
| | 02:52 | Don't synchronize events after and then one week,
two weeks, a month, 2 months, 6 months, 1 year.
| | 02:59 | You know what kind of events you want to keep.
| | 03:02 | Maybe you have a recurring event that
happens every single week for the next year
| | 03:06 | and you don't want to keep a track of that on your phone.
| | 03:08 | What you really want is just data
for the next month for example.
| | 03:12 | You can synchronize alarms or not if you choose to.
| | 03:15 | You can also synchronize all day events.
| | 03:17 | You don't have to do that either.
| | 03:19 | For example if on Saturday all day, everyday, every
single Saturday you do nothing but lie on the couch
| | 03:26 | and for some reason you have entered an event that
says lie on couch perhaps you don't want that showing
| | 03:31 | up on your phone so when your friends look over your
shoulder and look at your phones say every Saturday you lie
| | 03:35 | on the couch and those are the options within More Options.
| | 03:39 | You click OK to take care of that and then to
synchronize your phone you simply click Sync Devices.
| | 03:45 | It tells you that it's made the connection
and then it goes about its business.
| | 03:53 | Now what about Palm OS syncing?
| | 03:57 | Although it's an option listed in iSync I have to
tell you that it doesn't yet work reliably with iSync.
| | 04:04 | If you want to sync your Palm device with your
Mac I strongly suggest that you pick up copy
| | 04:10 | of marked spaces missing sync for Palm
OS which is compatible with Leopard.
| | 04:15 | You can get your copy at www.markspace.com.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
16. TroubleshootingKeeping your computer healthy| 00:00 | Oh no! Blacks.
| | 00:02 | No, wait! You can hear me talking.
| | 00:03 | No this is, it's okay.
| | 00:04 | Your Mac is perfectly fine.
| | 00:06 | You see this black screen because we are now
going to talk about troubleshooting and sometimes,
| | 00:10 | you push the Power button and your Mac
does not start and this is what you see.
| | 00:14 | Let's bring a little light to the subject of
Troubleshooting by talking about the misbehaving Mac.
| | 00:21 | Your Mac can misbehave in a number of
ways and we are going to talk about kind
| | 00:24 | of the major categories and things you can do about it.
| | 00:27 | Well first with startup problems, your Mac won't startup.
| | 00:31 | This is always related to hardware rather than software.
| | 00:37 | First thing you want to do is check the Power.
| | 00:39 | Make sure that your Mac is plugged in, yes you are
going feel a little bit embarrassed when you find
| | 00:44 | out you have been pushing buttons and doing everything you
an and you are frustrated and you are not sure what to do
| | 00:49 | and then you look in the back and
you go, oh wait I need to plug it in.
| | 00:52 | And that's okay because it costs you
nothing, you are just a little embarrassed.
| | 00:57 | Next thing to do is make sure that thing
it's plugged into was actually getting Power.
| | 01:01 | A lot of times people will plug
their Mac into a power strip.
| | 01:04 | Something has happened they have stepped on the
power strip, that cats walked on it or something.
| | 01:08 | And the power strip is now switched off.
| | 01:11 | Make sure the power strip is switched on and this
is another one that catches people all the time.
| | 01:15 | If that power strip or the Mac is plugged into an outlet
on the wall and that outlet is controlled by a switch
| | 01:20 | on the wall, make sure the switch
is slipped in the right direction.
| | 01:23 | And finally listen to the Mac, it maybe on but perhaps
the monitor isn't plugged in, it maybe locked up.
| | 01:31 | It may have gone to sleep and it can't wake up.
| | 01:33 | You can tell if a Mac is asleep as you
see that little pulsing white light.
| | 01:39 | The Mac will start up but something
bad happens along the way.
| | 01:43 | The Mac may freeze or show a Grey screen and
that Grey screen is called a Kernel Panic.
| | 01:49 | This two is almost always a hardware
issue and this is how to deal with it.
| | 01:54 | Unplug anything that's plugged into your
Mac except the keyboard, mouse and monitor.
| | 02:01 | At that point plug-in one thing at a time and restart
so for example if you have three hard-drives changed
| | 02:08 | to your Mac you have got a printer on
there you have got a scanner on there,
| | 02:12 | unplug everything except the basics
keyboard, mouse, monitor.
| | 02:16 | Then shut down your Mac, plug in one thing so for example
plug in your printer, start it up, see how it acts.
| | 02:23 | Is it fine?
| | 02:24 | Great, shut down again and plug in the next thing.
| | 02:26 | So now you have got both of those things on there.
| | 02:28 | At the point where it blows up,
where it's not doing the right thing
| | 02:31 | that means the last device you
plugged in is likely the problem.
| | 02:35 | And in some cases the easiest thing you can
do is simply download a new driver for that.
| | 02:40 | So you have a printer that's acting up, oh
look there is a new printer driver for it,
| | 02:44 | install that and then everything is okay.
| | 02:46 | If you recently installed RAM and Internal Graphics card
or a PCI card in other words if you have been mucking
| | 02:52 | around inside your Mac, powered on your Mac and make sure
that everything you have just done has been properly seeded.
| | 02:59 | Press that RAM chip in a little harder
to make sure that it really got in there.
| | 03:03 | Pressing that PCI card if you have added a new hard-drive
make sure that the connectors are attached properly.
| | 03:09 | Next, try holding down Cmd+Option+PR at Startup-
| | 03:13 | that's called Zapping the PRAM- and
wait for the Mac to restart twice.
| | 03:17 | You can tell that it's restarted
because you will hear the startup sound
| | 03:20 | that bong that happens when your Mac starts up.
| | 03:24 | This will clear out something called the Parameter RAM.
| | 03:27 | And sometimes the Parameter RAM can become corrupted and if
it does it can prevent your Mac from starting up properly.
| | 03:32 | When you zap the PRAM that can fix the problem.
| | 03:36 | Another thing you can try is hold down the Shift key
when you start up until you see the words Safe Boot.
| | 03:42 | Then let go the Shift key and see how your Mac behaves,
| | 03:45 | see if it works okay you have a Startup
item that's causing the problem.
| | 03:49 | When you hold down the Shift key and go onto Safe Boot
it disables all your login items and startup items.
| | 03:55 | Toss items out if your accounts
login preference as the first step.
| | 03:58 | And you can see where that is, I showed you earlier
when we were talking about accounts but here it is.
| | 04:04 | It's in the Login Items tab within
your account and here are the items.
| | 04:08 | You would select those, you would press Minus (-) to get
them out of there and then you try starting up again.
| | 04:15 | If that doesn't work move items out of the Library
Startup Items folder and I will show you where that is.
| | 04:22 | Within the Library folder at the root level of your
hard-drive inside Startup Items, these are items that apply
| | 04:28 | to all users and can prevent your
Mac from starting up properly.
| | 04:33 | And then there maybe problems that crop up when your
Mac is running, your account acts funky and I don't mean
| | 04:38 | in that good sort of James Brown
Funky kind of like but rather in that,
| | 04:42 | oh your feet smell funky which in the bad kind of eek way.
| | 04:47 | If an application quits for example, you are
just working and everything seems to be just fine
| | 04:52 | and then suddenly it's gone and up pops a little dialog box.
| | 04:56 | One of the options in there is a Relaunch
button, click that Relaunch button
| | 05:00 | and the application will try to start up again.
| | 05:02 | If it quits again after that you
will see yet another dialog box
| | 05:06 | and this one offers you the option to Reset and Relaunch.
| | 05:10 | Click that and what happens then is that the applications
preference file also known as a .plist file is tossed
| | 05:17 | out which is a good thing because of corrupt plist file
can't prevent your Mac from running the way it should.
| | 05:23 | After that try logging out and then back in again.
| | 05:26 | If it's still acting funky try restarting your Mac
that maybe the simplest solution and it may work.
| | 05:34 | If even that doesn't work we talked earlier about setting
up a Troubleshooting account one that you never touched.
| | 05:40 | You have set it up it has admin powers but
you haven't mucked it up with anything.
| | 05:43 | Switch to your Troubleshooting
account and see how things are there.
| | 05:46 | If your Mac works perfectly well there then you know there
is something in your user account that's causing a problem.
| | 05:52 | Again it may be a plist file that could be a
corrupt font for example something like that.
| | 05:57 | Elsewhere in our training we have talked about
various things that you can do for example
| | 06:01 | within FontBook to isolate problem items.
| | 06:04 | Still having a problem, check your
Mac with Disk Utilities First Aid.
| | 06:09 | We have covered that, launched Disk Utility, going
to the First Aid tab and verify your Startup Disk.
| | 06:16 | If there is a problem you need to boot from your Leopard
disk and then run First Aid from the Utilities menu.
| | 06:25 | If that can't be fixed, tune into our next
lesson in which I talked about Disk Warrior,
| | 06:30 | which is the best troubleshooting repair utility I know of.
| | 06:34 | If you run into a wall something funny is happening and you
just can't figure it out there are lots of good resources
| | 06:40 | out there for getting information
other than this title of course.
| | 06:43 | First place to go is Apple's discussion forums.
| | 06:47 | These are forms where Apple users come
in, they talk about their problems
| | 06:50 | and people are very-very smart there they offer good
solutions or sometimes they go, hmm don't know it sounds
| | 06:56 | like you have got a problem why don't you try
reinstalling Leopard or something like that for example.
| | 07:01 | Another place to check is MacFixIt.
| | 07:04 | This is at www.macfixit.com.
| | 07:07 | This is the Mac premiere troubleshooting site.
| | 07:09 | If people at MacFixIt haven't heard
of a problem it doesn't exist.
| | 07:13 | And next and this is kind of a personal plug I write
| | 07:17 | for MacWorld our forms are a great
resource for troubleshooting information.
| | 07:21 | We have a lot of very smart people
who have come in there and are willing
| | 07:24 | to help you out with your troubleshooting problems.
| | 07:26 | Log into the MacWorld forms ask your
questions and dollars to donuts somebody
| | 07:30 | who is going to come up with the good answer.
| | 07:33 | And finally of course there is Google, you can
mind anything on Google and it's not a bad idea
| | 07:38 | if you can condense your problem
down to a few words to enter it
| | 07:42 | into the Google Search Field and see what you come up with.
| | 07:45 | Final word it's possible that your Mac is simply broken,
| | 07:50 | it happens and that's why Apple
has AppleCare and Apple-Support.
| | 07:55 | If you purchase AppleCare when you purchased your Mac
give Apple a call, they will take care of you that walk
| | 08:00 | through steps or troubleshooting the problem.
| | 08:02 | And if it is broken they will provide a way
for you to get your Mac to them to be repaired.
| | 08:06 | Also check out Apple-Support Pages and here is the address.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Disk Warrior| 00:00 | Disk Utilities First Aid is a reasonable first step.
| | 00:04 | It can repair permissions as well as diagnose and repair
some problems but there are more robust utilities out there
| | 00:10 | and the most robust of which is Alsoft's $100 Disk Warrior.
| | 00:19 | As you can see by the interface Disk Warrior doesn't
offer dozens of features; rather it offers a few features
| | 00:25 | that are invaluable when the data
on your hard drive is corrupted,
| | 00:28 | specifically it can rebuild the
hard drive's data base directory,
| | 00:32 | a directory that if corrupted badly enough
can cause your Mac to refuse to boot.
| | 00:37 | It can also check your files for damage and it can
report on the health of your hard drive, to run it,
| | 00:43 | launch it either from the Disk Warrior CD or run it from
a drive other than the one that you need to diagnose.
| | 00:48 | Similar to Disk Utilities First Aid you
can't repair the disk you boot from.
| | 00:52 | The most important test here is the directory test, this
is the one you run if your Mac is misbehaving in such a way
| | 00:58 | that it won't boot or it crashes
consistently and we will give it a shot.
| | 01:03 | We have 2 hard drives, we can't repair the
drive that we start up from but we can look
| | 01:07 | at hard drive too that we have it attached here.
| | 01:10 | We click rebuild, and we see what happens.
| | 01:15 | During this process, Disk Warrior checks the disk
for problems and rebuilds the drives directory,
| | 01:20 | at the end it creates a report that compares the old
directory to the new one and allows you to compare the two.
| | 01:26 | Along the way it repairs any minor problems that it finds.
| | 01:33 | If you see any red text that indicates that Disk Warrior
has found a problem and in all likelihood has repaired
| | 01:39 | that problem, currently we are looking at a detailed
report, let's look at the one that's not so detailed,
| | 01:44 | gives you a summary of what's been done
and a lot of this stuff is really minor,
| | 01:48 | text incorrect text encoding values
repaired, not a big deal.
| | 01:52 | Incorrect custom icon flag again, not a big deal.
| | 01:56 | Incorrect text encoding again here, not a big problem,
and incorrect values in the volume information
| | 02:01 | that can be a bigger problem and it
is a good thing that these were fixed.
| | 02:05 | Now at this point you can click Preview
as I said, and you will see 2 versions,
| | 02:11 | the real version of your hard drive
and then the Disk Warrior version.
| | 02:18 | If you want, you can compare the
two to see how it would look.
| | 02:23 | And finally, once you are ready to go, simply click Replace.
| | 02:30 | At this point as the sheet says Disk Warrior
replaces the directory with one that it's rebuilt.
| | 02:37 | If you like you can save a report or not, in this
case I will choose Don't Save, and it is done.
| | 02:43 | Now if Disk Warrior can't repair the drive it will
tell you so, and it will then offer to let you copy any
| | 02:48 | of the drive's data off to another
hard drive and this is a good idea.
| | 02:52 | If Disk Warrior can't fix it, it is
unlikely anything else will either.
| | 02:56 | Let's look at the files entry, here you can choose to
check all files and folders on the drive if you care to.
| | 03:01 | We have just repaired this drive so we are
not going to do it, but that's another option.
| | 03:05 | And finally the hardware test this will check the
drives SMART data, that's the internal diagnostic test
| | 03:12 | that hard drives have on them and they all report the
results, we will test the drive, this takes just a second.
| | 03:16 | It says the hard drives built in SMART diagnostic
indicates that the drive is functioning normally.
| | 03:21 | If you see anything other than that, that the SMART
test failed, it's time to get the data off that drive
| | 03:28 | and retire the drive, it is not
reliable at that point, and that's it.
| | 03:32 | It may not sound like much but Disk Warrior has saved
my bacon on more than a couple of crucial occasion,
| | 03:38 | it is a tool that every Mac user should own.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Onyx| 00:00 | The Mac is capable of performing a wide
variety of tests and housekeeping chores.
| | 00:05 | Regrettably many of them are accessible
only via the terminal unless you use a tool
| | 00:09 | like Titanium software's free OnyX.
| | 00:12 | I will show you where to get that.
| | 00:14 | This is a French site
| | 00:15 | and it is www.titanium.free.fr/index_us.html
and then and here is OnyX.
| | 00:27 | OnyX is similar to a number of other utilities
that also perform these kinds of chores.
| | 00:32 | The difference is first that well it's free and
secondly OnyX makes a point of telling you what it's
| | 00:36 | about to do thus giving you a chance to not do it if
either you don't understand what's about to happen
| | 00:42 | or you are concerned that you may not be happy
with the results and we will fire it up now.
| | 00:47 | The first thing OnyX wants to do is
check the smart status of your drive.
| | 00:51 | We just checked it with Disk Warrior
so I would want to cancel that
| | 00:55 | and it would also like to verify the startup volume.
| | 00:58 | And when it does that it will quit
all other open applications.
| | 01:01 | We have just recently checked that as well
so I will click Cancel but in your case
| | 01:06 | if you haven't checked your startup volume
for a while it's a good idea to do that.
| | 01:10 | It requires a password and then up pops the Help screen
to provide important details, we will close that.
| | 01:19 | As you can see OnyX is laid out as a variety of tasks,
scan along the toolbar and you see that they include first
| | 01:26 | of all verify and verify this is where
you check the smart status of your drive.
| | 01:32 | The structure of the volume and this
is similar to whatever our state does
| | 01:36 | when it's checking the verification of the drive.
| | 01:37 | And this test is to see how the plist
files or your Preference files are.
| | 01:43 | Are they sick we will verify that they are and lets
you know if we have some bad ones in here or not.
| | 01:47 | Next option is Maintenance.
| | 01:49 | Here we are with Permissions again.
| | 01:51 | It will look to see if their permissions that
are out of lack and it will repair them for you.
| | 01:56 | Scripts the Mac can run 3 kinds of maintenance
scripts so it's a daily script, weekly script
| | 02:01 | and monthly script and these scripts do different things.
| | 02:04 | They generally clean our crud that's
accumulated on your Mac.
| | 02:07 | To keep from interfering with your work
they go often in the middle of the night.
| | 02:10 | If you routinely shut your Mac down or put it to sleep
at night these scripts have not had a chance to execute
| | 02:17 | and if they don't you get this build up
of stuff that's what the scripts is for.
| | 02:21 | You can enable the various scripts and
it will tell you when they were last run
| | 02:24 | and then the scripts are executed
and that cleaning is done for you.
| | 02:28 | And then there is Rebuild, this is the
option to rebuild different kinds of indexes.
| | 02:33 | For example, your spotlight index you
are not finding what you need maybe it's
| | 02:36 | because the index is corrupted and needs rebuilding.
| | 02:39 | Side Bar or Finder Windows those aren't
showing up correctly, rebuild that.
| | 02:44 | Launch services at the database that keeps
track of which kinds of documents are supposed
| | 02:48 | to work with which kinds of applications.
| | 02:50 | For example, you may have set PDF files to open up an Adobe
Acrobat Launch Services is what keeps track of that stuff.
| | 02:57 | If you find that your documents are
opening in the wrong kind of applications
| | 03:01 | that means launch services has become corrupted
in some way and this will help repair it.
| | 03:06 | Next is a cleaning tab and in the cleaning tab you
can see that you get rid of all kinds of cache files
| | 03:12 | so under system you can get rid of Quick Time Components,
Boot Cache, International Preferences, Audio Components,
| | 03:19 | Other Components these are all cache files again.
| | 03:22 | Under User more cache files, desktop icons, dot icons,
color sync everything has got a cache file it seems.
| | 03:29 | Internet this is where in Safari you are dumping things
like browser's cache, download cache, browser's history,
| | 03:35 | recent searches these are things
that you may not want to get rid off.
| | 03:39 | For example, if you get rid of your own history you
will find that it's more difficult to go back to places
| | 03:44 | that you were in before because you
don't have a record of them anymore.
| | 03:47 | Same idea with recent searches that capability will be
gone because those items will be removed but if you want
| | 03:53 | to cover your tracks this is another way to do it.
| | 03:55 | Fonts, there are caches for fonts as well, log
files these things tend to build up over time.
| | 04:02 | Those Cron Tasks that I talked about before we will get rid
of some of the stuff but you can also delete them from here.
| | 04:08 | And then there are miscellaneous things,
things like previous iTunes, libraries,
| | 04:12 | Recent Items you can get rid of those too.
| | 04:16 | Under utilities here is an option to get rid of the
trash you can empty it from all accounts not just yours
| | 04:22 | and find you can find things very quickly.
| | 04:24 | If you find that Spotlight is not finding
what you want or is taking a little too long
| | 04:28 | to find what you want you can use this feature
within OnyX to find things also unlike Spotlight,
| | 04:33 | Spotlight by default won't look in certain places.
| | 04:36 | The OnyX find will, it looks everywhere
on your Mac and then manuals.
| | 04:40 | We talked about man files, we talked about the terminal.
| | 04:43 | Once you get in here you can read man files from within
OnyX and you can create PDS of them and then read them
| | 04:50 | at your leisure instead of saving the Mac.
| | 04:53 | Automation is where you tell OnyX to
perform certain repair and cleanup chores.
| | 04:58 | Under maintenance you can repair permissions,
| | 05:00 | you could execute those maintenance scripts
of those Cron Tasks that I talked about.
| | 05:04 | You can rebuild things lots of
services we talked about that.
| | 05:07 | Clean out some cache files all that stuff this is where you
want to go when you just want to generally tidy up your Mac.
| | 05:14 | Come in here if you haven't executed those
maintenance scripts enable that as well.
| | 05:19 | Click Execute and OnyX will get
in there and clean things out.
| | 05:23 | Finally parameters, this isn't really related to
cleaning things up but it's very cool nonetheless.
| | 05:29 | This is an option for tweaking
the Mac's interface for example,
| | 05:33 | you can change how scroll bars appear in Finder windows.
| | 05:36 | Double at bottom and right.
| | 05:37 | I often double at both ends I think that's
a really cool thing to be able to do.
| | 05:42 | I am not going to do it right now though.
| | 05:44 | You can also animate the desktop background
let's just see what that looks like.
| | 05:49 | We will use Abstract and we will click Start.
| | 05:55 | I will minimize this so you can see what that looks
| | 05:56 | like so here I have got an Active
Macintosh and yet my background is moving.
| | 06:04 | Let's just choose one other because I like it so much,
minimize again and once again here I have got my Active Mac,
| | 06:17 | I can do stuff on it but I have got a screensaver
like background which I think is so cool.
| | 06:24 | But as it says this function requires
a relatively powerful computer.
| | 06:28 | We are running like the fastest Mac on
earth right now so this looks great.
| | 06:32 | But if you have something like a Mac Mini for
example this is not something you want to do
| | 06:37 | because it will really, really, really slow down your Mac.
| | 06:40 | And there are other ways that you can customize the Mac.
| | 06:43 | You can change the way things are zoomed in the
dock, you can choose the kind of affect it has.
| | 06:50 | Right now we have the standard dock, look but
you can also do 2D with a transparency effect.
| | 06:54 | That quits the dock.
| | 06:55 | We don't want to do that right now, lots and lots of
things you can change the way in Expose and Dashboard look.
| | 07:01 | You can change some of the stuff in Safari automatically
open PDF files in Safari instead of going into preview.
| | 07:07 | You can disable the Safari cache, you can enable the back
and forward buttons lots and lots of things that you can do.
| | 07:14 | Login things you can change, and
miscellaneous stuff going here and dig around
| | 07:19 | and knock yourself out and have a great time.
| | 07:21 | And that's OnyX.
| | 07:24 | It does lots of things and the one warning I can issue
about OnyX is that if you don't know what something does,
| | 07:31 | if it says I am going to rebuild the Framistan and
you have no idea what that means, don't touch it.
| | 07:38 | The way people sometimes get into trouble
with using applications on their Mac
| | 07:42 | and tweaking the settings is they
don't know what they are doing
| | 07:45 | and when they do it they maybe
very unhappy with the results.
| | 07:48 | If you looked in that Help file where there is
important information about OnyX the very first thing
| | 07:52 | that developer says is back up your data and he is right.
| | 07:56 | Back it up because then if something happens, if
something untoward happens that shouldn't happen
| | 08:01 | but does you will have a backup if you did it,
if you bring things back the way they were.
| | 08:05 | You don't want to risk your data just because you
want to change your desktop pattern or you want
| | 08:10 | to put arrows in different parts of the Finder?
| | 08:12 | Play it safe and you will be very happy with OnyX.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | Mac OS X Leopard is the foundation for all things of Apple and
now that you have got it under your belt feel free to explore
| | 00:07 | the other exciting applications that can
run on your Macintosh, the iLife suite,
| | 00:11 | iWork or third party applications that you can install on your Mac.
| | 00:15 | Thanks very much for watching for lynda.com.
| | 00:17 | I'm Christopher Breen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
